Руководство kx td500

  • Contents

  • Table of Contents

  • Troubleshooting

  • Bookmarks

Quick Links

DIG

ITAL

SUP

ER

HYB

RID

SYS

TEM

RUN

OFF

LINE

ALA

RM

Digital Super Hybrid System

User Manual

KX-TD500

Model No.

Please read this manual before connecting the Digital Super Hybrid System

and save this manual for future reference.

loading

Related Manuals for Panasonic KX-TD500

Summary of Contents for Panasonic KX-TD500

  • Page 1: User Manual

    ITAL LINE Digital Super Hybrid System User Manual KX-TD500 Model No. Please read this manual before connecting the Digital Super Hybrid System and save this manual for future reference.

  • Page 2
    Thank you for purchasing the Panasonic Model KX-TD500, Digital Super Hybrid System. User Manual…
  • Page 3: System Components

    System Components Model No. Service Unit KX-TD500 KX-T7220 KX-T7230 KX-T7235 KX-T7250 Telephone KX-T7420 KX-T7425 KX-T7431 KX-T7433 KX-T7436 KX-T7240 Optional KX-T7440 Equipment KX-T7441 User-supplied Single Line Telephones Equipment User Manual Description Digital Super Hybrid System Digital Proprietary Telephone Digital Proprietary Telephone with Display…

  • Page 4
    • If there is any trouble, unplug the extension line and connect a known working phone. If the known working phone operates properly, have the defective phone repaired by a specified Panasonic Factory Service Center. If the known working phone does not operate properly, check the Digital Super Hybrid System and the internal extension wiring.
  • Page 5
    TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR ANY TYPE OF MOISTURE. Note If you connect the Panasonic Wireless System (model KX-TD336900) to the Digital Super Hybrid System, the following features do not work with the Wireless System: a) Call Forwarding — Follow Me…
  • Page 6
    Cautions Accessory Order Information • Replacement parts and accessories are available through your local authorized parts distributor. • For ordering accessories, call toll free: 1-800-332-5368. Part No. KX-J07W/B KX-J15W/B KX-J25W/B W: White, B: Black Picture Description Handset cord Comment 213.36 cm (7 feet) 457.2 cm (15 feet) 762 cm (25 feet) User Manual…
  • Page 7
    KX-T7425/KX-T7431/KX-T7433/KX-T7436, Digital DSS Consoles; KX-T7240/KX-T7440/ KX-T7441, Single Line Telephones (SLTs) and their features. The step-by-step procedures required to activate each feature are discussed in detail. Illustrations of the KX-TD500 system and the required System Programming are provided under separate cover in the Installation Manual and the Programming Guide.
  • Page 8
    Introduction • Call Log, Outgoing* redials by selecting one of the last five CO calls you made, according to the number information on the display. • Conference, Unattended When you are in a conference with two outside parties, you can leave the conference and allow the other two parties to continue the conversation. You can also return to the conference.
  • Page 9
    About the Other Manuals Along with this User Manual, the following manuals are available: Features Guide Describes every basic, optional and programmable features of the KX-TD500 System in alphabetical order. Installation Manual Provides instructions for installing the hardware and system maintenance.
  • Page 10
    Telephone Company and F.C.C. Requirements and Responsibilities Telephone Company and F.C.C. Requirements and Responsibilities Telephone Company and F.C.C. Requirements and Responsibility Notification to the Telephone Company Customers, before connecting terminal equipment to the telephone network, shall upon request of the Telephone Company, inform the Telephone Company of the particular line(s) to which such connection is made, the F.C.C.
  • Page 11
    • Telephone numbers to which the system will be connected • Make: Panasonic • Model: KX-TD500 and KX-TD520 • FCC Registration No.: found on the rear side of the unit • Ringer Equivalence No.: 0.4B •…
  • Page 12
    Telephone Company and F.C.C. Requirements and Responsibilities to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate this device.
  • Page 13: Table Of Contents

    Table of Contents 1 DPT Overview 1.1 Configuration…20 1.1.1 Configuration…20 1.1.2 Location of Controls…21 1.1.3 Connection …30 1.1.4 Feature Buttons …31 1.1.5 Initial Setting for KX-T7400 Series …39 1.1.6 Initial Setting for KX-T7200 Series …43 1.1.7 LED Indication …46 2 Station Programming 2.1 Station Programming Instructions …50 2.1.1 Station Programming Instructions…50 2.2 Station Programming…56…

  • Page 14
    Table of Contents 3.2.9 [009] Quick Dial Number Set… 140 3.2.10 [010] DISA / TIE User Code Set… 143 4 Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.1 Before Operating … 148 4.1.1 Before Operating … 148 4.2 Basic Operations … 151 4.2.1 Making Calls …
  • Page 15
    Table of Contents 4.3.39 Handset Microphone Mute…273 4.3.40 Hands-free Answerback …275 4.3.41 Hands-free Operation …277 4.3.42 Inter Office Calling…279 4.3.43 Live Call Screening (LCS) …282 4.3.44 Lockout…292 4.3.45 Log-In / Log-Out …293 4.3.46 Message Waiting …297 4.3.47 Microphone Mute …302 4.3.48 Night Service On/Off …304 4.3.49 Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA) …311 4.3.50 Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA) —Whisper…316…
  • Page 16
    Table of Contents 4.4.2 Background Music (BGM) — External … 407 4.4.3 Call Log Incoming, Log Lock … 411 4.4.4 Live Call Screening (LCS) Password Clear … 412 4.4.5 Local Alarm… 413 4.4.6 Outgoing Message (OGM) Record/Playback… 417 4.4.7 Remote DND (Do Not Disturb) Control … 426 4.4.8 Remote FWD (Call Forwarding) Cancel —…
  • Page 17
    Table of Contents 5.2.16 SAVE Button (Assignment) …521 5.2.17 Single-CO (S-CO) Button (Assignment) …522 5.2.18 Tone Through Button (Assignment)…523 5.2.19 Two-Way Record Button (Assignment) …524 5.2.20 Two-Way Transfer Button (Assignment) …525 5.2.21 Voice Mail (VM) Transfer Button (Assignment) …526 5.2.22 Direct Station Dialing…530 5.2.23 One-Touch Dialing …531 5.2.24 One-Touch Access for System Features…532 5.2.25 Call Transfer…533…
  • Page 18
    Table of Contents User Manual…
  • Page 19: Dpt Overview

    DPT Overview Section 1 DPT Overview Note: All illustrations used in the initial setting are based on model KX-T7235. User Manual…

  • Page 20: Configuration

    DPT Overview 1.1 Configuration 1.1.1 Configuration Panasonic Digital Proprietary Telephones (DPTs) are available to utilize various features of the KX-TD500 System, in addition to supporting basic telephone services (making or receiving calls). There are the following nine DPT models. KX-T7420…

  • Page 21: Location Of Controls

    1.1.2 Location of Controls KX-T7420 PROGRAM Button FWD/DND Button CONF Button INTERCOM Button REDIAL Button HOLD Button SP-PHONE Button User Manual Flexible CO Buttons (Outside lines 01 through 12) AUTO DIAL/STORE Button AUTO ANSWER/MUTE Button Microphone DPT Overview PAUSE Button TRANSFER Button MESSAGE Button RINGER Volume Selector…

  • Page 22
    DPT Overview KX-T7425 PROGRAM Button FWD/DND Button CONF Button INTERCOM Button REDIAL Button HOLD Button SP-PHONE Button Flexible CO Buttons (Outside lines 01 through 24) AUTO DIAL/STORE Button RINGER Volume Selector AUTO ANSWER/MUTE Button Microphone PAUSE Button TRANSFER Button MESSAGE Button Used to adjust the ringer volume.
  • Page 23
    KX-T7431 Flexible CO Buttons (Outside lines 01 through 12) PROGRAM Button FWD/DND Button CONF Button INTERCOM Button REDIAL Button HOLD Button SP-PHONE Button User Manual Display (Liquid Crystal Display) With 16-character/1-line readout: Shows the date, time, dialed number or name, call duration time, etc.
  • Page 24
    DPT Overview KX-T7433 Flexible CO Buttons (Outside lines 01 through 24) PROGRAM Button FWD/DND Button CONF Button INTERCOM Button REDIAL Button HOLD Button SP-PHONE Button To lift or set down the display: – To lift the display 1 Press the LCD ADJ button. 2 Lift up the display.
  • Page 25
    KX-T7436 Function Buttons (F1 through F5) Flexible CO Buttons (Outside lines 01 through 24) PROGRAM Button FWD/DND Button CONF Button INTERCOM Button REDIAL Button HOLD Button SP-PHONE Button To lift or set down the display: – To lift the display 1 Press the LCD ADJ button.
  • Page 26
    DPT Overview KX-T7220 MESSAGE Button FWD/DND Button CONF Button INTERCOM Button REDIAL Button FLASH Button HOLD Button Microphone AUTO ANSWER/MUTE Button SP-PHONE Button Flexible CO Buttons (Outside lines 01 through 24) RINGER Volume Selector Used to adjust the ringer volume. TRANSFER Button PROGRAM Button VOLUME Control Button…
  • Page 27
    KX-T7230 PROGRAM Button Flexible CO Buttons (Outside lines 01 through 24) MESSAGE Button FWD/DND Button CONF Button INTERCOM Button REDIAL Button FLASH Button HOLD Button Microphone User Manual Display (Liquid Crystal Display) with 16-characters/2-line readout: Shows the date, time, dialed number or name, call duration time, etc.
  • Page 28
    DPT Overview KX-T7235 Function Buttons (F1 through F5) PROGRAM Button MESSAGE Button FWD/DND Button CONF Button INTERCOM Button REDIAL Button FLASH Button HOLD Button Microphone SP-PHONE Button AUTO ANSWER/MUTE Button To lift or set down the display: – To lift the display 1 Press the LCD ADJ button.
  • Page 29
    KX-T7250 Flexible CO Buttons (Outside lines 01 through 06) INTERCOM Button REDIAL Button FLASH Button HOLD Button MONITOR Button User Manual DPT Overview Memory Card Pull out the card and write down the names or phone numbers associated with automatic dialing numbers. RINGER Volume Selector Used to adjust the ringer volume.
  • Page 30: Connection

    * XDP(eXtra Device Port) expands the number of telephones available in the system by allowing an extension port to contain two telephones. For more details, please consult your dealer. → Connect to the KX-TD500 System. → Connect to a Single Line Telephone (SLT) jack, Telephone Answering Machine, or FAX for XDP* or parallel connections.

  • Page 31: Feature Buttons

    1.1.4 Feature Buttons Digital Proprietary Telephones (DPTs) have the following types of Feature Buttons: • Fixed Buttons • Flexible Buttons Fixed Buttons Fixed buttons have specific functions permanently assigned to them. These default function assignments cannot be changed. The following table lists the fixed buttons located on each DPT model.

  • Page 32
    DPT Overview Feature Button T7420 T7425 T7431 T7433 T7436 T7220 T7230 T7235 T7250 TRANSFER VOLUME The button is not provided with an LED (Light Emitting Diode). » » indicates the button is available. Usage AUTO ANSWER/MUTE Button Used for Hands-free answer back; and it turns the microphone off during a conversation. AUTO DIAL/STORE Button Used for System Speed Dialing and storing program changes.
  • Page 33
    DPT Overview REDIAL Button Used for the Last Number Redialing. SELECT Button Used to select the displayed function or to call the displayed phone number. SHIFT Button Used to access the next level of Soft Button functions. Soft (S1 through S3) Buttons Used to perform the function or operation that appears on the bottom line of the display.
  • Page 34
    DPT Overview Flexible Buttons Flexible Buttons do not have specific features permanently assigned to them. Features are assigned to Flexible Buttons by Station, User or System Programming. «Flexible Button Assignment» is addressed in «Station Programming.» The three types of Flexible Buttons are as follows: •…
  • Page 35
    Can only be assigned by User or System Programming. Can only be assigned by System Programming. † Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone [DPT] integration; e.g., KX-TVS100). «…
  • Page 36
    DPT Overview Single-CO (S-CO) button An S-CO button is a CO line access button. This allows you to access a specific CO line by pressing an S-CO button. An incoming CO call can be directed to an S-CO button. Conditions •…
  • Page 37
    • When your extension is assigned as an incoming call destination for a CO line, you cannot receive any incoming CO calls unless a G-CO, L-CO or S-CO button associated with the CO line is assigned. Programming Guide References • 4.3 Extension Line –…
  • Page 38
    DPT Overview User Manual References • 1.1.4 Feature Buttons • 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment • 3.2.5 [005] Flexible CO Button Assignment • 4.3.54 Outward Dialing, Trunk Access User Manual…
  • Page 39: Initial Setting For Kx-T7400 Series

    1.1.5 Initial Setting for KX-T7400 Series The Jog Dial can be used for the display contrast and the volume control. Rotate the Jog Dial in either direction as desired. The contrast or the volume level will change as follows. Left (counterclockwise) Level decreases Display Contrast Adjustment…

  • Page 40
    DPT Overview When using the headset The Panasonic Digital Super Hybrid System supports the use of a headset with a Proprietary Telephone (PT). When you use the headset (optional), you should switch the selection mode first. Selection is explained in Section «2.2.5 Handset / Headset Selection.»…
  • Page 41
    To adjust the headset volume SP-PHONE To adjust the ringer volume —KX-T7433 and KX-T7436 RING User Manual Be sure the headset is connected. Press the SP-PHONE button. Rotate the Jog Dial in the desired direction. • The display shows: <Example> ( volume level 3) Headset:*** While the telephone is ringing…
  • Page 42
    DPT Overview —KX-T7431 MODE —KX-T7420 and KX-T7425 HIGH To adjust the speaker volume SP-PHONE Conditions • If the ringer volume of the KX-T7431 is set to OFF, the display while on-hook is as follows. Ring Off 12:00P • By pressing » ,» the display changes to show your extension number and name. 101: John Smith While the telephone is idle and on-hook Press the MODE button five times.
  • Page 43: Initial Setting For Kx-T7200 Series

    VOLUME When using the headset The Panasonic Digital Super Hybrid System supports the use of a headset with a Proprietary Telephone (PT). When you use the headset (optional), you should switch the selection mode first. Selection is explained in Section «2.2.5 Handset / Headset Selection.»…

  • Page 44
    DPT Overview If your Digital Proprietary Telephone is provided with a display (display DPT), the volume level is indicated on the display by the number of asterisks. For ringer volume adjustment, three levels (OFF/LOW/HIGH) are available with the KX-T7220 and KX-T7250. To adjust the handset receiver volume VOLUME To adjust the headset volume…
  • Page 45
    RING VOLUME —KX-T7220 and KX-T7250 HIGH To adjust the speaker volume SP-PHONE MONITOR VOLUME User Manual While the telephone is idle and on-hook; Press the RING (S2) button. • The telephone will ring. Press the VOLUME (UP / DOWN ) Control button. •…
  • Page 46: Led Indication

    DPT Overview 1.1.7 LED Indication The Light Emitting Diode (LED) buttons indicate the line conditions with lighting patterns. Flashing light patterns Slow flashing (60 flash/minute) Moderate flashing (120 flash/minute) Rapid flashing (240 flash/minute) LED Indication on the INTERCOM Button The table below shows the lighting patterns for intercom line conditions. INTERCOM button Green On Green slow flashing…

  • Page 47
    CO Button Green On Green slow flashing Green moderate flashing Green rapid flashing Red On Red slow flashing Red rapid flashing — Items marked with «*» are only available on the Single-CO button. BLF on DSS Button The Busy Lamp Field (BLF) indicator button is red when the corresponding extension is busy. This is available for Direct Station Selection (DSS) buttons on DSS Consoles and for flexible CO buttons assigned as DSS buttons on Proprietary Telephones.
  • Page 48
    DPT Overview User Manual…
  • Page 49: Station Programming

    Station Programming Section 2 Station Programming Note: All illustrations used in this section are based on model KX-T7235. User Manual…

  • Page 50: Station Programming Instructions

    Station Programming 2.1 Station Programming Instructions 2.1.1 Station Programming Instructions Station Programming allows you, the Proprietary Telephone (PT) users, to program certain features from your telephone individually. To program, you need to switch your telephone to the Station Programming mode. During programming mode, your telephone is in the busy condition to both inside and outside callers.

  • Page 51
    Station Programming Exiting Station Programming mode When the display shows the initial programming mode; PROGRAM Press PROGRAM. To exit the Station Programming mode, press PROGRAM. You are in the call handling mode. User Manual…
  • Page 52
    C.W. Tone1 † Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone [DPT] integration; e.g., KX-TVS100). —To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM].
  • Page 53
    Confirming the assigned data on the Flexible button —Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. Press the desired Flexible (CO,DSS,PF) button. The display shows the current status. —To exit Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM]. —If you wish to change the data, follow the programming procedure explained in this section.
  • Page 54
    PROGRAM Phantom (F1 — F10) * : Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone [DPT] integration; e.g., KX-TVS100). (Station Programming) Direct Station Selection (DSS) Button…
  • Page 55
    [Function Assignment] PROGRAM † Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone [DPT] integration; e.g., KX-TVS100). User Manual (Preferred Line Assignment — Outgoing)
  • Page 56: Station Programming

    Station Programming 2.2 Station Programming 2.2.1 Bilingual Display Selection Allows you to select the display in English or French. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. Dial 82. Dial 1 or 2. 1 : for the English display 2 : for the French display The display shows the current display type.

  • Page 57: Call Waiting Tone Type Assignment

    2.2.2 Call Waiting Tone Type Assignment Allows you to select the call waiting tone type (Tone 1 or Tone 2). — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. Dial 5. Dial 1 or 2. 1 : to select Call Waiting Tone 1 2 : to select Call Waiting Tone 2 The display shows the current tone type.

  • Page 58: Flexible Button Assignment

    Station Programming 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment Each Flexible (CO,DSS,PF) button on your PT and DSS Console can be assigned as various feature buttons such as an Account Button, FWD/DND Button, etc. The features assignable are limited by the button type. Please refer to «Flexible Buttons» in Section «1.1.4 Feature Buttons.»…

  • Page 59
    Alarm Button (Assignment) Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO) button as an Alarm button. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. (CO) Press the desired Flexible (CO) button you wish to assign as the Alarm button.
  • Page 60
    Station Programming Alert Button (Assignment) Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO) button as an Alert button. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. (CO) Press the desired Flexible (CO) button you wish to assign as the Alert button.
  • Page 61
    Answer Button (Assignment) Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO, DSS, PF) button as an Answer button. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. Press the desired Flexible (CO, DSS, PF) button you wish to assign as the Answer button.
  • Page 62
    Station Programming Conference (CONF) Button (Assignment) Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO, DSS, PF) button as a Conference (CONF) button. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. Press the desired Flexible (CO, DSS, PF) button you wish to assign as the Conference button.
  • Page 63
    DAY/NIGHT Button (Assignment) Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO, DSS) button as a DAY/NIGHT button. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. Press the desired Flexible (CO, DSS) button you wish to assign as the DAY/NIGHT button.
  • Page 64
    Station Programming Direct Station Selection (DSS) Button (Assignment) Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO, DSS) button as a DSS button. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. Press the desired Flexible Dial 1.
  • Page 65
    FWD/DND Button (Assignment) Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO, DSS, PF) button as an FWD/DND button. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. Press the desired Flexible (CO, DSS, PF) button you wish to assign as the FWD/DND button.
  • Page 66
    Station Programming Group FWD Button (Assignment) Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO, DSS) button as a Group FWD button. —Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. Dial 98. Press the desired Flexible (CO, DSS) button you wish to assign as the Group FWD button.
  • Page 67
    Group Log-In / Log-Out Button (Assignment) Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO) button as a Group Log-In / Log-Out button. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. (CO) Dial 79. Press the desired Flexible (CO) button you wish to assign as the Group Log-In / Log-Out button.
  • Page 68
    Station Programming Group-CO (G-CO) Button (Assignment) Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO, DSS) button as a Group-CO button. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. Press the desired Flexible (CO, DSS) button you wish to assign as a G-CO button.
  • Page 69
    LCS Cancel — To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM]. Available when the Digital Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone [DPT] integration; e.g., KX-TVS100). User Manual…
  • Page 70
    Station Programming Log-In / Log-Out Button (Assignment) Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO) button as a Log-In / Log-Out button. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. (CO ) Press the desired Flexible (CO) button you wish to assign as the Log-In/Log-Out button.
  • Page 71
    Message Waiting (MESSAGE) Button (Assignment) Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO, DSS) button as a Message Waiting (MESSAGE) button. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. Press the desired Flexible(CO, DSS) button you wish to assign as the Message Waiting button, <PT Display Example>…
  • Page 72
    Station Programming One-Touch Dialing Button (Assignment) Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO, DSS, PF) button as a One-Touch Dialing button. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. Press the desired Flexible Dial 2.
  • Page 73
    Phantom Button (Assignment) Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO) button as a Phantom button. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. (CO) Press the desired Flexible Dial 72. (CO) button you wish to assign as a Phantom button.
  • Page 74
    Station Programming Primary Directory Number (PDN) Button (Assignment) Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO) button as a PDN button. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. (CO) Press the desired Flexible (CO) button you wish to assign as a PDN button.
  • Page 75
    Release Button (Assignment) Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO, DSS, PF) button as a Release button. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. Press the desired Flexible (CO, DSS, PF) button you wish to assign as the Release button.
  • Page 76
    Station Programming Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Button (Assignment) Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO) button as an SDN button. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. (CO) Press the desired Flexible Dial 75.
  • Page 77
    Single-CO (S-CO) Button (Assignment) Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO, DSS) button as a Single-CO button. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. Press the desired Flexible Dial 0. (CO, DSS) button you wish to assign as an S-CO button.
  • Page 78
    Station Programming Tone Through Button (Assignment) Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO, DSS) button as a Tone Through button. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. Press the desired Flexible (CO, DSS) button you wish to assign as the Tone Through button.
  • Page 79
    – [EXT No.1] Group No. – [EXT No.2] DN Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone [DPT] integration; e.g., KX-TVS100). A Floating Directory Number (FDN) is a virtual extension number which appears to be an extension.
  • Page 80
    • 1.5 VPS (DPT) Port Assignment – [EXT No.1] DN Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone [DPT] integration; e.g., KX-TVS100). A Floating Directory Number (FDN) is a virtual extension number which appears to be an extension.
  • Page 81
    – [EXT No.1] Group No. – [EXT No.2] DN – [EXT No.2] Group No. Voice Mail (VM) Transfer Button (Assignment) Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO, DSS, PF) button as a VM Transfer button. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. Press the desired Flexible Dial 8.
  • Page 82: Full One-Touch Dialing Assignment

    Station Programming 2.2.4 Full One-Touch Dialing Assignment Allows you to enable or disable the «Full One-Touch Dialing» function. The «Hands-free Operation» mode is activated by pressing a One-Touch Dialing button, DSS button, REDIAL button or SAVE button. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. Dial 3.

  • Page 83: Handset / Headset Selection

    2.2.5 Handset / Headset Selection Allows you to select the handset mode or headset mode. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. Dial 9. Dial 1 or 2. 1 : to select Handset mode 2 : to select Headset mode The display shows the current status.

  • Page 84: Initial Display Selection

    Station Programming 2.2.6 Initial Display Selection Allows you to select the initial display, Caller ID, CO line name or DID name which is shown on the display when a call is received. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. Dial 81.

  • Page 85: Intercom Alert Assignment

    2.2.7 Intercom Alert Assignment Allows you to select the alert mode (tone / voice) when receiving an intercom (extension) call. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. Dial 4. Dial 1 or 2. 1 : to select the Ring-Calling (Tone Call) mode 2 : to select the Voice-Calling mode <PT Display Example>…

  • Page 86: Live Call Screening (Lcs) Mode Set

    — To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM]. Conditions • The default is «Hands-free» mode. Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone [DPT] integration; e.g., KX-TVS100). AUTO DIAL STORE Press STORE.

  • Page 87: Pdn/Sdn Button Delayed Ringing Assignment

    2.2.9 PDN/SDN Button Delayed Ringing Assignment Allows you to assign a delayed ringing function on the PDN/SDN button. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. (PDN) (SDN) Press PDN or SDN you wish to assign the delayed ringing function.

  • Page 88: Phantom Button Ringing On/Off Assignment

    Station Programming 2.2.10 Phantom Button Ringing On/Off Assignment Allows you to assign a ringing On/Off function on a Phantom button. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. (Phantom) Press Phantom you Press the same Phantom wish to turn On/Off the again.

  • Page 89: Preferred Line Assignment — Incoming

    2.2.11 Preferred Line Assignment — Incoming Allows you to select the method used to answer incoming calls from the following three line preferences: No Line Preference Ringing Line Preference (— default) Prime Line Preference Follow the corresponding programming procedure according to your selection. User Manual Station Programming…

  • Page 90
    Station Programming No Line Preference — Incoming (Assignment) No line is selected when you go off-hook to answer a call. You must select a line to answer an incoming call. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. Dial 2.
  • Page 91
    Prime Line Preference — Incoming (Assignment) You are connected to a call on the line assigned as the prime line automatically, when you go off-hook to answer a call. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. Dial 2.
  • Page 92: Preferred Line Assignment — Outgoing

    Station Programming 2.2.12 Preferred Line Assignment — Outgoing Allows you to select the desired outgoing line preference to originate calls from the following three line preferences: No Line Preference Idle Line Preference Prime Line Preference (INTERCOM) (— default Follow the programming procedure according to your selection. Note •…

  • Page 93
    Idle Line Preference — Outgoing (Assignment) When you go off-hook to make a call, you are connected to an idle line automatically. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. Dial 1. The display shows the current status.
  • Page 94
    Station Programming Prime Line Preference — Outgoing (Assignment) When you go off-hook to make a call, you are connected to a line assigned as the prime line automatically. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. Dial 1.
  • Page 95: Ringing Tone Selection For Co Buttons

    2.2.13 Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons Allows you to assign a ringer frequency to each CO (S-CO, G-CO, L-CO) or DN (PDN, SDN) button. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. Press CO, PDN or SDN which you wish to change the ringing tone.

  • Page 96: Ringing Tone Selection For Intercom Button

    Station Programming 2.2.14 Ringing Tone Selection for INTERCOM Button Allows you to assign a ringer frequency to the INTERCOM button. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. INTERCOM Press INTERCOM. Press INTERCOM again. The display shows the current status The display shows the selected tone type number and you hear…

  • Page 97: Self-Extension Number Confirmation

    2.2.15 Self-Extension Number Confirmation Allows you to display your extension port physical number and extension number. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. Dial 6. <PT Display Example> 10101<=>EXT1001 extension port physical number —…

  • Page 98: Station Programming Data Default Set

    Station Programming 2.2.16 Station Programming Data Default Set Allows you to return each of the following items assigned by Station Programming to their default settings. Bilingual Display Selection (default: English) Call Waiting Tone Type Assignment (default: Tone 1) Full One-Touch Dialing Assignment (default: On) Handset/Headset Selection (default: Handset) Initial Display Selection (default: Caller ID) Intercom Alert Assignment (default: Tone Call)

  • Page 99: Station Speed Dialing Number/Name Assignment [Kx-T7235/Kx-T7431/Kx- T7433/Kx-T7436 Only]

    2.2.17 Station Speed Dialing Number/Name Assignment [KX- T7235/KX-T7431/KX-T7433/KX-T7436 only] Allows you to assign frequently dialed numbers and names to each Function button on your PT. For KX-T7235 and KX-T7436 users To store a number — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. 7235/7436 PT-PGM Mode Press Function (F1-F10).

  • Page 100
    Station Programming To store a name — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. 7235/7436 PT-PGM Mode Press Function (F1-F10). The STORE indicator light turns off. The display shows the current status. desired name Enter the name.* —…
  • Page 101
    For KX-T7431 and KX-T7433 users To store a number — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. 7431/7433 station speed dial no. Dial Enter a station speed dial number (0 through 9). The STORE indicator light turns off. The display shows the current status.
  • Page 102
    Station Programming To store a name — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. 7431/7433 station speed dial no. Dial Enter a station speed dial number (0 through 9). The STORE indicator light turns off. The display shows the current status.
  • Page 103
    Combination Table Each character can be entered by using the dial key pad, various buttons or the Jog Dial for storing names. Combination Table 1 shows the combination of the keys and the number of times to press the SELECT (AUTO ANSWER/MUTE) button, or the combination of the key and the SHIFT and Soft buttons to enter each character.
  • Page 104
    Station Programming Rotating Jog Dial (Pulses) keys (Space) < Example> To enter «Mike» — Using the SELECT button; See Combination Table 1. Press 6 and then press the SELECT button once to enter «M.» Press 4 and then press the SELECT button six times to enter «i.» Press 5 and then press the SELECT button four times to enter «k.»…
  • Page 105
    — Using the Jog Dial (With a KX-T7431 / KX-T7433 / KX-T7436 only) See Combination Table 2. Press 6 and then rotate the Jog Dial one pulse to enter «M.» Press 4 and then rotate the Jog Dial six pulses to enter «i.» Press 5 and then rotate the Jog Dial four pulses to enter «k.»…
  • Page 106
    Station Programming User Manual…
  • Page 107: User Programming

    User Programming Section 3 User Programming User Manual…

  • Page 108: User Programming Instructions

    User Programming 3.1 User Programming Instructions 3.1.1 General Programming Instructions User Programming allows you, any PT extension user who knows the User Programming Password, to program the following system features from your telephone individually. • 3.2.1 [000] Date and Time Set •…

  • Page 109
    Using the Overlay A programming overlay is packed with the telephone at the factory. This overlay should be used at all times in the programming mode since the functions of the telephone keys change in the programming mode as follows: (The original functions are in parentheses.) During Normal Operation (PAUSE/PROGRAM) (SP-PHONE)
  • Page 110
    User Programming Location of Controls with the Overlay The pictures below show the functions of the buttons of the KX-T7433, KX-T7436, KX-T7230 and KX-T7235 in the programming mode. KX-T7431 is the same as KX-T7433 except for the Soft and SHIFT buttons. KX-T7431 KX-T7433 Soft-1…
  • Page 111
    Before entering the User Programming mode Before entering the User Programming mode, confirm that: • Your telephone is on-hook, and • No calls are on hold at your telephone. Entering the User Programming mode To enter the User Programming mode: Press PROGRAM + •…
  • Page 112: Programming Methods

    User Programming 3.1.2 Programming Methods Advancing to the next stage When «SYS-PGM NO? » is displayed, you can select one of the following: • To go to program [000], press the NEXT button. • To go to another program, enter the 3-digit program address. Entering Characters You can enter characters to store names for speed dial numbers, extension numbers, etc., by using the dialing key pad and buttons.

  • Page 113
    Accessing another program address After pressing STORE, you can access another program by one of the following two methods: To go to the next program address: • Higher program address <KX-T7200 series> Press Soft 1 (SKP+) or VOLUME <KX-T7400 series> Rotate the Jog Dial clockwise.
  • Page 114: User Programming

    User Programming 3.2 User Programming 3.2.1 [000] Date and Time Set Notice It is assumed that you have read Section «3.1 User Programming Instructions.» Soft button usage is explained in that section, therefore no references will be made to them in the following instructions.

  • Page 115: Programming

    Programming Display PT <Date Setting> Dial 000. <PT Display> 000 DATE / TIME SELECT Press →. Keep pressing SELECT until the desired month is displayed. <Time Setting> STORE NEXT Press STORE. Press NEXT. <PT Display Example> 12:00 AM 12 SELECT Press →.

  • Page 116
    User Programming Conditions • After changing an entry, you can press STORE. You do not have to perform the rest of the steps. • To return to the previous field, press • If you hear an alarm after pressing STORE, check that the date is valid. •…
  • Page 117: 001] System Speed Dialing Number Set

    3.2.2 [001] System Speed Dialing Number Set Description Used to program the System Speed Dialing numbers. These numbers are available for any extension user in the system. Selection • Speed dial numbers: 000 through 999 • Telephone number: 24 digits (max.) Default All speed dial numbers —…

  • Page 118
    User Programming Programming Display PT Dial 001. <PT Display> 001 SYS SPD DIAL Repeat these steps telephone no. Enter a telephone number. To delete the current entry, press CLEAR. To change the current entry, press CLEAR and enter the new number. <To end:>…
  • Page 119
    Conditions • There is a maximum of 1000 speed dial numbers per tenant. However, this can be changed by System programming. System supports a maximum of 2000 speed dial numbers, being shared among up to 8 tenants. Each speed dial number has a maximum of 24 digits. The valid characters are 0 through 9, , and # keys, and the FLASH, PAUSE, SECRET and «-«(hyphen) buttons.
  • Page 120: 002] System Speed Dialing Name Set

    User Programming 3.2.3 [002] System Speed Dialing Name Set Description Assigns names to the system speed dial numbers assigned in program [001] «System Speed Dialing Number Set.» The KX-T7431, KX-T7433, KX-T7436 and KX-T7235 show the stored name during System Speed Dialing. Selection •…

  • Page 121
    Programming Display PT Dial 002. <PT Display> 002 SYS SPD NAME Repeat these steps name Enter a name. To delete the current entry, press CLEAR. To change the current entry, press CLEAR and enter the new name. <To end:> Press END. Conditions •…
  • Page 122
    User Programming User Manual References • 4.3.73 System Speed Dialing User Manual…
  • Page 123: 004] Extension Name Set

    3.2.4 [004] Extension Name Set Description Assigns names to the extension numbers. Selection • Extension number: 3 or 4 digits • Name: 10 characters (max.) Default All extension ports — Not Stored User Manual User Programming…

  • Page 124
    User Programming Programming Display PT Dial 004. <PT Display> 004 EXT NAME SET Repeat these steps name Enter a name. To delete the current entry, press CLEAR. To change the current entry, press CLEAR and enter the new name. <To end:> Press END.
  • Page 125
    User Programming User Manual References • 4.5.8 KX-T7235 Display Features — Call Directory • 4.5.11 KX-T7431 / KX-T7433 / KX-T7436 Display Features — Call Directory User Manual…
  • Page 126: 005] Flexible Co Button Assignment

    User Programming 3.2.5 [005] Flexible CO Button Assignment Description Used to determine the use of the flexible CO buttons on Proprietary Telephones in the system. Selection • Extension number: 3 or 4 digits • Button Code (plus parameter, if required): Button Code 0 (Single-CO) 1 (DSS)

  • Page 127
    CO/INTERCOM (ringer frequency) 1 through 8 (ring tone type number) Phantom (ringing on/off) † Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone [DPT] integration; e.g., KX-TVS100. Default For all PTs — CO button 1 = Loop-CO;…
  • Page 128
    User Programming Programming Display PT Dial 005. <PT Display> 005 FLEXIBLE CO To program another CO button of the same extension port: Repeat these steps Press CO which is changed to another button. The display shows the contents pre-assigned to the button. <PT Display Example>…
  • Page 129
    Canceling Display PT Dial 005. <PT Display> 005 FLEXIBLE CO Press CO which is changed to another button. The display shows the contents pre-assigned to the button. <PT Display Example> CO-10101 Conditions • The number of the CO buttons available for each PT varies depending on the telephone type <Section 1.16 Button Features, «Buttons on Proprietary Telephones and DSS Consoles»…
  • Page 130
    User Programming Features Guide References 1.16 Button Features • Button, Flexible • Buttons on Proprietary Telephones and DSS Consoles User Manual…
  • Page 131: 006] Caller Id Dial Set

    3.2.6 [006] Caller ID Dial Set Description Sets the identification code of the calling party (Caller ID Code) to utilize Caller ID Service provided by a specific central office (CO). If an ID Code transmitted from CO is found in the Caller ID Code Table, the caller’s ID Code or a name given to the code in program [007] «Caller ID Name Set»…

  • Page 132
    User Programming Programming Display PT Dial 006. <PT Display> 006 CALLER ID # Repeat these steps Caller ID Number Enter a Caller ID Number. To delete the current entry, press CLEAR. To change the current entry, press CLEAR and enter the new number. <To end:>…
  • Page 133
    User Programming Features Guide References 1.5 Attended Features • Caller ID Service User Manual…
  • Page 134: 007] Caller Id Name Set

    User Programming 3.2.7 [007] Caller ID Name Set Description With Caller ID Service, the calling party is displayed either by its ID Code or by its name. If the name display is required, use this program to give a name to a Caller ID Code stored in program [006] «Caller ID Dial Set.»…

  • Page 135
    Programming Display PT Dial 007. <PT Display> 007 CALLER NAME Repeat these steps Caller ID Name Enter a Caller ID Name. To delete the current entry, press CLEAR. To change the current entry, press CLEAR and enter the new number. <To end:>…
  • Page 136
    User Programming Features Guide References 1.5 Attended Features • Caller ID Service User Manual…
  • Page 137: 008] Absent Messages Set

    3.2.8 [008] Absent Messages Set Description Used to program the absent messages. An absent message, if set by the extension user, is displayed on the display of calling extension’s PT to show the reason for the user’s absence. Selection • Message number: 1 through 9 •…

  • Page 138
    User Programming Programming Display PT Dial 008. <PT Display> 008 ABSENT MSG. Repeat these steps message Enter the message. To delete the current entry, press CLEAR. To change the current entry, press CLEAR and enter the new message. <To end:> Press END.
  • Page 139
    Conditions • There is a maximum of nine messages. Messages 1 through 6 are programmed at the factory but can be changed. Each message has a maximum of 16 characters. • For entering characters, please refer to Section «2.2.17 Station Speed Dialing Number/ Name Assignment [KX-T7235/KX-T7431/KX-T7433/KX-T7436 only].»…
  • Page 140: 009] Quick Dial Number Set

    User Programming 3.2.9 [009] Quick Dial Number Set Description Stores up to eight quick dial numbers. Selection • Location number: 1 through 8 • Desired number: 24 digits (max.) Default All location numbers — Not Stored User Manual…

  • Page 141
    Programming Display PT Dial 009. <PT Display> 009 QUICK DIAL Repeat these steps desired no. Enter a desired number. To delete the current entry, press CLEAR. To change the current entry, press CLEAR and enter the new number. <To end:> Press END.
  • Page 142
    User Programming Features Guide References 1.7 Dialing Features • Quick Dialing User Manual…
  • Page 143: 010] Disa / Tie User Code Set

    3.2.10 [010] DISA / TIE User Code Set Description Used to program a list of up to 32 DISA/TIE User Codes. Each code is appended with a COS level. Selection • Location number: 01 through 32 • DISA / TIE User Code: 4 through 10 digits consisting of 0 through 9 •…

  • Page 144
    <To end:> Press END. Conditions • The KX-TD500 System can store up to 32 programmable DISA user codes with a COS level for each. Each code should be unique. User Manual References • 4.3.26 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) NEXT Press NEXT.
  • Page 145
    Features Guide References 1.5 Attended Features • Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 3.1 TIE Line Features • TIE Line Service Programming Guide References • 5.9 DISA/TIE User Code User Manual User Programming…
  • Page 146
    User Programming User Manual…
  • Page 147: Station Features And Operation (Pt/Slt)

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Section 4 Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) User Manual…

  • Page 148: Before Operating

    Time=default: 1 s) after lifting the handset. This time can be changed by System Programming. If you use a Panasonic Proprietary Telephone which has the special function button or the display or both, you will follow the operation with the button or display for easy access.

  • Page 149
    The functions of Terminal Equipment are similar to Single Line Telephone functions except for the following features: • Absent Message • Alternate Calling — Ring / Voice • Automatic Callback Busy • Call Forwarding • Call Hold • Call Hold Retrieve •…
  • Page 150
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Notes • If your telephone is not noted in the operating step box (ex. only «PT» is noted), this means your telephone does not have the ability to execute that feature. • If your telephone has the ability to perform several operations for one feature, you can select the method according to your needs.
  • Page 151: Basic Operations

    4.2 Basic Operations 4.2.1 Making Calls Inter Office Calling You can make a call to another extension. PT and SLT Lift the handset or press Dial extension number SP-PHONE/MONITOR. (3 or 4 digits). Outward Dialing You can make a call to an outside party using one of the following three Trunk Access ways. Trunk Access, Idle Trunk Access, Trunk Group Trunk Access, Individual Trunk (PT only)

  • Page 152
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Making Outside Calls by «Trunk Access, Trunk Group» Allows you to access an idle trunk line within a designated trunk group. PT and SLT (CO) trunk group no. Lift the handset For PT: Press CO assigned or press as Group-CO.
  • Page 153
    Programming Guide References • 2.2 Tenant – Automatic Route Selection • 2.3 Numbering Plan – Local CO Line Access / ARS – Trunk Group Access • 2.4 Class of Service (COS) – Trunk Group Setting • 2.6 Local Hunt Sequence •…
  • Page 154: Receiving Calls

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.2.2 Receiving Calls PT and SLT Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE. Conditions • There are three types of Line Preference for incoming calls (— No Line/Prime Line/ Ringing Line). Each preference can be selected by Station or System Programming. •…

  • Page 155
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) User Manual References • 2.2.11 Preferred Line Assignment — Incoming • 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment • 3.2.5 [005] Flexible CO Button Assignment • 4.3.5 Answering, Direct Trunk • 4.3.40 Hands-free Answerback • 4.3.41 Hands-free Operation User Manual…
  • Page 156: Station Features And Operation

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3 Station Features and Operation 4.3.1 Absent Message Capability You can select one of nine pre-programmed Absent Messages (1-9) for your extension. The display PT users calling your extension see the message you select. Absent messages are used to inform the party calling your extension of the reason for your absence.

  • Page 157
    Note • % indicates the digit where you enter the desired parameter. Canceling the absent message PT and SLT Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. <PT Display Example> Message Cancel Conditions • All nine messages can be programmed either by User or System Programming. •…
  • Page 158
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) • Absent Message Capability User Manual References • 3.2.8 [008] Absent Messages Set • 4.5.9 KX-T7235 Display Features — System Feature Access Menu • 4.5.12 KX-T7431 / KX-T7433 / KX-T7436 Display Features — System Feature Access Menu User Manual…
  • Page 159: Account Code Entry

    4.3.2 Account Code Entry An Account Code (max. 10 digits) is used to identify incoming and outgoing CO calls for accounting and billing purposes. The account code is appended to the «Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)» call record. For incoming CO calls, account code entry is optional. For outgoing CO calls, you may be required to enter an account code.

  • Page 160
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Entering account codes during or after a conversation During a conversation or within 15 seconds after the other party hangs up; 7230 / 7235 / 7433 / 7436 ACCNT account code Press ACCNT (S3). Enter account code (10 digits max., 0…9).
  • Page 161
    • An account code can be up to 10 numeric digits (0 through 9). FLASH, PAUSE, etc., are not allowed. After entering an account code, the delimiter «#» must be entered. • Memory Dialing An account code can be stored into Memory Dialing («One-Touch Dialing,» «System / Station Speed Dialing»).
  • Page 162
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Features Guide References 1.3 System Features • Account Code Entry • Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 1.6 Originating Features • Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry User Manual References • 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment •…
  • Page 163: Alternate Calling — Ring / Voice

    4.3.3 Alternate Calling — Ring / Voice You can voice-announce your intercom call or have the called extension ring. When you make an intercom call by voice-announcement, the other party hears your voice over the built-in speaker of PT and can speak in the hands-free mode. Alternating (to Voice-Calling mode) 7230 / 7235 / 7433 / 7436 If the extension you are calling is in Ring-Calling mode,…

  • Page 164
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Alternating (to Ring-Calling mode) 7230 / 7235 / 7433 / 7436 If the extension you are calling is in Voice-Calling mode, you hear a confirmation tone. Tone Press Tone (S2). PT and SLT If the extension you are calling is in Voice-Calling mode, you hear a confirmation tone. Dial Conditions •…
  • Page 165
    Programming Guide References System Programming is not required. Features Guide References 1.6 Originating Features • Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice • Inter Office Calling 1.9 Answering Features • Hands-free Answerback User Manual References • 2.2.7 Intercom Alert Assignment • 4.3.40 Hands-free Answerback • 4.3.42 Inter Office Calling User Manual Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT)
  • Page 166: Answer And Release Buttons Operation

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.4 ANSWER and RELEASE buttons Operation ANSWER and RELEASE buttons are useful when using the headset or in hands-free mode. With the ANSWER button, you can answer all incoming calls to the paired telephone. With the RELEASE button, you can disconnect the line during or after a conversation or complete a Call Transfer.

  • Page 167
    Conditions • ANSWER and RELEASE Buttons Assignment ANSWER and RELEASE buttons are provided as a fixed button on the KX-T7441 (DSS Console). For other PTs and DSS Consoles, these buttons can be assigned to a flexible (CO, DSS, PF) button by Station, User or System Programming. •…
  • Page 168: Answering, Direct Trunk

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.5 Answering, Direct Trunk You can answer a CO call by pressing a flashing CO button directly. You do not have to lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button. To answer an incoming CO call (CO) Press the CO that is flashing green or red rapidly.

  • Page 169
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) User Manual References • 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment • 3.2.5 [005] Flexible CO Button Assignment • 4.3.41 Hands-free Operation User Manual…
  • Page 170: Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-On)

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.6 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-On) When the selected CO line or extension you have dialed is busy, dial the camp-on code and hang up. Your telephone will ring when the selected CO line or the called party becomes idle. Setting 7230 / 7235 / 7433 / 7436 If you hear a busy tone after making a call (intercom or outside);…

  • Page 171
    Answering an intercom recall PT and SLT If you hear the telephone ringing; Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. <PT Display Example> xxxx: Free You hear a ringback tone and the other extension begins to ring automatically. Answering a CO line recall PT and SLT If you hear the telephone ringing;…
  • Page 172
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Canceling PT and SLT Dial 46. Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. Conditions • If you do not answer the recall ringing within 10 seconds (four callback ring signals), this feature is canceled automatically. • If the called party becomes busy again after the callback ringing starts, the ringing stops but this feature will be executed again when the extension becomes free.
  • Page 173: Background Music (Bgm)

    4.3.7 Background Music (BGM) You can hear background music through the built-in speaker of your PT. An external music source, such as a radio, must be connected. The music stops whenever a call comes in or when you go off-hook. Setting / Canceling 7230 / 7235 / 7433 / 7436 When the handset is on the cradle and the SP-PHONE button is off;…

  • Page 174
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) • Distinctive Dial Tone When this feature is assigned to the extension, the extension user may hear a distinctive dial tone (dial tone 2) after going off-hook depending on System Programming <Section 2.8 System Option, «15. Special dial tone after setting feature» in the Programming Guide>. Installation Manual References •…
  • Page 175: Busy Station Signaling (Bss)

    4.3.8 Busy Station Signaling (BSS) You can prompt a busy extension (ringing or during a call) to answer your call. The other extension hears three beeps and knows that you are waiting. 7230 / 7235 / 7433/ 7436 If you hear a busy tone after making an intercom call; Press BSS (S1).

  • Page 176
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) • BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA If an extension user dials «1» while hearing a busy tone, BSS or OHCA or Whisper OHCA may be activated at the called extension. This is determined by the following conditions. Calling extension COS-OHCA assignment…
  • Page 177: Call Forwarding

    4.3.9 Call Forwarding Automatically transfers incoming calls to the pre-assigned extension or to an external party. The following types are available: Type Call Forwarding — All Calls Call Forwarding — Busy Call Forwarding — No Answer Call Forwarding — Busy/No Answer Call Forwarding —…

  • Page 178
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Setting 7436/7235 FWD/DND Lift the handset or Press FWD/DND. press SP-PHONE. FWD/DND Cancel Do Not Disturb FWD-All Calls ( ext) extension no. extension no. ( ext) FWD-Busy ( ext) FWD-No Answer MENU PREV NEXT Enter extension NEXT number.
  • Page 179
    Setting PT and SLT FWD/DND For PT For SLT, PT Lift the handset For PT: Press FWD/DND. or press For SLT, PT: Dial 710. SP-PHONE/ MONITOR. You may press the flexible button assigned as the FWD/DND button instead. User Manual Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) For «Follow Me,»…
  • Page 180
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Canceling 7436/7235 FWD/DND Lift the Press FWD/DND. handset or press From destination SP-PHONE. PT and SLT FWD/DND Lift the handset For PT: Press FWD/DND. or press For SLT, PT: Dial 710. SP-PHONE/MONITOR. You may press the flexible button assigned as the FWD/DND button instead.
  • Page 181
    Conditions [General] • Types of calls which are forwarded by these features are: Outside calls Direct In Line (DIL) 1:1; Direct Inward Dialing (DID); Direct Inward Dialing (DID) (ISDN); Direct Inward System Access (DISA); Intercept Routing; Multiple Directory Number (MDN) TIE;…
  • Page 182
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) • Confirmation tone Confirmation tone 2 (two beeps) is sent when the previously programmed data is same as the new data. If it is not, confirmation tone 1 (one beep) is sent. Please refer to Section «6.1.3 Tone List»…
  • Page 183
    [To CO / TIE Line] • Class of Service Class of Service programming determines the extension that can perform this feature <Section 2.4 Class of Service (COS), «Call FWD to CO / TIE» in the Programming Guide>. • Treatment of the forwarded call Toll Restriction, Automatic Route Selection (ARS) and Account Code Entry requirements of the extension in Call Forwarding mode still apply to the call forwarded by this feature.
  • Page 184
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) • Co-to-CO Line Call If a call between two outside parties is established by this feature, the call duration is determined by System Programming <Section 2.5 System Timer, «CO-to-CO Line Call Duration Time» in the Programming Guide>. An alarm tone is sent to both outside parties 15 seconds before the time-out.
  • Page 185
    1.8 Ringing Features • Do Not Disturb (DND) 1.11 Transferring Features • Call Forwarding 3.1 TIE Line Features • TIE Line and Outside (CO) Line Connection User Manual References • 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment • 3.2.5 [005] Flexible CO Button Assignment •…
  • Page 186: Call Forwarding — All Calls To An Incoming Group

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.10 Call Forwarding — All Calls to an Incoming Group Automatically transfers all calls to an Incoming Group to the pre-assigned Incoming Group or Extension Group. Setting PT and SLT Lift the handset or press Dial 7141.

  • Page 187
    Conditions • Types of calls which are forwarded by this feature are: Outside calls Direct In Lines (DIL); Direct Inward Dialing (DID); Direct Inward Dialing (DID) (ISDN); Direct Inward System Access (DISA); Intercept Routing; Multiple Directory Number (MDN); TIE; Transfer Intercom calls Extension;…
  • Page 188
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) • While setting, you can temporarily cancel this feature by pressing the Group FWD button. Pressing the Group FWD button alternates between setting and canceling the mode. The lighting patterns of the Group FWD button are as follows: Off: This feature is not set.
  • Page 189: Call Hold

    4.3.11 Call Hold You can place a call (intercom or outside) on hold (Call Hold). While the call is on hold, you can make or receive other calls. The held call can be retrieved not only from your extension but from any other extension in the same tenant (Call Hold Retrieve).

  • Page 190
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Retrieving an outside call held at another extension PT and SLT At another extension; Lift the handset or press Dial 53. SP-PHONE/MONITOR. At another extension; (CO) Press CO whose indicator is flashing red slowly. The CO indicator light turns steady green.
  • Page 191
    Placing a call on exclusive hold During a conversation; HOLD Press HOLD. Press HOLD again. Confirmation tone (optional) The CO or INTERCOM or DN indicator light flashes green slowly. The current call is placed on hold. Retrieving a call on exclusive hold (CO) INTERCOM (DN)
  • Page 192
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) • It is possible to disable the Hold Recall tone by System Programming <Section 2.5 System Timer, «Hold Recall Time» in the Programming Guide>. • Automatic Disconnection If an inside / outside call put on hold is not retrieved within 30 minutes, it is disconnected automatically.
  • Page 193
    – Confirmation tone for Call Pickup, Paging, Paging – Answer, TAFAS – Answer, Hold Retrieve and Call Park Retrieve Features Guide References 1.3 System Features • Music on Hold 1.10 Holding Features • Call Hold • Call Park 1.13 Audible Tone Features •…
  • Page 194: Call Park

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.12 Call Park Allows you to place a held call into a system parking area. You can be released from the parked call to perform other operations. The parked call can be retrieved from any extension. Parking a call PT and SLT During a conversation;…

  • Page 195
    Retrieving a parked call PT and SLT Dial 52. Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. Conditions • Up to 800 calls can be parked at the same time in the system. • Tenant Service If «Tenant Service» is employed, each tenant can use up to 100 parking areas (00-99) independently.
  • Page 196
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Features Guide References 1.10 Holding Features • Call Park 1.12 Conversation Features • Conference, 5-Party User Manual References • 4.3.22 Conference, 5-Party • 4.5.9 KX-T7235 Display Features — System Feature Access Menu • 4.5.12 KX-T7431 / KX-T7433 / KX-T7436 Display Features — System Feature Access Menu User Manual…
  • Page 197: Call Pickup

    4.3.13 Call Pickup Allows you to answer a call (intercom, outside, doorphone) ringing at any other extension. The following types are available. Feature Type Directed Group CO Line Preventing other extensions from picking up calls ringing at your extension is also possible (Call Pickup Deny).

  • Page 198
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Call Pickup, Group PT and SLT Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. Conditions [General] • Confirmation Tone A confirmation tone is sent to the extension user who picked up the call. Eliminating the tone is programmable <Section 2.8 System Option, «9. Confirmation tone for Call Pickup, Paging, Paging-Answer, TAFAS-Answer, Hold Retrieve and Call Park Retrieve «…
  • Page 199
    [CO Line] • Tenant Service If «Tenant Service» is utilized, this feature is only available for an outside call ringing on an extension within the same tenant. • If more than one CO call is ringing on an extension, Call Pickup starts with the first arrived CO call.
  • Page 200: Call Pickup Deny

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.14 Call Pickup Deny Allows you to prevent another extension from picking up your calls with the «Call Pickup» feature. Setting / Canceling PT and SLT Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. <PT Display Example> When setting: C.Pickup Deny Hang up or press…

  • Page 201
    Programming Guide References • 2.3 Numbering Plan – Dial Call Pickup Deny Set / Cancel • 2.8 System Option – Special dial tone after setting feature • 4.3 Extension Line – Call Pickup Deny Features Guide References 1.9 Answering Features •…
  • Page 202: Call Splitting

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.15 Call Splitting Allows you to have two callers on a line and alternate between them. If a call comes in while you are already on the line, you can place the current call (1st call) on hold and have a conversation with the other party (2nd call).

  • Page 203
    When you are engaged in the 2nd call (inside/outside), while placing the 1st call (inside/ outside) on (exclusive) hold HOLD (CO) INTERCOM Press HOLD. Press CO or INTERCOM or DN. Conditions • This feature does not work during a doorphone call or paging. Programming Guide References System Programming is not required.
  • Page 204: Call Transfer

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.16 Call Transfer You can transfer a call (intercom, CO, TIE) to another extension or external party. The following types are available. Feature Type Screened to Extension to CO/TIE Line Unscreened to Extension to CO/TIE Line Transferring a call to an extension (Screened) PT and SLT During a conversation;…

  • Page 205
    Transferring a call to an extension (Unscreened) PT and SLT During a conversation; TRANSFER For PT For SLT For PT: Press TRANSFER. For SLT: Flash the switchhook. The other party is placed on hold. Ringing starts at the destination extension. Transferring a call to the Remote Resource (Unscreened) PT and SLT During a conversation;…
  • Page 206
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) One-Touch Transfer During a conversation with an external party; (DSS) Press DSS (flexible button). The other party is placed on hold and the destination extension is called immediately. Transferring a call to an external party via a CO or TIE line (Screened) PT and SLT During a conversation;…
  • Page 207
    Transferring a call to an external party via a CO or TIE line (Unscreened) PT and SLT During a conversation; TRANSFER For PT For SLT For PT: Press TRANSFER. Confirmation For SLT: Flash the switchhook. tone and dial tone The current call is placed on hold. Conditions [General] •…
  • Page 208
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 2.4 Class of Service (COS), «Automatic Hold» in the Programming Guide>. However, it cannot be performed when there is another call on Consultation Hold. • DSS Button DSS buttons are provided on a DSS Console by default. A flexible CO/DSS button can be assigned as a DSS button by Station, User or System Programming.
  • Page 209
    [Unscreened – To Extension] • Transfer Recall Destination If the call (intercom, CO, TIE) transferred to the destination extension is not answered within a specified period of time <Section 2.5 System Timer, «Transfer Recall Time» in the Programming Guide>, it may ring an Operator extension instead of the extension who originally transferred it.
  • Page 210
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) – DSS Key Features Guide References 1.3 System Features • Limited Call Duration • Music on Hold • Released Link Operation 1.10 Holding Features • Automatic Hold—For Hold 1.11 Transferring Features • Call Transfer • One-Touch Transfer 1.12 Conversation Features •…
  • Page 211: Call Waiting

    4.3.17 Call Waiting During a call, a Call Waiting tone informs you that there is another call waiting for you. You can answer the second call by disconnecting or placing the current call on hold. PT users can choose one of three Call Waiting modes. Setting 1.

  • Page 212
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Canceling PT and SLT Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. <PT Display Example> C.Waiting Off To talk to the new party by terminating the current call While hearing a Call Waiting tone; (CO) INTERCOM (DN) Press the flashing CO or INTERCOM or DN.
  • Page 213
    To talk to the new party by holding the current call While hearing the Call Waiting tone and the CO or INTERCOM or DN indicator is flashing rapidly; HOLD (CO) INTERCOM Press the flashing Press HOLD. CO or INTERCOM or DN. The current call is placed on hold.
  • Page 214
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Conditions • BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA If an extension user dials «1» while hearing a busy tone, BSS or OHCA or Whisper OHCA may be activated at the called extension. This is determined by the following conditions. Calling extension COS-OHCA assignment…
  • Page 215
    – Call Waiting Set / Cancel • 2.4 Class of Service (COS) – Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA) • 2.8 System Option – Special dial tone after setting feature – Answering Call Waiting call by SLT hooking • 4.3 Extension Line –…
  • Page 216: Call Waiting From Central Office

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.18 Call Waiting from Central Office During a conversation with an outside party, a call waiting tone offered by the local Central Office signals your extension that there is another incoming CO call that is waiting. You can answer the second call by placing the first call on hold.

  • Page 217
    Using the feature number PT and SLT While hearing a Call Waiting tone through the handset; TRANSFER Press TRANSFER or flash the switchhook. • The first party is placed on hold. Conditions • This is an optional telephone company service. For more information, consult the local telephone company.
  • Page 218
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Features Guide References 1.9 Answering Features • Call Waiting from Central Office 1.12 Conversation Features • External Feature Access • Flash User Manual References • 4.3.35 External Feature Access User Manual…
  • Page 219: Calling Line Identification Presentation (Clip)

    4.3.19 Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP) When you make an outside call through an ISDN line, you can let the other party see your pre- assigned identification number. You can select to show an identification number assigned for an ISDN line or your extension. This is one of the ISDN supplementary service. To select a CLIP number for an outside line PT and SLT Lift the handset or press…

  • Page 220
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) CLIP number assigned to the extension line The number stored in «[CLIP Number] Public/Private» <Section 4.3 Extension Line in the Programming Guide>. • CLIP Number for ISDN BRI Line When you make an outside call using an ISDN BRI line, the number stored in «DN» <Section 1.2.10 Card Properties (BRI) –…
  • Page 221: Calling Line Identification Restriction (Clir) / Calling Name Identification Restriction (Cnir)

    4.3.20 Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR) / Calling Name Identification Restriction (CNIR) When making an outside call through an ISDN line, you can prevent the other party from seeing you identification number/name. You can change the setting at any time for a particular call.

  • Page 222
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) To change the setting at any time for a particular call PT and SLT Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. For PT For SLT, PT trunk group no. For SLT, PT For PT: Press CO. For SLT, PT: Dial 9.
  • Page 223: Conference, 3-Party

    4.3.21 Conference, 3-Party During a two-party conversation, you can add a third party to make a three-party conference. The members of a conference on a line may be three extensions, one extension and two CO lines, or two extensions and one CO line. To establish a 3-party conference During a two-party conversation;…

  • Page 224
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) To leave a 3-party conference PT and SLT Hang up or press SP-PHONE. The other two parties may continue their conversation. If both other two parties are on outside lines, they will be disconnected. To terminate one party and talk to the other (CO) INTERCOM (DN)
  • Page 225
    To talk to the original party while holding the third party Flash the switchhook. Confirmation tone (optional) To put both parties on hold HOLD Press HOLD. For an ICM type PT, this operation is available only when at least one party is on a CO line. For a DN type PT, this operation is available only when the extension user established the conference call using two different line access buttons.
  • Page 226
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) leaving the other two parties connected unless they both are on CO lines. If they both are on CO lines, they will be disconnected. • You can return to the original party before the third party answers by pressing the TRANSFER button.
  • Page 227
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) User Manual References • 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment • 3.2.5 [005] Flexible CO Button Assignment • 4.3.23 Conference, Unattended • 4.3.33 Executive Busy Override • 4.3.63 Privacy Release User Manual…
  • Page 228: Conference, 5-Party

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.22 Conference, 5-Party A PT user can originate a 5-party conference call which includes outside or inside parties or both in any combination. To establish a 5-party conference Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. Repeat these steps extension / phone no.

  • Page 229
    To terminate the 5-party conference (conference originator only) During the 5-party conference call (CO) Press an idle CO or DN Hang up or press button. SP-PHONE/MONITOR. Conditions • Up to two 5-party conference calls can be held at a time in the system, even if TSW Conference Expansion card is installed on the TSW card.
  • Page 230
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Features Guide References 1.12 Conversation Features • Conference, 5-Party User Manual References • 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment • 3.2.5 [005] Flexible CO Button Assignment User Manual…
  • Page 231: Conference, Unattended

    4.3.23 Conference, Unattended When you are in a conference with two outside parties, you can leave the three-party conference allowing the other two parties to continue their conversation. To establish an Unattended Conference During a conversation with two outside parties; CONF Press CONF to leave the conference.

  • Page 232
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Conditions • Class of Service An Unattended Conference cannot be established unless the extension is allowed to transfer a call to an outside party by COS programming. • Limited Call Duration The duration of an unattended conference is restricted by a system timer. Hold Recall tone Hold Recall tone is sent to the extension user who left the conference 50 seconds before the time-out.
  • Page 233
    • Conference, Unattended 1.13 Audible Tone Features • Hold Recall User Manual References • 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment • 3.2.5 [005] Flexible CO Button Assignment • 4.3.21 Conference, 3-Party User Manual Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT)
  • Page 234: Cti (Computer Telephony Integration) Code Entry

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.24 CTI (Computer Telephony Integration) Code Entry A CTI Code (max. 16 digits) can be sent from the KX-TD500 to the CTI application (such as Panasonic Call Center Management Software, CMS). The code is interpreted by the application for suitable action.

  • Page 235: Data Line Security

    4.3.25 Data Line Security Your extension is protected against interruptions from the «Call Waiting,» «Hold Recall,» and «Executive Busy Override» features. Data communication devices, such as computers and facsimiles, operate uninterrupted. Setting / Canceling PT and SLT Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR.

  • Page 236
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) – Special dial tone after setting feature • 4.3 Extension Line – Data Line Mode Features Guide References 1.6 Originating Features • Executive Busy Override 1.9 Answering Features • Call Waiting 1.12 Conversation Features • Data Line Security •…
  • Page 237: Direct Inward System Access (Disa)

    4.3.26 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Allows an outside caller to access specific system features as if the caller is an extension in the system. A DISA outgoing message is used to give outside callers assistance, such as listing the extension numbers in the system.

  • Page 238
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Calling an outside party From Outside Telephone In Non Security Mode: DISA phone no. Dial the DISA Ringback tone phone number. phone no. Dial the phone number of the outside party. In Trunk Security Mode: DISA phone no.
  • Page 239
    Extending the call duration while calling a CO line From Outside Telephone When you make a call to any CO line using the DISA feature, the line is disconnected after a pre-programmed time (default: 10 min) any key except » » Dial any key except «…
  • Page 240
    Delayed Answer Time» expires. The caller can dial while hearing the OGM message. • DISA User Code The KX-TD500 System can store up to 32 programmable DISA user codes with a COS level for each. Each code should be unique.
  • Page 241
    Programming <Section 2.5 System Timer, «DISA Prolong Time» in the Programming Guide>. If this parameter is set to zero, the caller cannot prolong the call duration. The caller can repeat the prolonging operation 10 times or without limit depending on the System Programming <Section 2.8 System Option, «13.
  • Page 242
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Programming Guide References • 1.7 DISA Port Assignment • 2.3 Numbering Plan – OGM Playback / Record • 2.4 Class of Service (COS) – TRS Level – Day/Night • 2.5 System Timer – CO-to-CO Line Call Duration Time –…
  • Page 243
    Features Guide References 1.3 System Features • Outgoing Message (OGM) 1.5 Attended Features • Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 1.11 Transferring Features • Intercept Routing User Manual References • 3.2.10 [010] DISA / TIE User Code Set • 4.4.6 Outgoing Message (OGM) Record/Playback User Manual Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT)
  • Page 244: Do Not Disturb (Dnd)

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.27 Do Not Disturb (DND) Allows you to prevent other parties from disturbing you. Your extension will not receive intercom and outside calls. Setting 7235 / 7436 FWD/DND Lift the handset or Press FWD/DND. press SP-PHONE. Canceling 7235 / 7436 FWD/DND…

  • Page 245
    Setting / Canceling PT and SLT FWD/DND Lift the handset For PT: Press FWD/DND. or press For SLT, PT: Dial 710. SP-PHONE/MONITOR. Hang up or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. Conditions • DND also works for an incoming call from a doorphone. • DND does not work for the following calls: —…
  • Page 246
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) • FWD/DND button Regarding the PT (7050/7055/7250) without the FWD/DND button, it can be assigned to a flexible (CO, DSS, PF) button by Station, User or System Programming. • A PT user in DND mode can answer a call by pressing a flashing button which shows the arrival of the call.
  • Page 247
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) • 3.2.5 [005] Flexible CO Button Assignment • 4.3.28 Do Not Disturb (DND) Override • 4.4.7 Remote DND (Do Not Disturb) Control User Manual…
  • Page 248: Do Not Disturb (Dnd) Override

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.28 Do Not Disturb (DND) Override You can override the «Do Not Disturb (DND)» feature set on the other extension, if permitted by System Programming beforehand. 7230 / 7235 / 7433 / 7436 If you make an intercom call and hear the Do Not Disturb (DND) tone; Over Press Over (S2).

  • Page 249
    — Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA) — Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA), Whisper Programming Guide References • 2.4 Class of Service (COS) – DND Override Features Guide References 1.6 Originating Features • Do Not Disturb (DND) Override 1.8 Ringing Features • Do Not Disturb (DND) User Manual References •…
  • Page 250: Doorphone Call

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.29 Doorphone Call Allows you to have a conversation with a visitor at your doorphone. You can also unlock the door from your telephone. Calling an extension from a doorphone — operation for a visitor Doorphone Press the Doorphone button for one second.

  • Page 251
    Calling a doorphone PT and SLT Lift the handset or press Dial 31. SP-PHONE/MONITOR. To unlock the door from an assigned extension PT and SLT Lift the handset or press Dial 55. SP-PHONE/MONITOR. User Manual doorphone no. Enter a doorphone number (1 through 8).
  • Page 252
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) To unlock the door while talking to the visitor at the doorphone from any extension 7230/7235/7433/7436 OPEN Press OPEN (S3). Confirmation tone The door is left unlocked for the pre-programmed amount of time (default: 5 s). <PT Display Example>…
  • Page 253
    • What if a doorphone call is not answered? If not answered within 30 seconds, the call stops ringing and is canceled. • Unlocking the door opener During a doorphone call, any extension user can unlock the door opener (user-supplied) from their extensions by dialing «5»…
  • Page 254
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) User Manual References • 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment • 3.2.5 [005] Flexible CO Button Assignment • 4.5.9 KX-T7235 Display Features — System Feature Access Menu • 4.5.12 KX-T7431 / KX-T7433 / KX-T7436 Display Features — System Feature Access Menu User Manual…
  • Page 255: Electronic Station Lockout

    4.3.30 Electronic Station Lockout Allows you to lock your extension so that other users cannot make outgoing CO calls from your extension. Locking PT and SLT Dial 762. Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. Unlocking PT and SLT Dial 762. Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR.

  • Page 256
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) • Distinctive Dial Tone When this feature is assigned to the extension, the extension user may hear a distinctive dial tone (dial tone 2) after going off-hook depending on System Programming <Section 2.8 System Option, «15. Special dial tone after setting feature» in the Programming Guide>. •…
  • Page 257: Emergency Call

    — in Electronic Station Lockout / Remote Station Lock • If your KX-TD500 System is connected to a host PBX as a behind PBX, you must dial the host PBX line access code after dialing the line access code and it must be included as the first digit of the emergency number.

  • Page 258: End-To-End Dtmf Signaling (Tone Through)

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.32 End-to-End DTMF Signaling (Tone Through) DTMF signaling is required for access to special network services offered by some telephone companies. This system allows you to signal the other end using DTMF tones during an established call.

  • Page 259
    Canceling End-to-End DTMF Signaling mode During a conversation; (Tone Through) Press Tone Through (flexible button). Tone Through mode is canceled. Conditions • If the dial type of the line is assigned to DTMF, Tone Through mode is established automatically after the dialing sequence is finished and the call is established. •…
  • Page 260
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) User Manual References • 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment • 3.2.5 [005] Flexible CO Button Assignment User Manual…
  • Page 261: Executive Busy Override

    4.3.33 Executive Busy Override You can interrupt an existing call. This establishes a 3-party conference call. This feature can be categorized as follows: Executive Busy Override – Barge-In (PT only) Allows the PT user to interrupt an existing outside call (either «between two outside parties» or «between an outside party and an inside party») by pressing the red lit S-CO or DN button.

  • Page 262
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) To terminate one party and talk to the other (CO) INTERCOM Press CO or INTERCOM of the party to remain connected. To leave the conference Hang up or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR . Conditions [General] • Class of Service Class of Service programming determines the extension that can perform this feature.
  • Page 263
    [Barge-in] • This feature is available between two extensions who share the same S-CO button. • This feature is available when one extension has an SDN button associated with the PDN button of the other extensions. • The pre-assigned extension users can interrupt an existing outside call even if access to that line is not allowed by System Programming.
  • Page 264: Executive Busy Override Deny

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.34 Executive Busy Override Deny Allows you to prevent other extension users from interrupting your telephone conversation. PT and SLT Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR . Hang up or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR . Conditions • Class of Service «Class of Service»…

  • Page 265
    1.9 Answering Features • Executive Busy Override Deny User Manual References • 4.3.33 Executive Busy Override • 4.5.9 KX-T7235 Display Features — System Feature Access Menu • 4.5.12 KX-T7431 / KX-T7433 / KX-T7436 Display Features — System Feature Access Menu User Manual Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT)
  • Page 266: External Feature Access

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.35 External Feature Access Allows you to access special features (e.g., Call Waiting) offered by a host PBX, Centrex or Central Office. This feature is effective only during an outside call. 7230 / 7235 / 7433 / 7436 During a conversation with an outside party;…

  • Page 267
    Conditions • Flash Time The flash time must be assigned as required by the Centrex, host PBX or CO line. • FLASH Button Operation Pressing the FLASH button on a PT results in either sending Flash signal or disconnecting the current call. This is determined by System Programming <Section 2.8 System Option, «3.
  • Page 268: External Modem Control

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.36 External Modem Control Allows you to control the external modem, connected to the RS-232C port 1 by sending a pre- assigned AT Command (for enabling Automatic Answer, etc.). Activating an AT Command to the RS-232C port 1 PT and SLT Lift the handset or press Dial 791.

  • Page 269
    – [Serial Interface Port] PROG (Port 1) Features Guide References 1.2 System Administration • System Programming and Diagnosis with Personal Computer 1.3 System Features • External Modem Control User Manual References • 4.5.9 KX-T7235 Display Features — System Feature Access Menu •…
  • Page 270: Flash

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.37 Flash You can disconnect the current call and make another call without hanging up. While hearing any tone, dialing, or talking; FLASH Press FLASH. Dial tone Conditions • Flash or External Feature Access Pressing the FLASH button on a PT results in either sending Flash signal (External Feature Access) or disconnecting the current call (Flash).

  • Page 271: Full One-Touch Dialing

    4.3.38 Full One-Touch Dialing The hands-free speakerphone is automatically activated. You can enter a phone number or access a system feature with the touch of a button. REDIAL Press a flexible button assigned as One-Touch Dialing, Phantom, DSS or SAVE or press REDIAL. •…

  • Page 272
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 1.17 Display Features • Call Directory User Manual References • 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment • 2.2.4 Full One-Touch Dialing Assignment • 3.2.5 [005] Flexible CO Button Assignment • 4.3.52 One-Touch Dialing • 4.3.66 Redial User Manual…
  • Page 273: Handset Microphone Mute

    4.3.39 Handset Microphone Mute While on a handset call, you can turn off your PT’s handset microphone so that you can consult privately with others in the room. When you activate Handset Microphone Mute, you can still listen to the other party’s voice but he cannot hear your voice. Setting While on a handset call;…

  • Page 274
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Programming Guide References System Programming is not required. Features Guide References 1.15 Proprietary Telephone Features • Handset Microphone Mute • Microphone Mute User Manual References • 4.3.47 Microphone Mute User Manual…
  • Page 275: Hands-Free Answerback

    4.3.40 Hands-free Answerback You can answer an intercom call and talk to the caller without lifting the handset. Setting When the SP-PHONE and the AUTO ANSWER/MUTE indicator are off; AUTO ANSWER Press AUTO ANSWER/MUTE. The AUTO ANSWER/MUTE indicator light turns on. Canceling When the AUTO ANSWER/MUTE indicator is on;…

  • Page 276
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) — Calls to an Incoming Group — Calls to a Phantom button — Calls from a VM (Voice Mail) extension (except a call from a PT) — Calls ringing on an SDN button • This feature is not available if your PT has no AUTO ANSWER/MUTE button. •…
  • Page 277: Hands-Free Operation

    4.3.41 Hands-free Operation You can make an intercom / CO call and talk to the caller without lifting the handset. Setting SP-PHONE Press SP-PHONE. The microphone and speaker are now activated and the hands-free operation is available. Switching from the handset to hands-free mode SP-PHONE Press SP-PHONE.

  • Page 278
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Conditions • The hands-free mode is canceled if you do not start dialing within 10 seconds. • The KX-T7050, KX-T7350 and the KX-T7250 have a MONITOR button instead of a SP- PHONE button. It can be used for hands-free dialing, etc., but not for a hands-free conversation.
  • Page 279: Inter Office Calling

    4.3.42 Inter Office Calling You can make a call to another extension user within the system or a tenant. Using the handset PT and SLT extension no. Lift the handset. Dial the extension number (3 or 4 digits). Using the Speakerphone SP-PHONE INTERCOM (DN)

  • Page 280
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Do Not Disturb (DND) tone: Indicates the destination extension has set the «Do Not Disturb (DND)» feature. • DSS Button DSS buttons permit One-Touch access to an extension and provide Busy Lamp Field. • You can assign a DSS button on a Proprietary Telephone (PT) or DSS Console by Station, User or System Programming.
  • Page 281
    – 5th Hundred Block Extension – 6th Hundred Block Extension – 7th Hundred Block Extension – 8th Hundred Block Extension – 9th Hundred Block Extension – 10th Hundred Block Extension – 11th Hundred Block Extension — 16th Hundred Block Extension •…
  • Page 282: Live Call Screening (Lcs)

    • Setting the password (Feature Number/System Programming) • Setting the LCS feature Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone [DPT] integration; e.g., KX-TVS100).

  • Page 283
    When using the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button in the Private Mode: To set LCS on Press LCS button. Enter the password. Hands-free Mode Having a conversation with another party (Call Waiting Tone) To monitor (Automatic) Hang up* To cancel monitoring To intercept the call Press FLASH or Lift the handset, or press LCS Cancel button.
  • Page 284
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) When using the handset in the Private Mode; To set LCS on • Press LCS button. • Enter the password. Hands-free Mode Having a conversation with another party (Call Waiting Tone) To monitor (Automatic) Hang up* To cancel monitoring To intercept the call Press FLASH or…
  • Page 285
    Canceling the password Dial 799. Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. Setting Live Call Screening When the telephone is idle and on-hook; (LCS) Press LCS (flexible button). <PT Display Example> Canceling Live Call Screening When the telephone is idle and on-hook; (LCS) Press LCS (flexible button).
  • Page 286
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) In the Hands-free mode; When callers are connected to your voice mailbox, the message recording is monitored automatically through your extension speaker. While monitoring in the Hands-free mode, the LCS indicator light flashes green slowly. Having a conversation with a party (LCS) Lift the handset…
  • Page 287
    In the Private mode; When callers are connected to your voice mailbox, an alert tone is sent. The LCS indicator light flashes green rapidly when a caller is connected to your voice mailbox. (When using a Single Line Telephone, which is connected with a Proprietary Telephone in parallel, you hear ringing.) Stopping the alert tone FLASH…
  • Page 288
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Having a conversation with a party Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. The LCS indicator light turns red from flashing green slowly. In Keep Recording mode, the Two-Way Record indicator lights. During a conversation with another party; When the extension user is having a conversation, a call waiting tone is sent.
  • Page 289
    — If you want to hold the current call Monitoring HOLD Press HOLD. Hang up or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. An alarm tone is sent. (PDN) Press PDN. Press ANSWER. Having a conversation with the party (LCS) Press the flashing LCS (flexible button). Conditions •…
  • Page 290
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) • The Two-Way Record indicator shows the feature status as follows. On: Recording the conversation Off: Not recording • During Keep Recording mode, if you want to stop recording the conversation, press the Two-Way Recording button. •…
  • Page 291
    Features Guide References 1.3 System Features • Integration, DPT 1.9 Answering Features • Live Call Screening (LCS) User Manual References • 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment • 2.2.8 Live Call Screening (LCS) Mode Set • 3.2.5 [005] Flexible CO Button Assignment •…
  • Page 292: Lockout

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.44 Lockout If one party in a conversation goes on-hook, they both are disconnected from the speech path automatically. A reorder tone is sent to the off-hook party before it is disconnected. No operation is necessary. User Manual…

  • Page 293: Log-In / Log-Out

    4.3.45 Log-In / Log-Out Allows the extension user to join (log-in) or leave (log-out) the group. They can leave the group temporarily when they are away from their desks, to prevent calls being sent to their extensions. They can return to the group when they are ready to answer calls. This feature can be categorized as follows: Log-In/Log-Out Allows members (extension users) of an Extension Group (except Group Type: None) and…

  • Page 294
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Log-In / Log-Out for members of an Extension Group and Phantom Extensions (Using the feature number) PT and SLT Lift the handset For Log-In mode: Dial 451. or press For Log-Out mode: Dial 450. SP-PHONE/MONITOR. <PT Display Example>…
  • Page 295
    Group Log-In / Log-Out for members of an Incoming Group (Using the feature number) PT and SLT Lift the handset For Log-In mode: Dial 481. or press For Log-Out mode: Dial 480. SP-PHONE/MONITOR. Confirmation tone Hang up or press and dial tone SP-PHONE/MONITOR.
  • Page 296
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) group (log-out). At least one extension must be logged in. However, this does not apply to Auto-Logout of the UCD group extensions. Programming Guide References • 2.3 Numbering Plan – Login / Logout – Group Login / Logout •…
  • Page 297: Message Waiting

    4.3.46 Message Waiting When the called extension or phantom extension is busy or does not answer your call, you can leave a notification so that the called party may call you back. As a message receiver, you will know that a call has been received by the MESSAGE button light and an indication tone which you will hear when going off-hook.

  • Page 298
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Canceling PT and SLT Lift the handset or press Dial 700. SP-PHONE/MONITOR. Confirmation Hang up or press tone and SP-PHONE/MONITOR. dial tone Checking and Selecting a message waiting notification by the receiver Display PT If there is any message waiting notification, the message waiting lamp, another extension message waiting lamp or phantom extension message waiting lamp (MESSAGE indicator) light will be on.
  • Page 299
    Calling back the message waiting notification sender Lift the handset or press Dial tone 4*, when SP-PHONE/MONITOR. a message has been received at your extension. If there are more than one message waiting notification left on your extension, you can choose the desired message sender (display PT only).
  • Page 300
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Conditions • The system supports a maximum of 448 simultaneous message waiting notifications. If you try to set the 449th message, you will hear a reorder tone. • Callback Order If multiple message waiting notifications are left at your extension, callback is executed in the order received.
  • Page 301
    • 5.10 VPS Integration – Turn off control of Message Waiting lamp Features Guide References 1.3 System Features • Integration, Voice Mail (VM) Service 1.17 Display Features • Message Waiting User Manual References • 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment • 3.2.5 [005] Flexible CO Button Assignment •…
  • Page 302: Microphone Mute

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.47 Microphone Mute During a conversation in the hands-free mode, you can turn off your PT’s microphone so that you can consult privately with others in the room. When you activate Microphone Mute, you can still listen to your caller’s voice but your caller cannot hear your voice. Setting During a conversation in the hands-free mode;…

  • Page 303
    Features Guide References 1.15 Proprietary Telephone Features • Handset Microphone Mute • Microphone Mute User Manual References • 4.3.39 Handset Microphone Mute User Manual Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT)
  • Page 304: Night Service On/Off

    Allows you to switch the Day / Night / Lunch / Break mode. The KX-TD500 System supports both the Night and Day modes of operation. The Day mode includes the Lunch and Break mode. Only a DIL destination can perform in Lunch / Break mode.

  • Page 305
    Switching Day / Night / Lunch / Break mode (Display operation) 7431 MODE Press MODE until Lift the handset or «Feature Access» press SP-PHONE. is displayed. For Auto Mode For Day Mode For Night Mode For Lunch Mode For Break Mode For Auto : Dial 0.
  • Page 306
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Switching Day / Night / Lunch / Break mode (Display operation) 7433 SHIFT Press SHIFT Lift the handset or until “FEAT” is press SP-PHONE. displayed. For Auto Mode For Day Mode For Night Mode For Lunch Mode For Break Mode For Auto : Dial 0.
  • Page 307
    Switching Day / Night / Lunch / Break mode (DAY/NIGHT button operation) (DAY/NIGHT) Lift the handset Press DAY/NIGHT or press (flexible button). SP-PHONE /MONITOR. The status of DAY/NIGHT indicator. Mode CO button Night On (Red) Lunch On (Green) Break Slow Flash (Green) <PT Display Example>…
  • Page 308
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Switching Day / Night / Lunch / Break mode (Feature number operation) PT and SLT Lift the handset Dial 78. or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. Hang up or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. Confirming the current mode Display PT When the telephone is idle; Press #.
  • Page 309
    Conditions • Class of Service (COS) Programming COS programming determines the extensions that can perform this feature. • By System Programming, you can select either automatic Day/Night mode switching or manual Day/Night mode switching. • In the automatic case, the default start/end time for each mode is as follows: •…
  • Page 310
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) – Intercept Destination – Day / Night • 3.3 Extension Group – [Overflow Setting] Destination – Day / Night • 3.5 Incoming Group – [Overflow Setting] Destination – Day / Night • 4.2 Trunk Line –…
  • Page 311: Off-Hook Call Announcement (Ohca)

    4.3.49 Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA) Allows you to signal a busy extension on a handset call that your call is waiting. Your voice is heard through the built-in speaker of the called party’s PT (KX-T7130, KX-T7235 or KX- T7436). The called extension user can select to talk to you or their initial caller. Setting 7130 / 7235 / 7436 Lift the handset or press…

  • Page 312
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Executing 7230 / 7235 / 7433 / 7436 If you hear a busy tone after making an intercom call; Press BSS (S1). Confirmation tone PT and SLT If you hear a busy tone after making an intercom call; Confirmation tone Dial 1.
  • Page 313
    To talk to the third party by terminating the current call in hands-free mode 7130 / 7235 / 7436 If OHCA is activated by the other party when you are engaged in a call using the handset, you hear a confirmation tone and then the caller’s voice through the built-in speaker of your PT. Hang up.
  • Page 314
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) To talk to the third party after placing the current call on hold 7130 / 7235 / 7436 If OHCA is activated by the other party when you are engaged in a call using the handset, you hear a confirmation tone and then the caller’s voice through the built-in speaker of your PT.
  • Page 315
    Installation Manual References • 2.3.3 DOHCA Card • 2.7.2 OHCA Card (KX-T96136) Programming Guide References • 2.3 Numbering Plan – Call Waiting Set / Cancel • 2.4 Class of Service (COS) – Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA) Features Guide References 1.6 Originating Features •…
  • Page 316: Off-Hook Call Announcement (Ohca) -Whisper

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.50 Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA) —Whisper This is a version of the OHCA feature. The difference is, OHCA provides two-way communication between two extensions but this feature provides one-way communication. When this feature is activated, the called party can hear caller’s voice through the handset but the caller cannot hear the called party’s voice.

  • Page 317
    Executing 7433 / 7436 If you hear a busy tone after making an intercom call; Press BSS (S1). Confirmation tone 7420 / 7425 / 7431 / 7433 / 7436 If you hear a busy tone after making an intercom call; Dial 1.
  • Page 318
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) To talk to the third party by terminating the current call in hands-free mode 7420 / 7425 / 7431 / 7433 / 7436 If Whisper OHCA is activated by the other party when you are engaged in a call, you hear a confirmation tone.
  • Page 319
    To talk to the third party after placing the current call on hold 7420 / 7425 / 7431 / 7433 / 7436 If Whisper OHCA is activated by the other party when you are engaged in a call, you hear a confirmation tone. Then you will be engaged in both calls with the current caller (two-way) and the third party (one-way).
  • Page 320
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) • Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA) • Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA), Whisper 1.9 Answering Features • Call Waiting User Manual References • 4.3.17 Call Waiting User Manual…
  • Page 321: Off-Hook Monitor

    4.3.51 Off-Hook Monitor While you are on a handset call, your call can be monitored by the other people in the room through SP-PHONE. Setting While on a handset call; SP-PHONE Press SP-PHONE. The SP-PHONE indicator light turns red. Your handset call is heard through the SP-PHONE.

  • Page 322
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Conditions • This feature is available for the following PT extensions only: KX-7431, KX-T7433, KX- T7436 • If the SP-PHONE button is pressed during a handset call, either Off-Hook Monitor or SP- PHONE mode (hands-free mode) will be established. This is determined by System Programming <Section 2.8 System Option, «20.
  • Page 323: One-Touch Dialing

    4.3.52 One-Touch Dialing Allows you to make a call (intercom or outside) or access a system feature with the touch of a button. This is done by storing an extension number, telephone number or feature number (up to 24 digits) in a One-Touch Dialing button. Dialing Lift the handset or press Press CO, if required.

  • Page 324
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Programming Guide References • 4.3 Extension Line – CO Key – PF Key • 4.4 DSS Console – DSS Key – PF Key Features Guide References 1.7 Dialing Features • Full One-Touch Dialing • One-Touch Dialing User Manual References •…
  • Page 325: Operator Call

    4.3.53 Operator Call Allows you to call an operator within the system. PT and SLT Lift the handset or press Dial 0. SP-PHONE/MONITOR. You may dial the FDN (3-4 digits) for the Operator Group instead. Conditions • If no operator is assigned, this feature is not available and you will hear a reorder tone after dialing the feature number.

  • Page 326
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) • 2.3 Numbering Plan – Operator Call • 3.3 Extension Group – FDN – Group Type – Tenant No. – [Overflow Setting] Destination – Day / Night – [Overflow Setting] Timer – [Operator Setting] Ringing Type –…
  • Page 327: Outward Dialing, Trunk Access

    4.3.54 Outward Dialing, Trunk Access There are the following your ways to select an idle CO line for making a call. Type Idle Direct Individual Trunk Trunk Group Trunk Access – Idle PT and SLT (CO) Lift the handset or press For PT: Press CO assigned SP-PHONE/MONITOR.

  • Page 328
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Trunk Access – Direct (CO) Lift the handset Press CO. or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. • The CO indicator light turns green. • You may press a CO button (S-CO, G-CO or L-CO) button directly without first going off-hook. Trunk Access –…
  • Page 329
    Trunk Access – Trunk Group PT and SLT (CO) trunk group no. Lift the handset For PT: Press CO assigned as Group-CO. or press For SLT, PT: Dial 8 and the trunk SP-PHONE/MONITOR. (01 through 48). The selected CO indicator light turns green. You may press a G-CO button directory without first going off-hook.
  • Page 330
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) • After dialing the feature number or pressing the CO button, you will hear one of the following tones: Dial tone: Indicates an idle CO line is seized. xxxxx —is shown on the display, if available. (xxxxx: trunk port physical number) Busy tone: Indicates the selected CO line is busy.
  • Page 331
    [Idle] • Automatic Route Selection (ARS) «Trunk Access, Idle» functions when Automatic Route Selection (ARS) is not activated. If ARS is activated by System Programming <Section 2.2 Tenant, «Automatic Route Selection» in the Programming Guide>, the least expensive route for the destination is selected automatically.
  • Page 332
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) • 3.2 Trunk Group – Line Hunting Order • 4.3 Extension Line – CO Key – [Preferred Line] Outgoing Features Guide References 1.3 System Features • Account Code Entry • Remote Station Lock Control • Trunk Group 1.6 Originating Features •…
  • Page 333: Paging

    4.3.55 Paging Allows you to make a voice announcement to a lot of people in the office simultaneously. Your message is announced through built-in speakers of Proprietary Telephones (PTs) or external speakers (External Pagers) or both. The paged person can answer your paging announcement from any telephone in the office (Paging Answer).

  • Page 334
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Paging – External: To access all external pagers PT and SLT Dial 320. Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. <PT Display Example> Extrnl Page All Paging – External: To access a particular pager PT and SLT Dial 32.
  • Page 335
    [All], [External] • An external pager (user-supplied) must be connected to the System beforehand. Up to two external pagers can be connected to the KX-TD500 System. • External Paging Tone External paging tone is emitted from external pagers, before the voice announcement.
  • Page 336
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) [All], [Group] • A maximum of 16 station paging groups, each consisting of one or more extension groups, can be created in the System <Section 3.4 Paging Group in the Programming Guide>. • A single Extension Group cannot belong to two or more different Paging Groups at a time. •…
  • Page 337
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) • 4.3.58 Paging and Transfer • 4.3.78 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS) • 4.4.2 Background Music (BGM) — External • 4.5.9 KX-T7235 Display Features — System Feature Access Menu • 4.5.12 KX-T7431 / KX-T7433 / KX-T7436 Display Features — System Feature Access Menu User Manual…
  • Page 338: Paging — Answer

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.56 Paging — Answer Allows you to answer an announced page at any extension within the system. Answering a page sent through a built-in speaker PT and SLT Lift the handset or press Dial 43. SP-PHONE/MONITOR.

  • Page 339
    – Extension Group No. Features Guide References 1.14 Paging Features • Paging User Manual References • 4.3.55 Paging • 4.5.9 KX-T7235 Display Features — System Feature Access Menu • 4.5.12 KX-T7431 / KX-T7433 / KX-T7436 Display Features — System Feature Access Menu User Manual Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT)
  • Page 340: Paging Deny

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.57 Paging Deny Allows you to deny receiving paging announcement through the built-in speakers of your PTs. Setting Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. <PT Display Example> Paging Deny On Canceling Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR.

  • Page 341
    – Paging Deny Set / Cancel • 2.8 System Option – Special dial tone after setting feature Features Guide References 1.14 Paging Features • Paging User Manual References • 4.3.55 Paging • 4.5.9 KX-T7235 Display Features — System Feature Access Menu •…
  • Page 342: Paging And Transfer

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.58 Paging and Transfer You can transfer a call after making a paging announcement via Paging — All, Paging — External, or Paging — Group. Using Paging — All PT and SLT During a conversation; TRANSFER For PT For SLT…

  • Page 343
    Using Paging — External: to all external pagers PT and SLT During a conversation; TRANSFER For PT For SLT For PT: Press TRANSFER. Dial tone For SLT: Flash the switchhook. The other party is placed on consultation hold. Wait for an answer. Confirmation tone (optional) Using Paging —…
  • Page 344
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Using Paging — Group: to all paging groups (01-16) PT and SLT During a conversation; TRANSFER For PT For SLT For PT: Press Dial tone TRANSFER. For SLT: Flash the switchhook. The other party is placed on consultation hold.
  • Page 345: Paralleled Telephone Connection

    4.3.59 Paralleled Telephone Connection A Proprietary Telephone (PT) can be connected in parallel with a Single Line Telephone (SLT). This feature allows you to enable or disable SLT ringing. When a parallel connection is made, either telephone can be used. To enable / disable SLT ringing Lift the handset or press Dial 39.

  • Page 346
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) • This feature is only available for PT extensions that are connected to a DHLC or HLC card. • With the KX-T7431, KX-T7433, KX-T7436, or KX-T7235, you can execute this feature using the display operation. Installation Manual References •…
  • Page 347: Pdn Call

    4.3.60 PDN Call If an SDN button (which corresponds with the PDN of another extension) is assigned on your PT, you can call that extension with a simple operation. Making a PDN call (SDN) Lift the handset or Press an idle SDN press (flexible button).

  • Page 348: Screened Call Transfer

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Screened Call Transfer During a conversation; TRANSFER Press TRANSFER. Confirmation tone and dial tone • The other party is placed on consultation hold. (SDN) Press the same Wait for SDN again. an answer. Unscreened Call Transfer During a conversation;…

  • Page 349
    Conditions • SDN button An SDN button can be assigned to a flexible CO button on a DN type PT by Station, User or System Programming. • FWD/DND Override The call originated by this feature overrides FWD/DND (Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb) feature assigned on the PDN owner extension.
  • Page 350: Phantom Extension

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.61 Phantom Extension Allows you to route calls to a phantom extension. The call arrives at the extension who has the corresponding Phantom button. A flexible CO button can be assigned as the Phantom button. The lighting patterns of Phantom button and status are as follows.

  • Page 351
    To transfer a call to a phantom extension (Screened Call Transfer) During a conversation; TRANSFER Press TRANSFER. Confirmation tone The other party is placed on consultation hold. Wait for an answer. Announce. The call is transferred. During a conversation; Flash the Confirmation switchhook.
  • Page 352
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) To transfer a call to a phantom extension (Unscreened Call Transfer) During a conversation; TRANSFER Press TRANSFER. Confirmation tone The other party is placed on hold. consultation hold. During a conversation; Flash the Confirmation switchhook. tone The other party is placed on hold.
  • Page 353
    To answer a phantom extension call While the Phantom button indicator light is flashing green, and INTERCOM button associated with the incoming call is flashing green or CO/DN button associated with the incoming call is flashing red; (Phantom) Press Phantom (flexible button).
  • Page 354
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) – CO Key • 5.3 Phantom Extension Features Guide References 1.3 System Features • Phantom Extension 1.8 Ringing Features • Log-In/Log-Out 1.10 Holding Features • Automatic Hold—For Transfer User Manual References • 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment •…
  • Page 355: Pickup Dialing (Hot Line)

    4.3.62 Pickup Dialing (Hot Line) You can make a call to the pre-programmed party simply by going off-hook. Programming the phone number PT and SLT Lift the handset or press Dial 742. SP-PHONE/MONITOR. You must dial a line access code (9 or 801 through 848) as the first digit when storing an outside phone number.

  • Page 356
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) • During the waiting time after going off-hook, you can dial another party and override this feature. This waiting time (between going off-hook and connecting with the called line) can be changed by System Programming (Default: 1 second). •…
  • Page 357: Privacy Release

    4.3.63 Privacy Release Allows you to establish a three-party conference call while connected to an existing call. Setting During a conversation with an outside party, to allow another extension to join the conversation; -at your extension (CO) Press the corresponding The corresponding CO indicator light flashes green rapidly.

  • Page 358
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Conditions • The CO button pressed to join the conversation needs to be assigned as a Single-CO (S-CO) button. • After the user presses the CO button, the CO indicator light of the other extension flashes rapidly for only 5 seconds.
  • Page 359: Pulse To Tone Conversion

    4.3.64 Pulse to Tone Conversion You can change the dialing mode from Pulse to Tone temporarily to access services such as computer telephone services, Voice Mail, etc., that require a tone. PT and SLT phone no. (Pulse mode) Dial the phone number (Pulse mode).

  • Page 360: Quick Dialing

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.65 Quick Dialing Allows you to make a quick dial call by dialing a pre-assigned quick dial number. For example, Quick Dialing is convenient for room service calls in a hotel. Dialing PT and SLT Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR.

  • Page 361: Redial

    4.3.66 Redial «Redial» feature can be categorized as the following two types. Type Last Number Saves the last telephone number dialed to a CO line and allows the extension user to dial the same number again. Saved Number Allows the PT user to save a telephone number while in conversation on a CO line or while hearing a busy tone and redial the number afterwards.

  • Page 362
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Conditions [General] • Up to 24 digits (excluding the CO line access code) can be stored and redialed. • » ,» «#,» «PAUSE,» and «INTERCOM» (for secret dialing) are counted as one digit. • If «Full One-Touch Dialing» feature is enabled at the extension, there is no need to go off- hook, before pressing the REDIAL or SAVE button.
  • Page 363
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) • 2.2.4 Full One-Touch Dialing Assignment • 3.2.5 [005] Flexible CO Button Assignment User Manual…
  • Page 364: Released Link Operation

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.67 Released Link Operation When Released Link Operation is enabled by System Programming, you will be automatically released from a call (extension, outside) after transferring it to the destination, if the destination extension is idle. This feature simplifies the transfer operation by eliminating the need for going on-hook or pressing the RELEASE button after transferring the call.

  • Page 365
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 1.11 Transferring Features • Call Transfer User Manual References None User Manual…
  • Page 366: Ringing Transfer

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.68 Ringing Transfer Allows a DN type PT user to transfer a call on the SDN button (flexible button) to the owner extension of the SDN which has the PDN button associated with it simply by pressing the SDN button.

  • Page 367
    Conditions • If the owner extension is in the Station or User Programming mode, Ringing Transfer does not function. • FWD/DND Override The call transferred by this features rings the PDN owner extension even if Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb feature is assigned on it. •…
  • Page 368: Secret Busy Override

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.69 Secret Busy Override You can interrupt an existing call (either «between two inside parties» or «between an inside party and an outside party») without informing the other party. Some extensions may be restricted from performing this function. To interrupt an existing call 7230 / 7235 / 7433 / 7436 If you hear a busy tone after making an intercom call;…

  • Page 369
    Conditions • Class of Service (COS) programming COS programming <Section 2.4 Class of Service (COS), «Busy Override» and «Secret Busy Override» in the Programming Guide> determines the extension users who can perform this feature. • This feature does not work if «Executive Busy Override Deny» or «Data Line Security» is set at either one of two extensions or both of them.
  • Page 370: Secret Dialing

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.70 Secret Dialing Allows you to conceal all or part(s) of a «System Speed Dialing» or «One-Touch Dialing» number assigned to a flexible button on your PT and DSS Console which normally appears on the display. Additionally, KX-T7431, KX-T7433, KX-T7436 and KX-T7235 Model Telephones are capable of Secret Dialing for «Station Speed Dialing»…

  • Page 371
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) User Manual References • 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment • 3.2.5 [005] Flexible CO Button Assignment • 4.3.52 One-Touch Dialing • 4.3.72 Station Speed Dialing • 4.3.73 System Speed Dialing User Manual…
  • Page 372: Station Program Clear

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.71 Station Program Clear Allows you to reset the following station features to the default settings. Absent Message Capability (The message set on your extension) Automatic Callback Busy Background Music that has been turned on Call Forwarding, Do Not Disturb (DND) Call Log, Incoming Call Pickup Deny…

  • Page 373
    Conditions • With the KX-T7431, KX-T7433, KX-T7436 or KX-T7235, you can execute this feature using the display operation. Programming Guide References • 2.3 Numbering Plan – Station Program Clear Features Guide References 1.15 Proprietary Telephone Features • Station Program Clear User Manual References •…
  • Page 374: Station Speed Dialing

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.72 Station Speed Dialing Allows you to store up to 10 speed dial numbers at your extension. These numbers are available for your extension only. Storing the phone number PT and SLT station speed dial no. Dial 30.

  • Page 375
    • The SLT may be replaced with a PT temporarily to store One-Touch dialing into memory. The Function Buttons (F1 through F10) correspond to speed dial numbers as follows: F1 — 0 F2 — 1 F3 — 2 F4 — 3 F5 —…
  • Page 376: System Speed Dialing

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.73 System Speed Dialing Allows you to make a call using speed dial numbers programmed previously. This system supports 2000 speed dial numbers which are available to all extension users. PT and SLT Lift the handset or press For PT: Press AUTO DIAL/STORE.

  • Page 377
    • If a stored feature number includes » » or «#,» rotary or pulse SLTs cannot use it. Programming Guide References • 2.2 Tenant – System Speed Dialing Entries Max. – System Speed Dial TRS Level Override • 2.3 Numbering Plan –…
  • Page 378: Timed Reminder (Wake-Up Call)

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.74 Timed Reminder (Wake-Up Call) Allows you to set your extension to sound an alarm once or daily at a preset time. Each telephone can be set to generate an alarm tone at a preset time as a reminder. When this feature is set, an alarm tone will ring for 30 seconds (default) at the programmed time.

  • Page 379
    Canceling PT and SLT Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. <PT Display Example> Alarm Cancelled Checking the setting time Display PT Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE. If “10:10 AM” has been set: <PT Display Example> Alarm Alarm Stopping the alarm PT and SLT Lift the handset.
  • Page 380
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Unanswered Timed Reminder Alert [PT only] If an extension user has not responded to the wake-up call, the Alert button (assigned on the «Alert Extension») light turns red. The Alert button can be used to confirm the not-responded room number and to call back the room.
  • Page 381
    • If other extension user calls your extension when the alarm is sounding, he will hear a busy tone. However, if your PT is DN type and there is an idle PDN button, the call comes in on that PDN button. In this case, the caller hears a ringback tone.
  • Page 382
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) • Distinctive Dial Tone When this feature is assigned to the extension, the extension user may hear a distinctive dial tone (dial tone 2) after going off-hook depending on System Programming <Section 2.8 System Option, «15. Special dial tone after setting feature» in the Programming Guide>. •…
  • Page 383
    Features Guide References 1.3 System Features • Outgoing Message (OGM) • Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 1.8 Ringing Features • Timed Reminder (Wake-Up Call) • Timed Reminder, Remote (Wake-Up Call) User Manual References • 3.2.1 [000] Date and Time Set •…
  • Page 384: Toll Restriction Override

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.75 Toll Restriction Override There are two types of toll restriction override: • Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry • Toll Restriction Override for System Speed Dialing User Manual…

  • Page 385: Toll Restriction Override By Account Code Entry

    4.3.76 Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry Allows you to temporarily override toll restriction and make a toll call from a toll-restricted telephone. You can carry out this feature by entering an appropriate account code before dialing the telephone number. For operation procedure, please refer to Section «4.3.2 Account Code Entry.»…

  • Page 386: Toll Restriction Override For System Speed Dialing

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.77 Toll Restriction Override for System Speed Dialing Allows you to cancel toll restriction in «System Speed Dialing.» Normally, calls originated by «System Speed Dialing» are restricted depending on the extension’s toll restriction level. Once this option is set, it permits all extension users to make «System Speed Dialing»…

  • Page 387: Trunk Answer From Any Station (Tafas)

    4.3.78 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS) Allows you to answer an incoming CO call, paged through an external pager, from any extension. PT and SLT Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. Conditions • TAFAS can be used in the following cases: The FDN of an external pager is assigned as the DIL 1:1 destination.

  • Page 388
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) – Confirmation tone for Call Pickup, Paging, Paging-Answer, TAFAS-Answer, Hold Retrieve and Call park Retrieve • 4.2 Trunk Line – Incoming Type – Destination – Day / Night / Lunch / Break • 4.6 External Paging –…
  • Page 389: Two-Way Recording Into The Voice Mail

    (flexible button) again. The Two-Way Record indicator light turns off. Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone [DPT] integration; e.g., KX-TVS100). User Manual…

  • Page 390
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Recording into the mailbox of another extension During a conversation; (Two-Way-Tran) Press Two-Way Transfer (flexible button). The Two-Way Transfer indicator light turns red. Stopping recording (Two-Way-Tran) Press Two-Way Transfer (flexible button). The Two-Way Transfer indicator light turns off. Conditions •…
  • Page 391
    Programming Guide References • 4.3 Extension Line – CO Key • 4.4 DSS Console – DSS Key Features Guide References 1.3 System Features • Integration, DPT 1.12 Conversation Features • Two-Way Recording into the Voice Mail User Manual References • 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment •…
  • Page 392: Ucd Login Monitor

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.80 UCD Login Monitor Allows an extension user (PT only) to see at a glance which UCD Group Members are logged in and which ones are logged out. Write down the DNs of the UCD Group Members that you want to monitor. Write them on the «TEL CARD»…

  • Page 393: Ucd Monitor Mode

    4.3.81 UCD Monitor Mode Allows the extension user specified as the Supervisor Extension to monitor the number of calls put in the waiting queue. Setting Lift the handset or press Dial 725. SP-PHONE/MONITOR. Canceling Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. <PT Display Example>…

  • Page 394
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) • When this feature is started for Incoming Group members, not only the number of calls put in the waiting queue but also Login / Logout status of the UCD Group members can be monitored. Programming Guide References •…
  • Page 395: Voice Mail Transfer

    4.3.82 Voice Mail Transfer You can transfer the calls to the Voice Processing System so that callers can leave their messages in a desired extension mailbox. When you transfer the call to the designated extension; —If the extension has set the «Call Forwarding» function whose destination is Voice Mail;…

  • Page 396
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) – [Voice Mail Command] Get Message – [Voice Mail Command] AA Message – [Voice Mail Command] VM Message Features Guide References 1.3 System Features • Integration, VPS User Manual References • 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment •…
  • Page 397: Vps Integration

    4.3.83 VPS Integration Allows you to have your calls forwarded to your Voice Processing System mailbox. Setting Call Forwarding destination to Voice Mail PT and SLT Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. You may press the flexible button assigned as the FWD/DND button instead.

  • Page 398
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Canceling PT and SLT FWD/DND Lift the handset or press For PT: Press FWD/DND. SP-PHONE/MONITOR. For SLT, PT: Dial 710. You may press the flexible button assigned as the FWD/DND button instead. Listening to a stored message You can listen to the messages stored in your mailbox easily.
  • Page 399
    Manual dialing PT and SLT Lift the handset or press Enter the Voice Mail extension number SP-PHONE/MONITOR. (3 or 4 digits). Conditions • Outside callers can leave their messages in your mailbox. When an incoming CO call arrives, the Operator answers the call and transfers it to your extension. And… —If you set the «Call Forwarding»…
  • Page 400
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Programming Guide References • 4.3 Extension Line – CO Key – PF Key • 4.4 DSS Console – DSS Key – PF Key Features Guide References 1.3 System Features • Integration, VPS 1.11 Transferring Features •…
  • Page 401: Walking Cos

    4.3.84 Walking COS Allows you to make a toll call at other lower level COS extensions (toll/outward restricted) by employing your own higher level COS temporarily. Making a call PT and SLT At another extension; Lift the handset Dial 47. or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR.

  • Page 402
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) — Switching Day/Night Mode — Account Code Mode — SDN COS — Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA) — Released Link Operation — Automatic Hold • With the KX-T7431, KX-T7433, KX-T7436 or KX-T7235, you can execute this feature using the display operation.
  • Page 403
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) User Manual References • 4.5.9 KX-T7235 Display Features — System Feature Access Menu • 4.5.12 KX-T7431 / KX-T7433 / KX-T7436 Display Features — System Feature Access Menu User Manual…
  • Page 404: Walking Station

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.85 Walking Station Used to move an extension to a new location without re-programming. Extension data such as extension number, One-Touch dialing memory remain the same after the re-location of the extension. This feature is convenient if you don’t want to change the current extension setting (extension number, etc.) after your desk is moved to another location in the office.

  • Page 405
    Conditions • The telephone type (PT, SLT, OPX) must be the same at the source and destination. • Walking Station is not available in the following cases: — If the extension is connected to a DHLC card (KX-TD50170). — If the extension is connected to a HLC card (KX-T96170) in parallel. —…
  • Page 406: Operator / Manager Service Features

    1.3 System Features • Manager Extension • Operator Group Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone [DPT] integration; e.g., KX-TVS100). User Manual…

  • Page 407: Background Music (Bgm) — External

    4.4.2 Background Music (BGM) — External Allows the Manager and the Operators to broadcast background music (BGM) in the office through the external pagers. Setting / Canceling 7235 / 7436 Features Lift the handset or Press «Features.» press SP-PHONE. Confirmation tone Hang up or press and dial tone SP-PHONE.

  • Page 408
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Setting / Canceling 7431 MODE Lift the handset or Press MODE until press SP-PHONE. «Feature Access» is displayed. Hang up or press Confirmation tone and dial tone SP-PHONE. → Ext-BGM On/Off Rotate Jog Dial until Press SELECT.
  • Page 409
    Setting / Canceling 7433 SHIFT Lift the handset or Press SHIFT until press SP-PHONE. «FEAT» is displayed. Confirmation tone Hang up or press and dial tone SP-PHONE. PT and SLT Lift the handset or press Dial 35. SP-PHONE/MONITOR. The display shows either one of the following depending on whether the BGM is on or off.
  • Page 410
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) • External Pager Priority Priority of access to external pager is: (1) TAFAS; (2) Paging; (3) BGM Higher priorities will override the BGM. • The default is «External BGM Off.» Installation Manual References • 2.8.1 External Pager (Paging Equipment) •…
  • Page 411: Call Log Incoming, Log Lock

    4.4.3 Call Log Incoming, Log Lock The Manager and the Operators can cancel the «Call Log Incoming, Log Lock» feature set at any other extension. Programming PROGRAM Press PROGRAM. Dial 99. You are in the Station Programming mode: <PT Display Example> PT—PGM Mode <PT Display Example>…

  • Page 412: Live Call Screening (Lcs) Password Clear

    User Manual References • 4.3.43 Live Call Screening (LCS) Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone [DPT] integration; e.g., KX-TVS100). Dial 99.

  • Page 413: Local Alarm

    4.4.5 Local Alarm If a system error is detected during on-line communication mode, the Alarm light on the Manager extension turns red. The Manager can confirm the error message by pressing the red lit Alarm button. If a major error occurs, minor errors will be neglected and only the first major error message will be displayed.

  • Page 414
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Error Message List (Priority order) Error Message DSP1LNK DSP-1 link failure ERR xyy Card status fault ERR xyy CD FLT Regarding the T1 card, please refer to Reference Guide for T1 Digital Trunk card. [Legend] Error Message Shelf Number (1-3) Slot Number (01-14)
  • Page 415
    When the problem is solved, the Alarm light goes off and the display PT shows the initial display. Displaying an error message When the Alarm button turns red; (Alarm) Press the red lit Alarm (flexible button). <PT Display Example> ERR 20211DISCNCT Clearing the error message While the error message is displayed;…
  • Page 416
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Programming Guide References • 4.3 Extension Line – CO Key Features Guide References 1.4 Fault Recovery/Diagnostics • Local Alarm User Manual References • 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment • 3.2.5 [005] Flexible CO Button Assignment User Manual…
  • Page 417: Outgoing Message (Ogm) Record/Playback

    4.4.6 Outgoing Message (OGM) Record/Playback The Manager and the Operators can record and play back outgoing voice messages. Recording a message 7235 / 7436 Features Press «Features.» Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE. OGM Group no. Enter OGM Group Confirmation tone number (1 through 8).

  • Page 418
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Recording a message 7431 MODE Press MODE until Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE. «Feature Access» is displayed. OGM Group no. Enter OGM Group Confirmation tone number (1 through 8). <PT Display Example> OGM 2 Rec.:00 •…
  • Page 419
    Recording a message 7433 SHIFT Lift the handset or Press SHIFT until press SP-PHONE. «FEAT» is displayed. OGM Group no. Enter OGM Group Confirmation tone number (1 through 8). <PT Display Example> OGM 2 Rec.:00 • The STORE indicator light flashes red slowly. Recording starts after the confirmation tone.
  • Page 420
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Recording a message PT and SLT Lift the handset or press Dial 361. SP-PHONE/MONITOR. AUTO DIAL STORE Press STORE or wait until Confirmation a maximum recording time tone (30 seconds) has elapsed. The recording is stopped and STORE indicator light turns steady red. The recorded message will be played back automatically.
  • Page 421
    Playing back a message 7235 / 7436 Features Press «Features.» Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE. OGM Group no. Enter OGM Group Confirmation tone number (1 through 8). <PT Display Example> OGM 1 Play:28 The STORE indicator lights. The message is played back and the counter starts. User Manual NEXT Rotate Jog Dial or press «NEXT»…
  • Page 422
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Playing back a message 7431 MODE Press MODE until Lift the handset or «Feature Access» is press SP-PHONE. displayed. OGM Group no. Enter OGM Group Confirmation tone number (1 through 8). <PT Display Example> OGM 1 Play:28 The STORE indicator lights.
  • Page 423
    Playing back a message 7433 SHIFT Lift the handset or Press SHIFT until press SP-PHONE. «FEAT» is displayed. OGM Group no. Enter OGM Group Confirmation tone number (1 through 8). <PT Display Example> OGM 1 Play:28 The STORE indicator lights. The message is played back and the counter starts.
  • Page 424
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Playing back a message Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. AUTO DIAL STORE Press STORE or wait until Confirmation tone playback is finished. and dial tone The STORE indicator light turns off. Conditions • The following three types of outgoing messages can be recorded. DISA message: This message is played when an outside caller accesses the system via DISA line.
  • Page 425
    • OGM Group Recording of OGM is performed per OGM Group (1-8) which consists of one or more DISA cards. Up to eight OGM Groups are available in the system. • Before recording your OGM, you must assign its OGM Group No. to a physical card (DISA Port Assignment) •…
  • Page 426: Remote Dnd (Do Not Disturb) Control

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.4.7 Remote DND (Do Not Disturb) Control The Manager and the Operators can set/cancel the DND feature to other extensions. Setting/Canceling 7235 / 7436 Features Press «Features.» Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE. destination extension no. (DSS) Dial the destination extension number (3 or 4 digits) or press…

  • Page 427
    Setting/Canceling 7431 MODE Lift the handset or Press MODE until press SP-PHONE. «Feature Access» is displayed. destination extension no. (DSS) Dial desired extension number (3 or 4 digits) or press DSS (flexible button). <PT Display Example> DND Set:EXXXX DND Cancel:EXXXX User Manual Rotate Jog Dial until «Remote DND»…
  • Page 428
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Setting/Canceling 7433 SHIFT Lift the handset or Press SHIFT press SP-PHONE. until «FEAT» is displayed. destination extension no. (DSS) Dial the destination extension number (3 or 4 digits) or press DSS (flexible button). <PT Display Example> DND Set:EXXXX DND Cancel:EXXXX FEAT…
  • Page 429
    Setting/Canceling PT and SLT Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. Hang up or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. Conditions • Remote DND Control operation sets or cancels the DND feature to the specified extension. This depends on the status of the extension, whether DND is set by the extension user or not. Programming Guide References •…
  • Page 430: Remote Fwd (Call Forwarding) Cancel — Once

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.4.8 Remote FWD (Call Forwarding) Cancel — Once The Manager and the Operators can ring an extension that has set Call Forwarding. Canceling FWD temporarily 7235 / 7436 Features Lift the handset or Press «Features.» press SP-PHONE.

  • Page 431
    Canceling FWD temporarily 7431 MODE Lift the handset or Press MODE until press SP-PHONE. «Feature Access» is displayed. destination extension no. (DSS) Dial the destination extension number (3 or 4 digits) or press DSS (flexible button). • Ringing starts at the destination extension. User Manual Rotate Jog Dial until «FWD Cancel Once»…
  • Page 432
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Canceling FWD temporarily 7433 SHIFT Lift the handset or Press SHIFT press SP-PHONE. until «FEAT» is displayed. destination extension no. (DSS) Dial the destination extension number (3 or 4 digits) or press DSS (flexible button). Ringing starts at the destination extension.
  • Page 433
    Canceling FWD temporarily PT and SLT Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. Conditions • This feature cancels the Call Forwarding feature set at the extension temporarily so that the Manager or an Operator can call the extension user. Programming Guide References •…
  • Page 434: Remote Station Lock Control

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.4.9 Remote Station Lock Control The Manager and the Operators can remotely lock or unlock any extension. To lock an extension, you can select to lock outside calls or intercom calls. Programming PROGRAM Press PROGRAM. Dial 99.

  • Page 435
    Features Guide References 1.6 Originating Features • Electronic Station Lockout User Manual References • 4.3.30 Electronic Station Lockout User Manual Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT)
  • Page 436: Switching Cos

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.4.10 Switching COS You can assign either primary or secondary level of COS (Class of Service) for each extension. Setting 7235 / 7436 NEXT Features Press «Features.» Rotate Jog Dial or press «NEXT» until the following is displayed.

  • Page 437
    Setting 7433 FEAT SHIFT Press SHIFT Press «FEAT.» until «FEAT» is displayed. (DSS) extension no. Dial the desired extension number (3 or 4 digits) or press DSS (flexible button). PT and SLT Lift the handset or press Dial 79. SP-PHONE/MONITOR. Hang up or press Confirmation tone SP-PHONE/MONITOR.
  • Page 438
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Programming Guide References • 2.3 Numbering Plan – COS Primary – COS Secondary • 2.4 Class of Service (COS) • 4.3 Extension Line – [COS No.] Primary – [COS No.] Secondary • 4.7 ISDN Extension Line –…
  • Page 439: Timed Reminder, Remote (Wake-Up Call)

    4.4.11 Timed Reminder, Remote (Wake-Up Call) The Manager and the Operators can remotely set or cancel the Timed Reminder to the desired extension. Setting 7235 / 7436 Features Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE. Press «Features.» (DSS) extension no. Dial the desired extension Press «NEXT»…

  • Page 440
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Setting 7431 MODE Lift the handset Press MODE until or press “Feature Access” is SP-PHONE. displayed. extension no. Dial 1. Dial the desired extension number (3 or 4 digits) or press DSS (flexible button). For one time alarm* : Dial 0.
  • Page 441
    Setting 7433 SHIFT Press SHIFT Lift the handset or press until “FEAT” is SP-PHONE. displayed. extension no. Dial 1. Dial the desired extension number (3 or 4 digits) or press DSS (flexible button). For one time alarm* : Dial 0. Confirmation For daily alarm* : Dial 1.
  • Page 442
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Setting PT and SLT Dial 7 1. Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. minute Enter the minute For AM: Dial 0. (00 through 59). For PM: Dial 1. You hear an alarm ringing at the preset time and then the setting is cleared. You hear an alarm ringing daily at the preset time until the setting is changed or canceled.
  • Page 443
    Canceling 7235 / 7436 Features Lift the handset or Press «Features.» press SP-PHONE. (DSS) extension no. Dial the desired extension number (3 or 4 digits) or press DSS on which you have set the Timed Reminder. <PT Display Example> Extension #:1234 Time(hh:mm):07:00 AM/PM(0/1) :0 Hang up or press the…
  • Page 444
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Canceling 7431 MODE Lift the handset or Press MODE until press SP-PHONE. “Feature Access” is displayed. extension no. Dial 0. Dial the desired extension number (3 or 4 digits) or press DSS on which you have set the Timed Reminder.
  • Page 445
    Canceling PT and SLT Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. Confirmation tone Hang up or press and dial tone SP-PHONE/MONITOR. Checking the time setting Display PT Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE. <PT Display Example> If «10:10» has been set, the display shows; Alarm 10:10AM Alarm 10:10AM* User Manual…
  • Page 446
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Unanswered Timed Reminder Alert [PT only] If an extension user has not responded to the wake-up call, the Alert button (assigned on the «Alert Extension») light turns red. The Alert button can be used to confirm the not-responded room number and to call back the room.
  • Page 447
    Conditions • The system clock must be set correctly beforehand. • There is no limit to the number of the extensions who can set the Timed Reminder at the same time. • Only the latest time setting is valid at the extension whether it was set by the extension user (Timed Reminder) or by the Manager extension or an Operator (Timed Reminder, Remote).
  • Page 448
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) – Timed Reminder Ringing Time – Timed Reminder Arrive Count – Timed Reminder Arrive Wait Time • 2.8 System Option – Special dial tone after setting feature – Alert Ringing • 3.6 OGM Group – OGM Type •…
  • Page 449: Trunk Busy-Out Setting

    4.4.12 Trunk Busy-Out Setting Allows the Manager and the Operators to busy out a trunk. Setting / Canceling 7235 / 7436 Features Lift the handset or Press «Features.» press SP-PHONE. trunk port physical no. Enter the trunk port Confirmation tone physical number.

  • Page 450
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Setting / Canceling 7431 MODE Lift the handset or Press MODE until press SP-PHONE. «Feature Access» is displayed. trunk port physical no. Enter the trunk port Confirmation tone physical number. and dial tone <PT Display Example> •…
  • Page 451
    Setting / Canceling 7433 SHIFT Lift the handset or Press SHIFT press SP-PHONE. until «FEAT» is displayed. → To set B S Y O u t S e t BSY Ovr DNY M E N U Press «SEL.» To cancel →…
  • Page 452
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Setting / Canceling PT and SLT To set To cancel Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. Hang up or press Confirmation tone SP-PHONE/MONITOR. and dial tone Confirming 7235 / 7436 Lift the handset or Press «Features.» press SP-PHONE.
  • Page 453
    Confirming 7431 MODE Lift the handset or Press MODE until press SP-PHONE. «Feature Access» is displayed. trunk port physical no. Enter the trunk port physical number. <PT Display Example> When setting: B.Out 10201 When no setting: B.Out None 7433 SHIFT Lift the handset or Press SHIFT press SP-PHONE.
  • Page 454
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Confirming Display PT Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. Dial tone Programming Guide References • 2.3 Numbering Plan – Trunk Busy-out • 2.8 System Option – ELCOT / LCOT Busy-out Loop Relay – GCOT Busy-out Loop Relay Features Guide References 1.3 System Features •…
  • Page 455: Trunk Route Control

    4.4.13 Trunk Route Control Allows the Manager and the Operators to make a call using a specific trunk. They can verify the status of the specified trunk. 7235 / 7436 Features Press «Features.» Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE. trunk port physical no. Enter the trunk port physical number.

  • Page 456
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 7433 Press SHIFT Lift the handset or until «FEAT» is press SP-PHONE. displayed. → T R K R o u t e C TL U C D M o n i t o r E n d S E L M E N U Press «SEL.»…
  • Page 457
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) User Manual References None User Manual…
  • Page 458: Special Display Features

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.5 Special Display Features 4.5.1 Special Display Features With the display telephone, KX-T7230, KX-T7235, KX-T7431, KX-T7433 or KX-T7436, you can easily access several features. The display telephones have the ability to perform the following features. Feature Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Call Information Display…

  • Page 459: Call Forwarding / Do Not Disturb (Kx-T7436 / Kx-T7235 Only)

    4.5.2 Call Forwarding / Do Not Disturb (KX-T7436 / KX-T7235 only) You can set or cancel the Call Forwarding and Do Not Disturb features using the display. Features on the First Display FWD/DND Cancel Cancels the Call Forwarding and Do Not Disturb (DND) features at your extension.

  • Page 460
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Features on the Second Display Call Forwarding – Busy / No Answer Sets forwarding incoming calls to another extension when busy or you do not answer. Call Forwarding – to CO/TIE Line Sets forwarding all incoming calls to an external party.
  • Page 461
    4.5.3 Call Information Display (KX-T7436 / KX-T7433 / KX-T7235 / KX-T7230 only) When receiving a call from the CO line assigned to receive Caller ID service telephone number and name are displayed simultaneously. You can also record the information in the call log. 7230 / 7433 While receiving an incoming CO call, the display shows the caller’s telephone number…
  • Page 462
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Conditions • This feature is available for KX-T7230, KX-T7235, KX-T7433 and KX-T7436 only. • The SHIFT indicator light may turn on when receiving a call. Pressing this button provides you with more information about the caller. •…
  • Page 463
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) • 4.5.5 Call Log Incoming, Log Lock (KX-T7436 / KX-T7433 / KX-T7235 / KX-T7230 only) User Manual…
  • Page 464: Call Log, Incoming (Kx-T7436 / Kx-T7433 / Kx-T7235 / Kx-T7230 Only)

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.5.4 Call Log, Incoming (KX-T7436 / KX-T7433 / KX-T7235 / KX- T7230 only) If you do not answer an incoming CO call, your extension automatically records the call information from the Caller ID service, can be logged per extension. When the call log is full (30 calls are stored), you can select how the 31st call is treated.

  • Page 465
    Logging a call information while talking KX-T7433 / KX-T7230 While receiving an incoming CO call, the display shows the caller’s telephone number and name. 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 J O H N W H I T E To answer, go off-hook.
  • Page 466
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Confirming and calling back When the SHIFT indicator is red, there are calls logged. KX-T7433 / KX-T7230 Second Display W E D J A N 0 1 0 3 : 0 0 P SHIFT O L D 7 To see the confirmed information 0 1 : 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1…
  • Page 467
    Operating sequence Press the SHIFT button. Press the OLD (S1) or NEW (S2) button to see the confirmed or unconfirmed information. Press the NEXT (S3) or PREV (S3) button to see other caller’s information. Or press the INFO (S1) button repeatedly to see the information in detail.
  • Page 468
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) KX-T7436 / KX-T7235 Second Display WED JAN01 03:00P SHIFT Extension Features Call Log OLD7 To see the confirmed information 10101:AB COMPANY 0102030405 Bob Jones OCT30 09:03PM SEQ01 02CALL MENU MENU To modify the phone number, press «…
  • Page 469
    Operating sequence Press the SHIFT button. Press the OLD (S1) or NEW (S2) button to see the confirmed or unconfirmed information. Press the NEXT (S3) or PREV (S2) button to see other caller’s information. Or modify the number, if required. To call back, go off-hook and then press the CALL (S1) button.
  • Page 470
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) – [Local Call] Area Code – [Local Call] Digits to delete – [Local Call] Number to be added – [Long Distance Call] Digits to delete – [Long Distance Call] Number to be added • 5.12 Caller ID Registration •…
  • Page 471: Call Log Incoming, Log Lock (Kx-T7436 / Kx-T7433 / Kx-T7235 / Kx-T7230 Only)

    4.5.5 Call Log Incoming, Log Lock (KX-T7436 / KX-T7433 / KX- T7235 / KX-T7230 only) Allows you to lock the display of your extension so that the «Call Log, Incoming» feature is not shown on the display, if you do not want others to see the information. Locking 7230 / 7235 / 7433 / 7436 Dial 57.

  • Page 472
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) – Call Log Incoming, Log Lock • 4.2 Trunk Line – Name • 4.3 Extension Line – Initial Display Selection – [Call Log Incoming] Overwrite Mode – [Call Log Incoming] Lock Password Features Guide References 1.5 Attended Features •…
  • Page 473: Call Log, Outgoing (Kx-T7436 / Kx-T7235 Only)

    4.5.6 Call Log, Outgoing (KX-T7436 / KX-T7235 only) The last five outside telephone numbers (Up to 24 digits for each) you made are automatically logged. You can make a call using the call log. Extension Features Call Log <Example> To select 111 1234567890 0987654 000111222333…

  • Page 474: Kx-T7235 Display Features

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.5.7 KX-T7235 Display Features The KX-T7235 telephone allows you to make a call or operate the features using the display message with the Function buttons. 1) Call Directory Extension Dialing Station Speed Dialing System Speed Dialing 2) System Feature Access Menu The System Feature Access Menu provides a display of the system features which appear in alphabetical order.

  • Page 475: Kx-T7235 Display Features — Call Directory

    To alternate the display between name and number, press the NEXT (S3) button. Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Station Speed Dialing Makes a call to a party stored in your phone. <Example> To select Panasonic KME-soft Jim Kopp Panasonic Ronald Police Zangril…

  • Page 476
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) • 2.8 System Option – Station Speed Dialing Initial display • 4.3 Extension Line – Name • 5.2 System Speed Dialing – Name – Number Features Guide References 1.7 Dialing Features • One-Touch Dialing • System Speed Dialing 1.17 Display Features •…
  • Page 477: Kx-T7235 Display Features — System Feature Access Menu

    4.5.9 KX-T7235 Display Features — System Feature Access Menu You can access various features using the messages which are displayed in alphabetical order. To access the features, press the Feature (F4) button on the initial display first, search for the desired feature message by pressing the NEXT (S3) button.

  • Page 478
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Features on the Second Display Executive Busy Override Deny Denies or allows other people from joining your conversation. Call Pickup, Outside Line Picks up an outside call for another extension. Call Pickup Deny Denies or allows other people from picking up Dial 1 or 0.
  • Page 479
    Features on the Third Display Call Waiting Sets or cancels the Call Waiting feature (Call Waiting, OHCA or Whisper OHCA). Call Park Places a call on Dial 1 through 3 or 0. hold in a parking area or retrieves it. — 1: to set Call Waiting — 2: to set OHCA Dial parking…
  • Page 480
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Features on the Fourth Display Data Line Security Refuses or accepts an indication tone, e.g., call waiting tone. Dial 1 or 0. Door Opener Unlocks the door. Doorphone Call — 1: Set (On) Calls the doorphone. — 0: Cancel (Off) On-hook.
  • Page 481
    Features on the Fifth Display Remote FWD Cancel –Once (operator/manager only) Group Log-In/ Refer to the corresponding feature Log-Out in Section 4.4, Joins or leaves the «Operator / Manager incoming group. Service Features.» Group Call FWD Sets or cancels forwarding all calls to an incoming group Cancel Enter FDN for source…
  • Page 482
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Features on the Sixth Display Call Log, Incoming Selects whether the 31st call is disregarded or overwrites the oldest call. Log-In / Log-Out Joins or leaves the extension group. Dial 1 or 0. Dial 1 or 0. — 1: overwrite (On) — 1: Log-In (On) — 0: disregard (Off)
  • Page 483
    Features on the Seventh Display Outgoing Message (OGM) (operator/manager only) Refer to the corresponding feature in Section 4.4, «Operator / Manager Service Features.» Paging – DENY Denies or allows being paged. Dial 1 or 0. — 1: Deny — 0: Allow On-hook.
  • Page 484
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Features on the Eighth Display Paging – External Pages through all or particular external Paralleled Telephone pager. Connection Sets the paralleled telephone connection on or off. Dial the external pager number (1 or 2) or 0. 1 or 2: external pager no.
  • Page 485
    Features on the Ninth Display Electronic Station Lockout Denies or allows other people from using your telephone. Timed Reminder, Remote (Wake-Up Call) (operator/manager only) Refer to the corresponding feature in Section 4.4, «Operator / Manager Service Features.» Enter lock code (000 through 999).
  • Page 486
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Features on the Tenth Display UCD Monitor Mode Allows Supervisor Extension to monitor the number of calls in the waiting queue. Cancel Enter FDN On-hook. for UCD Group. On-hook. Trunk Route Control (operator/manager only) Refer to the corresponding feature in Section 4.4, «Operator / Manager…
  • Page 487: Kx-T7431 / Kx-T7433 / Kx-T7436 Display Features

    4.5.10 KX-T7431 / KX-T7433 / KX-T7436 Display Features The KX-T7431, KX-T7433 and KX-T7436 telephones allow you to make a call or operate the features using the display message. 1) Call Directory Extension Dialing Station Speed Dialing System Speed Dialing 2) System Feature Access Menu The System Feature Access Menu provides a display of the system features which appear in alphabetical order.

  • Page 488
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Jog Dial Operation You can search for desired items on the corresponding display menu by using the Jog Dial. Rotate the Jog Dial in either direction as desired. The items will be displayed as follows. Left (counterclockwise) To the previous…
  • Page 489
    — KX-T7433 The Jog Dial operation is available in the initial and third display. While idle, the bottom line of the display changes by pressing the SHIFT button as follows. Initial Display Second Display Third Display — KX-T7436 The Jog Dial operation is available in the initial and third display. While idle, the bottom line of the display changes by pressing the SHIFT button as follows.
  • Page 490: Kx-T7431 / Kx-T7433 / Kx-T7436 Display Features — Call Directory

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.5.11 KX-T7431 / KX-T7433 / KX-T7436 Display Features — Call Directory There are three Call Directory features as follows. Feature Extension Dialing You can make an intercom call using the directory. System Speed Dialing You can make a call to a party stored in the system using the directory.

  • Page 491
    • 3.2.2 [001] System Speed Dialing Number Set • 3.2.3 [002] System Speed Dialing Name Set • 3.2.4 [004] Extension Name Set KX-T7431 System Speed Dialing Second Display System Speed System Speed Dialing / Station Speed Dialing / Extension Dialing Rotate the Jog Dial until the desired item is displayed.
  • Page 492
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) KX-T7433 Third Display W E D J A N 0 1 0 3 : 0 0 P S T A E X T Station Speed Dialing → A d a m A l i c e M E N U →…
  • Page 493
    KX-T7436 – Using the Function button – Initial Display WED JAN01 03:00P Extension Features Call Log CONT Extension Dialing Yoshida Zaydel → Adam Alice Ann Parker MENU MENU Ann Parker Beth → Bob Jones Carol Chris MENU CALL MENU NEXT User Manual Station Speed Dialing STA Speed…
  • Page 494
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Extension Dialing / Station Speed Dialing / System Speed Dialing Press the Extension (F3), STA Speed (F8) or SYS Speed (F9) button. Rotate the Jog Dial until the desired item is at the arrow. Press the CALL (S3) button or go off-hook. —…
  • Page 495
    System Speed Dialing Rotate the Jog Dial until the desired item is at the arrow. Press the CALL (S3) button or go off-hook. Station Speed Dialing / Extension Dialing Press the STA (S1) or EXT (S2) button. Rotate the Jog Dial until the desired item is at the arrow.
  • Page 496: Kx-T7431 / Kx-T7433 / Kx-T7436 Display Features — System Feature Access Menu

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.5.12 KX-T7431 / KX-T7433 / KX-T7436 Display Features — System Feature Access Menu You can access the features which are displayed in alphabetical order. To access the features, you may shift the display to the Jog Dial Operation display by pressing the MODE or SHIFT button first.

  • Page 497
    KX-T7431 Rotate the Jog Dial until the desired item is displayed. Press the SELECT Button. Enter the parameter, if required. On-hook, if required. KX-T7433 Press the FEAT (S3) button. Rotate the Jog Dial until the desired item is at the arrow. Press the SEL (S3) button.
  • Page 498
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Display (KX-T7436/KX-T7235) Busy Ovrd Deny ( 1/0) C.Pickup CO C.Pickup Deny ( 1/0) C.Pickup Direct ( ext) C.Pickup Group C.Waiting ( 0-3) Call Park ( 00-99) Callback Busy Cancel COS Primary ( ext) COS Secondary ( ext) Data Line On/Off ( 1/0) Door Open ( 1-8) Doorphone Call ( 1-8)
  • Page 499
    Display (KX-T7436/KX-T7235) Log Ovrt On/Off ( 1/0) Login/Logout ( 1/0) Message Off ( ext) Message On ( ext) Night Mode ( 0-4) OGM Playback ( 1-8) OGM Recording ( 1-8) Page Deny On/Off ( 1/0) Page-Ext Answer ( 1-2) Page-GRP Answer Paging External ( 0-2) Paging Group ( #,01-16) Parallel On/Off ( 1/0)
  • Page 500
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Display (KX-T7436/KX-T7235) Station Program Clear Timed Reminder TRK Route CTL ( PHY) UCD Monitor End UCD Monitor STRT ( FDN) Walking COS ( code+ext) Only available for the Manager and the Operators. After selecting this message, follow the steps as follows. — KX-T7436: steps of the «Timed Reminder»…
  • Page 501: Dss Console Features

    DSS Console Features Section 5 DSS Console Features Note: All illustrations of the DPT (paired telephone) used in these operating instructions are based on model KX-T7235. User Manual…

  • Page 502: Configuration

    • Up to 8 DSS Consoles can be connected to a PT. • A Single Line Telephone cannot be paired with the DSS Console. • For System Programming, please refer to the Programming Guide of the KX-TD500 System. Programming Guide References •…

  • Page 503: Location Of Controls

    PF (Programmable Function) Buttons (01 through 16): These buttons are provided with no default settings. With a paired telephone, you can program the buttons as other function buttons. <Back View> Used to connect to the KX-TD500 System User Manual TO EMSS DSS Console Features…

  • Page 504
    DSS Console Features KX-T7440 DSS Buttons with Busy Lamp Field (BLF)(01 through 66) Connection Included telephone line cord KX-T7441 DSS Buttons with Busy Lamp Field (BLF)(01 through 48) ANSWER Button RELEASE Button → Connect to the KX-TD500 System. User Manual…
  • Page 505: Feature Buttons

    5.1.3 Feature Buttons DSS Consoles have the following types of Feature Buttons: DSS Buttons with Busy Lamp Field (BLF) Used to access extensions. The BLF indicates the busy or idle status of each extension in the system. These buttons can also be changed to other function buttons. PF (Programmable Feature) Buttons [KX-T7040 / KX-T7240 only] These buttons are provided with no default settings.

  • Page 506: Dss Console Features

    DSS Console Features 5.2 DSS Console Features 5.2.1 Station Programming Both DSS buttons and PF buttons (KX-T7040 and KX-T7240 only) are provided with no default settings. To meet your various needs, DSS buttons can be changed to other function buttons. Every DSS or PF button can be assigned to another extension number, telephone number or feature number by Station Programming.

  • Page 507: Account Button (Assignment)

    5.2.2 Account Button (Assignment) You can assign a Flexible DSS or PF button as an Account button. —Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. PT and DSS Console [DSS Console] (DSS) (PF) Press the desired DSS or PF button.

  • Page 508: Answer Button (Assignment)

    DSS Console Features 5.2.3 Answer Button (Assignment) You can assign a Flexible DSS or PF button as an Answer button. —Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. PT and DSS Console [DSS Console] (DSS) (PF) Press the desired…

  • Page 509: Conference (Conf) Button (Assignment)

    5.2.4 Conference (CONF) Button (Assignment) You can assign a Flexible DSS or PF button as a Conference (CONF) button. —Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. PT and DSS Console [DSS Console] (DSS) (PF) Press the desired DSS or PF button.

  • Page 510: Day / Night Button (Assignment)

    DSS Console Features 5.2.5 DAY / NIGHT Button (Assignment) You can assign a Flexible DSS button as a DAY / NIGHT button. —Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. PT and DSS Console [DSS Console] (DSS) Press the desired…

  • Page 511: Direct Station Selection (Dss) Button (Assignment)

    5.2.6 Direct Station Selection (DSS) Button (Assignment) You can assign the desired extension number to a DSS button. —Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. PT and DSS Console [DSS Console] [Paired telephone] (DSS) Press the desired Dial 1.

  • Page 512: Fwd/Dnd Button (Assignment)

    DSS Console Features 5.2.7 FWD/DND Button (Assignment) You can assign a Flexible DSS or PF button as an FWD/DND button. —Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. PT and DSS Console [DSS Console] (DSS) (PF) Press the desired…

  • Page 513: Group-Co (G-Co) Button (Assignment)

    5.2.8 Group-CO (G-CO) Button (Assignment) You can assign a Flexible DSS button as a Group-CO button. —Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. PT and DSS Console [DSS Console] [Paired telephone] (DSS) Press the desired Dial #.

  • Page 514: Group Fwd Button (Assignment)

    DSS Console Features 5.2.9 Group FWD Button (Assignment) You can assign a Flexible DSS button as a Group FWD button. —Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. PT and DSS Console [DSS Console] [Paired telephone] (DSS) Press the desired…

  • Page 515: Live Call Screening (Lcs) Button (Assignment)

    <PT Display Example> ——To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM]. Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone [DPT] integration; e.g., KX-TVS100).

  • Page 516: Live Call Screening (Lcs) Cancel Button (Assignment)

    LCS Cancel —To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM]. Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone [DPT] integration; e.g., KX-TVS100). [Paired telephone] [Paired telephone] Dial 93.

  • Page 517: Message Waiting (Message) Button (Assignment)

    5.2.12 Message Waiting (MESSAGE) Button (Assignment) You can assign a Flexible DSS button as a Message Waiting (MESSAGE) button. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. PT and DSS Console [DSS Console] (DSS) Press the desired DSS button.

  • Page 518: One-Touch Dialing Button (Assignment)

    DSS Console Features 5.2.13 One-Touch Dialing Button (Assignment) You can assign a DSS or PF button as a One-Touch Dialing button. The number can be an extension number or a telephone number. Up to 24 digits can be stored into each memory location.

  • Page 519: One-Touch Access Assignment For System Features

    5.2.14 One-Touch Access Assignment for System Features You can assign the desired feature number to a DSS or PF button. —Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. PT and DSS Console [DSS Console] [Paired telephone] (DSS) (PF)

  • Page 520: Release Button (Assignment)

    DSS Console Features 5.2.15 Release Button (Assignment) You can assign a Flexible DSS or PF button as a Release button. —Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. PT and DSS Console [DSS Console] (DSS) (PF) Press the desired…

  • Page 521: Save Button (Assignment)

    5.2.16 SAVE Button (Assignment) You can assign a Flexible DSS or PF button as a SAVE button. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. PT and DSS Console [DSS Console] (DSS) (PF) Press the desired DSS or PF button.

  • Page 522: Single-Co (S-Co) Button (Assignment)

    DSS Console Features 5.2.17 Single-CO (S-CO) Button (Assignment) You can assign a DSS button as a Single-CO button. —Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. PT and DSS Console [DSS Console] [Paired telephone] (DSS) Press the desired Dial 0.

  • Page 523: Tone Through Button (Assignment)

    5.2.18 Tone Through Button (Assignment) You can assign a Flexible DSS button as a Tone Through button. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. PT and DSS Console [DSS Console] [Paired telephone] (DSS) Press the desired DSS button.

  • Page 524: Two-Way Record Button (Assignment)

    Programming mode.) — To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM]. Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone [DPT] integration; e.g., KX-TVS100).

  • Page 525: Two-Way Transfer Button (Assignment)

    Programming mode.) — To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM]. Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone [DPT] integration; e.g., KX-TVS100).

  • Page 526: Voice Mail (Vm) Transfer Button (Assignment)

    DSS Console Features 5.2.21 Voice Mail (VM) Transfer Button (Assignment) You can assign a Flexible DSS or PF button as a VM Transfer button. This allows you to record a conversation into your own mailbox. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. PT and DSS Console [DSS Console] [Paired telephone]…

  • Page 527
    To correct an error while programming 7230 / 7235 / 7433 / 7436 [Paired telephone] Press CLR (S2). [Paired telephone] TRANSFER Press TRANSFER (CLEAR). • The TRANSFER button becomes the CLEAR button when using the overlay. To erase after programming PT and DSS Console [DSS Console] [Paired telephone]…
  • Page 528
    – DSS Key – PF Key Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone [DPT] integration; e.g., KX-TVS100). Can only be assigned by System Programming.
  • Page 529
    Features Guide References 1.15 Proprietary Telephone Features • DSS Console User Manual References • 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment User Manual DSS Console Features…
  • Page 530: Direct Station Dialing

    DSS Console Features 5.2.22 Direct Station Dialing An extension can be called and accessed, simply by pressing a DSS button. The BLF shows if the extension is busy. PT and DSS Console [Paired telephone] Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/NOMITOR. [DSS Console] (DSS) Press the desired DSS button.

  • Page 531: One-Touch Dialing

    5.2.23 One-Touch Dialing The stored number is dialed automatically by pressing a programmed DSS or PF button. PT and DSS Console [Paired telephone] Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/NOMITOR. User Manual [DSS Console] (DSS) (PF) Press the desired DSS or PF button. DSS Console Features…

  • Page 532: One-Touch Access For System Features

    DSS Console Features 5.2.24 One-Touch Access for System Features You can access system features by pressing a programmed DSS or PF button. PT and DSS Console [Paired telephone] Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/NOMITOR. [DSS Console] (DSS) (PF) Press the desired DSS or PF button.

  • Page 533: Call Transfer

    5.2.25 Call Transfer A call can be transferred to an extension by using the DSS button. PT and DSS Console During a conversation; [Paired telephone] TRANSFER Press TRANSFER. One-Touch Transfer An outside call can be transferred to an extension with a One-Touch operation. The One-Touch Transfer function must be set by System Programming.

  • Page 534: Answer And Release Buttons Operation

    DSS Console Features 5.2.26 ANSWER and RELEASE Buttons Operation The DSS Console for Attendant KX-T7441 is provided with the ANSWER button and the RELEASE button which are useful for operators who use headsets. For other DSS Consoles, ANSWER button and RELEASE button can be assigned to a DSS or PF button.

  • Page 535
    DSS Console Features One-Touch Transfer PT and DSS Console During a conversation with the headset or handset; RELEASE (DSS) Press the desired DSS button. Press RELEASE. • The other party is placed on hold and the destination is called immediately. Programming Guide References •…
  • Page 536: Monitoring An Outside Line Activity

    DSS Console Features 5.2.27 Monitoring an outside line activity You can monitor the activity of an outside line by assigning an S-CO button (Section 5.2.17 Single-CO (S-CO) Button (Assignment)) or a G-CO button (Section 5.2.8 Group- CO (G-CO) Button (Assignment)) or both. Conditions •…

  • Page 537: 6 Appendix

    Appendix Section 6 Appendix User Manual…

  • Page 538: Appendix 6.1 Appendix

    1234:Tony Viola 1234:Tony Viola 2345: Busy 2345: OCCUPE 4567: 4567: 5678: Free 5678: LIBRE 3456:MDM Access 3456: ACCES MDM 1234567890 1234567890 Panasonic Panasonic 950-1001PP12345& 950-1001PP12345& 1234:Tony Viola 1234:Tony Viola 1234 10101:Tony 1234 10101:Tony 2345: Busy 2345: OCCUPE 4567: 4567: French Display Factory setting.

  • Page 539
    English Display Account Alarm 10:15AM AVERT. 10:15AM Alarm 10:15AM* AVERT. 10:15AM* Alarm Cancelled AVERT. ANNULE Alarm Not Stored AVERT. NON REGLE All Call Page RECH INT ET EXT At Ext 1234 At Ext 1234 Back at 11:00 Back at 11:00 BGM On MUSIQUE:OUI BGM Off…
  • Page 540
    Appendix English Display 10101 & 10102 10101 & 10102 10101: Free 10101: 10301:AB COMPANY 10301:AB COMPANY Conference CONFERENCE CO in Use LR OCCUPEE CO Not Assigned LR NON ASSIGNEE CONT RNGOFF BGM CONT SONN-N MUS Contrast:*** CONTRAST:*** Data Mode Off PROTECTION:NON Data Mode On PROTECTION:OUI…
  • Page 541
    English Display Extrnl Page 1 RECH. EXT. 1 FWD(ALL) Ext1234 RNV(TOUS)PST1234 FWD(B/NA)Ext1000 RNV(O/SR)PST1000 FWD(BSY) Ext2345 RNV(OCC) PST2345 FWD(CO) 91201431 RNV(LR) 91201431 FWD(From)Ext1234 RNV(DE) FWD(NA) Ext3456 RNV(SR) PST3456 FWD(NACO) 91234 RNV(SRLR) 91234 FWD Cancel E1234 ANNUL. RNV P1234 FWD/DND Cancel ANNULER RNV/NPD Gone Home Gone Home Group Page 01…
  • Page 542
    Appendix English Display In a Meeting In a Meeting Locked NO. : 123 CODE VERR. : 123 Log Locked :123 REG FERME : 123 Message Cancel MESSAGE ANNULE MODEM command 1 COMMANDE MODEM 1 MW at Ext 1234 MESS. PST 1234 MW Not Accepted MESS ATT.
  • Page 543
    English Display Ringer : *** SONN. : *** SP:************ HP:************ Transfer to CO TRANSFERT A LR Try Again RESSAYER Unlocked DEVERROUILLE Will Return Soon Will Return Soon Provides you with a caller’s information, such as his name and telephone number, on the CO line assigned to receive Caller ID service calls.
  • Page 544
    Appendix Examples – in Station Programming mode English Display Account COMPTE C.W. Tone1 TON.APPEL1 Clear Ready? ANNULER DONNEES? CO-10101 LR-10101 Conference CONFERENCE 1400:CO Lock 1400:LR VERR. 1400:ICM Lock 1400:INTCM VERR. 1400:Unlock 1400:DEVERR. Ext-1234 PST-1234 FWD/DND RNV/NPD Hands-free:Off MAINS LIB.:NON Hands-free:On MAINS LIB.:OUI Handset COMBINE…
  • Page 545
    Examples – in Station Programming mode English Display Pref.Out:ICM SOR.PREF:INTCM Pref.Out:Idle SOR.PREF:LIB. Pref.Out:No SOR.PREF:NON Save SAUVEGARDE Tone Call APPEL-TON. Tone Type-2 TON. TYPE-2 TRK GRP-03 GR LR VTR-1010 TMV-1010 Voice Call APPEL VOCAL 092-555-2111 092-555-2111 Conditions • If the displayed characters exceed 16 digits, «&» is shown at the right-hand edge. •…
  • Page 546: Feature Numbers List

    Appendix 6.1.2 Feature Numbers List Numbers listed below are the initial factory settings (default value). There are flexible feature numbers and fixed feature numbers. The flexible feature numbers can be changed by System Programming <Section 2.3 Numbering Plan in the Programming Guide>. Feature 1st hundred block extension 2nd hundred block extension…

  • Page 547
    Feature Call Pickup, Group Call Pickup Deny set/cancel Call Waiting set/cancel Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP) Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR)/ Calling Name Identification Restriction (CNIR) Data Line Security set/cancel Dial Information (CTI) Do Not Disturb (DND) set/cancel Doorphone Call calling Doorphone Call door open Electronic Station Lockout set Electronic Station Lockout cancel…
  • Page 548
    Appendix Feature Paging — All Paging — External Paging — External Answer/TAFAS Answer Paging — Group Paging — Group Answer Paging Deny set/cancel Paralleled Telephone Connection set/cancel Pickup Dialing (Hot Line) assign/set/cancel Quick Dial 1-8 Redial, Last Number Remote DND (Do Not Disturb) set/cancel Remote FWD (Call Forwarding) Cancel-Once Station Program clear Station Speed Dialing…
  • Page 549
    hhmm hh: hour(01-12) mm: minute(00-59) While a busy tone is heard: Automatic Callback Busy Busy Station Signaling (BSS) / Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA) / Whisper OHCA Executive Busy Override While a Do Not Disturb tone is heard: Do Not Disturb Override While calling or talking: Account Code Delimiter Alternate Calling — Ring / Voice…
  • Page 550
    Appendix example, to set Call Waiting, the feature number for «Call Waiting» must be followed by «1» and to cancel it, the same feature number should be followed by «0.» • Fixed Feature Numbers Type-1 or Type-2 can be selected by System Programming. (Default = Type-1) Programming Guide References •…
  • Page 551: Tone List

    6.1.3 Tone List <TONE> Confirmation Tone 1 Confirmation Tone 2 Confirmation Tone 3 Confirmation Tone 4 Dial Tone 1 Dial Tone 2 Dial Tone 3 Dial Tone 4 Busy Tone Reorder Tone Ringback Tone 1 Ringback Tone 2 Do Not Disturb (DND) Tone CO-CO Line Call Limit Warning Tone…

  • Page 552
    Appendix <TONE> Call Waiting Tone 1 (outside/intercom) Call Waiting Tone 2 (outside) Call Waiting Tone 2 (intercom) Hold Alarm Tone <RING TONE> Outside Calls / Outside Call Hold Recall Intercom Calls / Intercom Call Hold Recall Doorphone Calls / Timed Reminder Callback Ringing (Camp-on Recall) 15 s…
  • Page 553: Troubleshooting

    6.1.4 Troubleshooting If a power failure should occur… Your KX-TD500 System enables conversations between specific CO lines and extensions (Power Failure Transfer), and supports system data backup. Power Failure Transfer Specific extensions are automatically connected straight to specific CO lines. This provides CO line conversations between the pre-assigned extensions and CO lines: •…

  • Page 554
    Copyright: This manual is copyrighted by Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. (PCC). You may print out this manual solely for internal use with this model. Except above, you may not reproduce this manual in any form, in whole or part, without the prior written consent of PCC and its licensee.

  • Page 1: User Manual

    ITAL LINE Digital Super Hybrid System User Manual KX-TD500 Model No. Please read this manual before connecting the Digital Super Hybrid System and save this manual for future reference.

  • Page 2
    Thank you for purchasing the Panasonic Model KX-TD500, Digital Super Hybrid System. User Manual…
  • Page 3: System Components

    System Components Model No. Service Unit KX-TD500 KX-T7220 KX-T7230 KX-T7235 KX-T7250 Telephone KX-T7420 KX-T7425 KX-T7431 KX-T7433 KX-T7436 KX-T7240 Optional KX-T7440 Equipment KX-T7441 User-supplied Single Line Telephones Equipment User Manual Description Digital Super Hybrid System Digital Proprietary Telephone Digital Proprietary Telephone with Display…

  • Page 4
    • If there is any trouble, unplug the extension line and connect a known working phone. If the known working phone operates properly, have the defective phone repaired by a specified Panasonic Factory Service Center. If the known working phone does not operate properly, check the Digital Super Hybrid System and the internal extension wiring.
  • Page 5
    TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR ANY TYPE OF MOISTURE. Note If you connect the Panasonic Wireless System (model KX-TD336900) to the Digital Super Hybrid System, the following features do not work with the Wireless System: a) Call Forwarding — Follow Me…
  • Page 6
    Cautions Accessory Order Information • Replacement parts and accessories are available through your local authorized parts distributor. • For ordering accessories, call toll free: 1-800-332-5368. Part No. KX-J07W/B KX-J15W/B KX-J25W/B W: White, B: Black Picture Description Handset cord Comment 213.36 cm (7 feet) 457.2 cm (15 feet) 762 cm (25 feet) User Manual…
  • Page 7
    KX-T7425/KX-T7431/KX-T7433/KX-T7436, Digital DSS Consoles; KX-T7240/KX-T7440/ KX-T7441, Single Line Telephones (SLTs) and their features. The step-by-step procedures required to activate each feature are discussed in detail. Illustrations of the KX-TD500 system and the required System Programming are provided under separate cover in the Installation Manual and the Programming Guide.
  • Page 8
    Introduction • Call Log, Outgoing* redials by selecting one of the last five CO calls you made, according to the number information on the display. • Conference, Unattended When you are in a conference with two outside parties, you can leave the conference and allow the other two parties to continue the conversation. You can also return to the conference.
  • Page 9
    About the Other Manuals Along with this User Manual, the following manuals are available: Features Guide Describes every basic, optional and programmable features of the KX-TD500 System in alphabetical order. Installation Manual Provides instructions for installing the hardware and system maintenance.
  • Page 10
    Telephone Company and F.C.C. Requirements and Responsibilities Telephone Company and F.C.C. Requirements and Responsibilities Telephone Company and F.C.C. Requirements and Responsibility Notification to the Telephone Company Customers, before connecting terminal equipment to the telephone network, shall upon request of the Telephone Company, inform the Telephone Company of the particular line(s) to which such connection is made, the F.C.C.
  • Page 11
    • Telephone numbers to which the system will be connected • Make: Panasonic • Model: KX-TD500 and KX-TD520 • FCC Registration No.: found on the rear side of the unit • Ringer Equivalence No.: 0.4B •…
  • Page 12
    Telephone Company and F.C.C. Requirements and Responsibilities to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate this device.
  • Page 13: Table Of Contents

    Table of Contents 1 DPT Overview 1.1 Configuration…20 1.1.1 Configuration…20 1.1.2 Location of Controls…21 1.1.3 Connection …30 1.1.4 Feature Buttons …31 1.1.5 Initial Setting for KX-T7400 Series …39 1.1.6 Initial Setting for KX-T7200 Series …43 1.1.7 LED Indication …46 2 Station Programming 2.1 Station Programming Instructions …50 2.1.1 Station Programming Instructions…50 2.2 Station Programming…56…

  • Page 14
    Table of Contents 3.2.9 [009] Quick Dial Number Set… 140 3.2.10 [010] DISA / TIE User Code Set… 143 4 Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.1 Before Operating … 148 4.1.1 Before Operating … 148 4.2 Basic Operations … 151 4.2.1 Making Calls …
  • Page 15
    Table of Contents 4.3.39 Handset Microphone Mute…273 4.3.40 Hands-free Answerback …275 4.3.41 Hands-free Operation …277 4.3.42 Inter Office Calling…279 4.3.43 Live Call Screening (LCS) …282 4.3.44 Lockout…292 4.3.45 Log-In / Log-Out …293 4.3.46 Message Waiting …297 4.3.47 Microphone Mute …302 4.3.48 Night Service On/Off …304 4.3.49 Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA) …311 4.3.50 Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA) —Whisper…316…
  • Page 16
    Table of Contents 4.4.2 Background Music (BGM) — External … 407 4.4.3 Call Log Incoming, Log Lock … 411 4.4.4 Live Call Screening (LCS) Password Clear … 412 4.4.5 Local Alarm… 413 4.4.6 Outgoing Message (OGM) Record/Playback… 417 4.4.7 Remote DND (Do Not Disturb) Control … 426 4.4.8 Remote FWD (Call Forwarding) Cancel —…
  • Page 17
    Table of Contents 5.2.16 SAVE Button (Assignment) …521 5.2.17 Single-CO (S-CO) Button (Assignment) …522 5.2.18 Tone Through Button (Assignment)…523 5.2.19 Two-Way Record Button (Assignment) …524 5.2.20 Two-Way Transfer Button (Assignment) …525 5.2.21 Voice Mail (VM) Transfer Button (Assignment) …526 5.2.22 Direct Station Dialing…530 5.2.23 One-Touch Dialing …531 5.2.24 One-Touch Access for System Features…532 5.2.25 Call Transfer…533…
  • Page 18
    Table of Contents User Manual…
  • Page 19: Dpt Overview

    DPT Overview Section 1 DPT Overview Note: All illustrations used in the initial setting are based on model KX-T7235. User Manual…

  • Page 20: Configuration

    DPT Overview 1.1 Configuration 1.1.1 Configuration Panasonic Digital Proprietary Telephones (DPTs) are available to utilize various features of the KX-TD500 System, in addition to supporting basic telephone services (making or receiving calls). There are the following nine DPT models. KX-T7420…

  • Page 21: Location Of Controls

    1.1.2 Location of Controls KX-T7420 PROGRAM Button FWD/DND Button CONF Button INTERCOM Button REDIAL Button HOLD Button SP-PHONE Button User Manual Flexible CO Buttons (Outside lines 01 through 12) AUTO DIAL/STORE Button AUTO ANSWER/MUTE Button Microphone DPT Overview PAUSE Button TRANSFER Button MESSAGE Button RINGER Volume Selector…

  • Page 22
    DPT Overview KX-T7425 PROGRAM Button FWD/DND Button CONF Button INTERCOM Button REDIAL Button HOLD Button SP-PHONE Button Flexible CO Buttons (Outside lines 01 through 24) AUTO DIAL/STORE Button RINGER Volume Selector AUTO ANSWER/MUTE Button Microphone PAUSE Button TRANSFER Button MESSAGE Button Used to adjust the ringer volume.
  • Page 23
    KX-T7431 Flexible CO Buttons (Outside lines 01 through 12) PROGRAM Button FWD/DND Button CONF Button INTERCOM Button REDIAL Button HOLD Button SP-PHONE Button User Manual Display (Liquid Crystal Display) With 16-character/1-line readout: Shows the date, time, dialed number or name, call duration time, etc.
  • Page 24
    DPT Overview KX-T7433 Flexible CO Buttons (Outside lines 01 through 24) PROGRAM Button FWD/DND Button CONF Button INTERCOM Button REDIAL Button HOLD Button SP-PHONE Button To lift or set down the display: – To lift the display 1 Press the LCD ADJ button. 2 Lift up the display.
  • Page 25
    KX-T7436 Function Buttons (F1 through F5) Flexible CO Buttons (Outside lines 01 through 24) PROGRAM Button FWD/DND Button CONF Button INTERCOM Button REDIAL Button HOLD Button SP-PHONE Button To lift or set down the display: – To lift the display 1 Press the LCD ADJ button.
  • Page 26
    DPT Overview KX-T7220 MESSAGE Button FWD/DND Button CONF Button INTERCOM Button REDIAL Button FLASH Button HOLD Button Microphone AUTO ANSWER/MUTE Button SP-PHONE Button Flexible CO Buttons (Outside lines 01 through 24) RINGER Volume Selector Used to adjust the ringer volume. TRANSFER Button PROGRAM Button VOLUME Control Button…
  • Page 27
    KX-T7230 PROGRAM Button Flexible CO Buttons (Outside lines 01 through 24) MESSAGE Button FWD/DND Button CONF Button INTERCOM Button REDIAL Button FLASH Button HOLD Button Microphone User Manual Display (Liquid Crystal Display) with 16-characters/2-line readout: Shows the date, time, dialed number or name, call duration time, etc.
  • Page 28
    DPT Overview KX-T7235 Function Buttons (F1 through F5) PROGRAM Button MESSAGE Button FWD/DND Button CONF Button INTERCOM Button REDIAL Button FLASH Button HOLD Button Microphone SP-PHONE Button AUTO ANSWER/MUTE Button To lift or set down the display: – To lift the display 1 Press the LCD ADJ button.
  • Page 29
    KX-T7250 Flexible CO Buttons (Outside lines 01 through 06) INTERCOM Button REDIAL Button FLASH Button HOLD Button MONITOR Button User Manual DPT Overview Memory Card Pull out the card and write down the names or phone numbers associated with automatic dialing numbers. RINGER Volume Selector Used to adjust the ringer volume.
  • Page 30: Connection

    * XDP(eXtra Device Port) expands the number of telephones available in the system by allowing an extension port to contain two telephones. For more details, please consult your dealer. → Connect to the KX-TD500 System. → Connect to a Single Line Telephone (SLT) jack, Telephone Answering Machine, or FAX for XDP* or parallel connections.

  • Page 31: Feature Buttons

    1.1.4 Feature Buttons Digital Proprietary Telephones (DPTs) have the following types of Feature Buttons: • Fixed Buttons • Flexible Buttons Fixed Buttons Fixed buttons have specific functions permanently assigned to them. These default function assignments cannot be changed. The following table lists the fixed buttons located on each DPT model.

  • Page 32
    DPT Overview Feature Button T7420 T7425 T7431 T7433 T7436 T7220 T7230 T7235 T7250 TRANSFER VOLUME The button is not provided with an LED (Light Emitting Diode). » » indicates the button is available. Usage AUTO ANSWER/MUTE Button Used for Hands-free answer back; and it turns the microphone off during a conversation. AUTO DIAL/STORE Button Used for System Speed Dialing and storing program changes.
  • Page 33
    DPT Overview REDIAL Button Used for the Last Number Redialing. SELECT Button Used to select the displayed function or to call the displayed phone number. SHIFT Button Used to access the next level of Soft Button functions. Soft (S1 through S3) Buttons Used to perform the function or operation that appears on the bottom line of the display.
  • Page 34
    DPT Overview Flexible Buttons Flexible Buttons do not have specific features permanently assigned to them. Features are assigned to Flexible Buttons by Station, User or System Programming. «Flexible Button Assignment» is addressed in «Station Programming.» The three types of Flexible Buttons are as follows: •…
  • Page 35
    Can only be assigned by User or System Programming. Can only be assigned by System Programming. † Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone [DPT] integration; e.g., KX-TVS100). «…
  • Page 36
    DPT Overview Single-CO (S-CO) button An S-CO button is a CO line access button. This allows you to access a specific CO line by pressing an S-CO button. An incoming CO call can be directed to an S-CO button. Conditions •…
  • Page 37
    • When your extension is assigned as an incoming call destination for a CO line, you cannot receive any incoming CO calls unless a G-CO, L-CO or S-CO button associated with the CO line is assigned. Programming Guide References • 4.3 Extension Line –…
  • Page 38
    DPT Overview User Manual References • 1.1.4 Feature Buttons • 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment • 3.2.5 [005] Flexible CO Button Assignment • 4.3.54 Outward Dialing, Trunk Access User Manual…
  • Page 39: Initial Setting For Kx-T7400 Series

    1.1.5 Initial Setting for KX-T7400 Series The Jog Dial can be used for the display contrast and the volume control. Rotate the Jog Dial in either direction as desired. The contrast or the volume level will change as follows. Left (counterclockwise) Level decreases Display Contrast Adjustment…

  • Page 40
    DPT Overview When using the headset The Panasonic Digital Super Hybrid System supports the use of a headset with a Proprietary Telephone (PT). When you use the headset (optional), you should switch the selection mode first. Selection is explained in Section «2.2.5 Handset / Headset Selection.»…
  • Page 41
    To adjust the headset volume SP-PHONE To adjust the ringer volume —KX-T7433 and KX-T7436 RING User Manual Be sure the headset is connected. Press the SP-PHONE button. Rotate the Jog Dial in the desired direction. • The display shows: <Example> ( volume level 3) Headset:*** While the telephone is ringing…
  • Page 42
    DPT Overview —KX-T7431 MODE —KX-T7420 and KX-T7425 HIGH To adjust the speaker volume SP-PHONE Conditions • If the ringer volume of the KX-T7431 is set to OFF, the display while on-hook is as follows. Ring Off 12:00P • By pressing » ,» the display changes to show your extension number and name. 101: John Smith While the telephone is idle and on-hook Press the MODE button five times.
  • Page 43: Initial Setting For Kx-T7200 Series

    VOLUME When using the headset The Panasonic Digital Super Hybrid System supports the use of a headset with a Proprietary Telephone (PT). When you use the headset (optional), you should switch the selection mode first. Selection is explained in Section «2.2.5 Handset / Headset Selection.»…

  • Page 44
    DPT Overview If your Digital Proprietary Telephone is provided with a display (display DPT), the volume level is indicated on the display by the number of asterisks. For ringer volume adjustment, three levels (OFF/LOW/HIGH) are available with the KX-T7220 and KX-T7250. To adjust the handset receiver volume VOLUME To adjust the headset volume…
  • Page 45
    RING VOLUME —KX-T7220 and KX-T7250 HIGH To adjust the speaker volume SP-PHONE MONITOR VOLUME User Manual While the telephone is idle and on-hook; Press the RING (S2) button. • The telephone will ring. Press the VOLUME (UP / DOWN ) Control button. •…
  • Page 46: Led Indication

    DPT Overview 1.1.7 LED Indication The Light Emitting Diode (LED) buttons indicate the line conditions with lighting patterns. Flashing light patterns Slow flashing (60 flash/minute) Moderate flashing (120 flash/minute) Rapid flashing (240 flash/minute) LED Indication on the INTERCOM Button The table below shows the lighting patterns for intercom line conditions. INTERCOM button Green On Green slow flashing…

  • Page 47
    CO Button Green On Green slow flashing Green moderate flashing Green rapid flashing Red On Red slow flashing Red rapid flashing — Items marked with «*» are only available on the Single-CO button. BLF on DSS Button The Busy Lamp Field (BLF) indicator button is red when the corresponding extension is busy. This is available for Direct Station Selection (DSS) buttons on DSS Consoles and for flexible CO buttons assigned as DSS buttons on Proprietary Telephones.
  • Page 48
    DPT Overview User Manual…
  • Page 49: Station Programming

    Station Programming Section 2 Station Programming Note: All illustrations used in this section are based on model KX-T7235. User Manual…

  • Page 50: Station Programming Instructions

    Station Programming 2.1 Station Programming Instructions 2.1.1 Station Programming Instructions Station Programming allows you, the Proprietary Telephone (PT) users, to program certain features from your telephone individually. To program, you need to switch your telephone to the Station Programming mode. During programming mode, your telephone is in the busy condition to both inside and outside callers.

  • Page 51
    Station Programming Exiting Station Programming mode When the display shows the initial programming mode; PROGRAM Press PROGRAM. To exit the Station Programming mode, press PROGRAM. You are in the call handling mode. User Manual…
  • Page 52
    C.W. Tone1 † Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone [DPT] integration; e.g., KX-TVS100). —To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM].
  • Page 53
    Confirming the assigned data on the Flexible button —Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. Press the desired Flexible (CO,DSS,PF) button. The display shows the current status. —To exit Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM]. —If you wish to change the data, follow the programming procedure explained in this section.
  • Page 54
    PROGRAM Phantom (F1 — F10) * : Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone [DPT] integration; e.g., KX-TVS100). (Station Programming) Direct Station Selection (DSS) Button…
  • Page 55
    [Function Assignment] PROGRAM † Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone [DPT] integration; e.g., KX-TVS100). User Manual (Preferred Line Assignment — Outgoing)
  • Page 56: Station Programming

    Station Programming 2.2 Station Programming 2.2.1 Bilingual Display Selection Allows you to select the display in English or French. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. Dial 82. Dial 1 or 2. 1 : for the English display 2 : for the French display The display shows the current display type.

  • Page 57: Call Waiting Tone Type Assignment

    2.2.2 Call Waiting Tone Type Assignment Allows you to select the call waiting tone type (Tone 1 or Tone 2). — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. Dial 5. Dial 1 or 2. 1 : to select Call Waiting Tone 1 2 : to select Call Waiting Tone 2 The display shows the current tone type.

  • Page 58: Flexible Button Assignment

    Station Programming 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment Each Flexible (CO,DSS,PF) button on your PT and DSS Console can be assigned as various feature buttons such as an Account Button, FWD/DND Button, etc. The features assignable are limited by the button type. Please refer to «Flexible Buttons» in Section «1.1.4 Feature Buttons.»…

  • Page 59
    Alarm Button (Assignment) Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO) button as an Alarm button. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. (CO) Press the desired Flexible (CO) button you wish to assign as the Alarm button.
  • Page 60
    Station Programming Alert Button (Assignment) Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO) button as an Alert button. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. (CO) Press the desired Flexible (CO) button you wish to assign as the Alert button.
  • Page 61
    Answer Button (Assignment) Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO, DSS, PF) button as an Answer button. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. Press the desired Flexible (CO, DSS, PF) button you wish to assign as the Answer button.
  • Page 62
    Station Programming Conference (CONF) Button (Assignment) Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO, DSS, PF) button as a Conference (CONF) button. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. Press the desired Flexible (CO, DSS, PF) button you wish to assign as the Conference button.
  • Page 63
    DAY/NIGHT Button (Assignment) Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO, DSS) button as a DAY/NIGHT button. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. Press the desired Flexible (CO, DSS) button you wish to assign as the DAY/NIGHT button.
  • Page 64
    Station Programming Direct Station Selection (DSS) Button (Assignment) Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO, DSS) button as a DSS button. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. Press the desired Flexible Dial 1.
  • Page 65
    FWD/DND Button (Assignment) Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO, DSS, PF) button as an FWD/DND button. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. Press the desired Flexible (CO, DSS, PF) button you wish to assign as the FWD/DND button.
  • Page 66
    Station Programming Group FWD Button (Assignment) Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO, DSS) button as a Group FWD button. —Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. Dial 98. Press the desired Flexible (CO, DSS) button you wish to assign as the Group FWD button.
  • Page 67
    Group Log-In / Log-Out Button (Assignment) Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO) button as a Group Log-In / Log-Out button. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. (CO) Dial 79. Press the desired Flexible (CO) button you wish to assign as the Group Log-In / Log-Out button.
  • Page 68
    Station Programming Group-CO (G-CO) Button (Assignment) Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO, DSS) button as a Group-CO button. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. Press the desired Flexible (CO, DSS) button you wish to assign as a G-CO button.
  • Page 69
    LCS Cancel — To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM]. Available when the Digital Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone [DPT] integration; e.g., KX-TVS100). User Manual…
  • Page 70
    Station Programming Log-In / Log-Out Button (Assignment) Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO) button as a Log-In / Log-Out button. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. (CO ) Press the desired Flexible (CO) button you wish to assign as the Log-In/Log-Out button.
  • Page 71
    Message Waiting (MESSAGE) Button (Assignment) Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO, DSS) button as a Message Waiting (MESSAGE) button. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. Press the desired Flexible(CO, DSS) button you wish to assign as the Message Waiting button, <PT Display Example>…
  • Page 72
    Station Programming One-Touch Dialing Button (Assignment) Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO, DSS, PF) button as a One-Touch Dialing button. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. Press the desired Flexible Dial 2.
  • Page 73
    Phantom Button (Assignment) Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO) button as a Phantom button. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. (CO) Press the desired Flexible Dial 72. (CO) button you wish to assign as a Phantom button.
  • Page 74
    Station Programming Primary Directory Number (PDN) Button (Assignment) Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO) button as a PDN button. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. (CO) Press the desired Flexible (CO) button you wish to assign as a PDN button.
  • Page 75
    Release Button (Assignment) Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO, DSS, PF) button as a Release button. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. Press the desired Flexible (CO, DSS, PF) button you wish to assign as the Release button.
  • Page 76
    Station Programming Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Button (Assignment) Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO) button as an SDN button. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. (CO) Press the desired Flexible Dial 75.
  • Page 77
    Single-CO (S-CO) Button (Assignment) Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO, DSS) button as a Single-CO button. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. Press the desired Flexible Dial 0. (CO, DSS) button you wish to assign as an S-CO button.
  • Page 78
    Station Programming Tone Through Button (Assignment) Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO, DSS) button as a Tone Through button. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. Press the desired Flexible (CO, DSS) button you wish to assign as the Tone Through button.
  • Page 79
    – [EXT No.1] Group No. – [EXT No.2] DN Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone [DPT] integration; e.g., KX-TVS100). A Floating Directory Number (FDN) is a virtual extension number which appears to be an extension.
  • Page 80
    • 1.5 VPS (DPT) Port Assignment – [EXT No.1] DN Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone [DPT] integration; e.g., KX-TVS100). A Floating Directory Number (FDN) is a virtual extension number which appears to be an extension.
  • Page 81
    – [EXT No.1] Group No. – [EXT No.2] DN – [EXT No.2] Group No. Voice Mail (VM) Transfer Button (Assignment) Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO, DSS, PF) button as a VM Transfer button. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. Press the desired Flexible Dial 8.
  • Page 82: Full One-Touch Dialing Assignment

    Station Programming 2.2.4 Full One-Touch Dialing Assignment Allows you to enable or disable the «Full One-Touch Dialing» function. The «Hands-free Operation» mode is activated by pressing a One-Touch Dialing button, DSS button, REDIAL button or SAVE button. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. Dial 3.

  • Page 83: Handset / Headset Selection

    2.2.5 Handset / Headset Selection Allows you to select the handset mode or headset mode. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. Dial 9. Dial 1 or 2. 1 : to select Handset mode 2 : to select Headset mode The display shows the current status.

  • Page 84: Initial Display Selection

    Station Programming 2.2.6 Initial Display Selection Allows you to select the initial display, Caller ID, CO line name or DID name which is shown on the display when a call is received. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. Dial 81.

  • Page 85: Intercom Alert Assignment

    2.2.7 Intercom Alert Assignment Allows you to select the alert mode (tone / voice) when receiving an intercom (extension) call. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. Dial 4. Dial 1 or 2. 1 : to select the Ring-Calling (Tone Call) mode 2 : to select the Voice-Calling mode <PT Display Example>…

  • Page 86: Live Call Screening (Lcs) Mode Set

    — To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM]. Conditions • The default is «Hands-free» mode. Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone [DPT] integration; e.g., KX-TVS100). AUTO DIAL STORE Press STORE.

  • Page 87: Pdn/Sdn Button Delayed Ringing Assignment

    2.2.9 PDN/SDN Button Delayed Ringing Assignment Allows you to assign a delayed ringing function on the PDN/SDN button. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. (PDN) (SDN) Press PDN or SDN you wish to assign the delayed ringing function.

  • Page 88: Phantom Button Ringing On/Off Assignment

    Station Programming 2.2.10 Phantom Button Ringing On/Off Assignment Allows you to assign a ringing On/Off function on a Phantom button. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. (Phantom) Press Phantom you Press the same Phantom wish to turn On/Off the again.

  • Page 89: Preferred Line Assignment — Incoming

    2.2.11 Preferred Line Assignment — Incoming Allows you to select the method used to answer incoming calls from the following three line preferences: No Line Preference Ringing Line Preference (— default) Prime Line Preference Follow the corresponding programming procedure according to your selection. User Manual Station Programming…

  • Page 90
    Station Programming No Line Preference — Incoming (Assignment) No line is selected when you go off-hook to answer a call. You must select a line to answer an incoming call. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. Dial 2.
  • Page 91
    Prime Line Preference — Incoming (Assignment) You are connected to a call on the line assigned as the prime line automatically, when you go off-hook to answer a call. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. Dial 2.
  • Page 92: Preferred Line Assignment — Outgoing

    Station Programming 2.2.12 Preferred Line Assignment — Outgoing Allows you to select the desired outgoing line preference to originate calls from the following three line preferences: No Line Preference Idle Line Preference Prime Line Preference (INTERCOM) (— default Follow the programming procedure according to your selection. Note •…

  • Page 93
    Idle Line Preference — Outgoing (Assignment) When you go off-hook to make a call, you are connected to an idle line automatically. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. Dial 1. The display shows the current status.
  • Page 94
    Station Programming Prime Line Preference — Outgoing (Assignment) When you go off-hook to make a call, you are connected to a line assigned as the prime line automatically. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. Dial 1.
  • Page 95: Ringing Tone Selection For Co Buttons

    2.2.13 Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons Allows you to assign a ringer frequency to each CO (S-CO, G-CO, L-CO) or DN (PDN, SDN) button. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. Press CO, PDN or SDN which you wish to change the ringing tone.

  • Page 96: Ringing Tone Selection For Intercom Button

    Station Programming 2.2.14 Ringing Tone Selection for INTERCOM Button Allows you to assign a ringer frequency to the INTERCOM button. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. INTERCOM Press INTERCOM. Press INTERCOM again. The display shows the current status The display shows the selected tone type number and you hear…

  • Page 97: Self-Extension Number Confirmation

    2.2.15 Self-Extension Number Confirmation Allows you to display your extension port physical number and extension number. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. Dial 6. <PT Display Example> 10101<=>EXT1001 extension port physical number —…

  • Page 98: Station Programming Data Default Set

    Station Programming 2.2.16 Station Programming Data Default Set Allows you to return each of the following items assigned by Station Programming to their default settings. Bilingual Display Selection (default: English) Call Waiting Tone Type Assignment (default: Tone 1) Full One-Touch Dialing Assignment (default: On) Handset/Headset Selection (default: Handset) Initial Display Selection (default: Caller ID) Intercom Alert Assignment (default: Tone Call)

  • Page 99: Station Speed Dialing Number/Name Assignment [Kx-T7235/Kx-T7431/Kx- T7433/Kx-T7436 Only]

    2.2.17 Station Speed Dialing Number/Name Assignment [KX- T7235/KX-T7431/KX-T7433/KX-T7436 only] Allows you to assign frequently dialed numbers and names to each Function button on your PT. For KX-T7235 and KX-T7436 users To store a number — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. 7235/7436 PT-PGM Mode Press Function (F1-F10).

  • Page 100
    Station Programming To store a name — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. 7235/7436 PT-PGM Mode Press Function (F1-F10). The STORE indicator light turns off. The display shows the current status. desired name Enter the name.* —…
  • Page 101
    For KX-T7431 and KX-T7433 users To store a number — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. 7431/7433 station speed dial no. Dial Enter a station speed dial number (0 through 9). The STORE indicator light turns off. The display shows the current status.
  • Page 102
    Station Programming To store a name — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. 7431/7433 station speed dial no. Dial Enter a station speed dial number (0 through 9). The STORE indicator light turns off. The display shows the current status.
  • Page 103
    Combination Table Each character can be entered by using the dial key pad, various buttons or the Jog Dial for storing names. Combination Table 1 shows the combination of the keys and the number of times to press the SELECT (AUTO ANSWER/MUTE) button, or the combination of the key and the SHIFT and Soft buttons to enter each character.
  • Page 104
    Station Programming Rotating Jog Dial (Pulses) keys (Space) < Example> To enter «Mike» — Using the SELECT button; See Combination Table 1. Press 6 and then press the SELECT button once to enter «M.» Press 4 and then press the SELECT button six times to enter «i.» Press 5 and then press the SELECT button four times to enter «k.»…
  • Page 105
    — Using the Jog Dial (With a KX-T7431 / KX-T7433 / KX-T7436 only) See Combination Table 2. Press 6 and then rotate the Jog Dial one pulse to enter «M.» Press 4 and then rotate the Jog Dial six pulses to enter «i.» Press 5 and then rotate the Jog Dial four pulses to enter «k.»…
  • Page 106
    Station Programming User Manual…
  • Page 107: User Programming

    User Programming Section 3 User Programming User Manual…

  • Page 108: User Programming Instructions

    User Programming 3.1 User Programming Instructions 3.1.1 General Programming Instructions User Programming allows you, any PT extension user who knows the User Programming Password, to program the following system features from your telephone individually. • 3.2.1 [000] Date and Time Set •…

  • Page 109
    Using the Overlay A programming overlay is packed with the telephone at the factory. This overlay should be used at all times in the programming mode since the functions of the telephone keys change in the programming mode as follows: (The original functions are in parentheses.) During Normal Operation (PAUSE/PROGRAM) (SP-PHONE)
  • Page 110
    User Programming Location of Controls with the Overlay The pictures below show the functions of the buttons of the KX-T7433, KX-T7436, KX-T7230 and KX-T7235 in the programming mode. KX-T7431 is the same as KX-T7433 except for the Soft and SHIFT buttons. KX-T7431 KX-T7433 Soft-1…
  • Page 111
    Before entering the User Programming mode Before entering the User Programming mode, confirm that: • Your telephone is on-hook, and • No calls are on hold at your telephone. Entering the User Programming mode To enter the User Programming mode: Press PROGRAM + •…
  • Page 112: Programming Methods

    User Programming 3.1.2 Programming Methods Advancing to the next stage When «SYS-PGM NO? » is displayed, you can select one of the following: • To go to program [000], press the NEXT button. • To go to another program, enter the 3-digit program address. Entering Characters You can enter characters to store names for speed dial numbers, extension numbers, etc., by using the dialing key pad and buttons.

  • Page 113
    Accessing another program address After pressing STORE, you can access another program by one of the following two methods: To go to the next program address: • Higher program address <KX-T7200 series> Press Soft 1 (SKP+) or VOLUME <KX-T7400 series> Rotate the Jog Dial clockwise.
  • Page 114: User Programming

    User Programming 3.2 User Programming 3.2.1 [000] Date and Time Set Notice It is assumed that you have read Section «3.1 User Programming Instructions.» Soft button usage is explained in that section, therefore no references will be made to them in the following instructions.

  • Page 115: Programming

    Programming Display PT <Date Setting> Dial 000. <PT Display> 000 DATE / TIME SELECT Press →. Keep pressing SELECT until the desired month is displayed. <Time Setting> STORE NEXT Press STORE. Press NEXT. <PT Display Example> 12:00 AM 12 SELECT Press →.

  • Page 116
    User Programming Conditions • After changing an entry, you can press STORE. You do not have to perform the rest of the steps. • To return to the previous field, press • If you hear an alarm after pressing STORE, check that the date is valid. •…
  • Page 117: 001] System Speed Dialing Number Set

    3.2.2 [001] System Speed Dialing Number Set Description Used to program the System Speed Dialing numbers. These numbers are available for any extension user in the system. Selection • Speed dial numbers: 000 through 999 • Telephone number: 24 digits (max.) Default All speed dial numbers —…

  • Page 118
    User Programming Programming Display PT Dial 001. <PT Display> 001 SYS SPD DIAL Repeat these steps telephone no. Enter a telephone number. To delete the current entry, press CLEAR. To change the current entry, press CLEAR and enter the new number. <To end:>…
  • Page 119
    Conditions • There is a maximum of 1000 speed dial numbers per tenant. However, this can be changed by System programming. System supports a maximum of 2000 speed dial numbers, being shared among up to 8 tenants. Each speed dial number has a maximum of 24 digits. The valid characters are 0 through 9, , and # keys, and the FLASH, PAUSE, SECRET and «-«(hyphen) buttons.
  • Page 120: 002] System Speed Dialing Name Set

    User Programming 3.2.3 [002] System Speed Dialing Name Set Description Assigns names to the system speed dial numbers assigned in program [001] «System Speed Dialing Number Set.» The KX-T7431, KX-T7433, KX-T7436 and KX-T7235 show the stored name during System Speed Dialing. Selection •…

  • Page 121
    Programming Display PT Dial 002. <PT Display> 002 SYS SPD NAME Repeat these steps name Enter a name. To delete the current entry, press CLEAR. To change the current entry, press CLEAR and enter the new name. <To end:> Press END. Conditions •…
  • Page 122
    User Programming User Manual References • 4.3.73 System Speed Dialing User Manual…
  • Page 123: 004] Extension Name Set

    3.2.4 [004] Extension Name Set Description Assigns names to the extension numbers. Selection • Extension number: 3 or 4 digits • Name: 10 characters (max.) Default All extension ports — Not Stored User Manual User Programming…

  • Page 124
    User Programming Programming Display PT Dial 004. <PT Display> 004 EXT NAME SET Repeat these steps name Enter a name. To delete the current entry, press CLEAR. To change the current entry, press CLEAR and enter the new name. <To end:> Press END.
  • Page 125
    User Programming User Manual References • 4.5.8 KX-T7235 Display Features — Call Directory • 4.5.11 KX-T7431 / KX-T7433 / KX-T7436 Display Features — Call Directory User Manual…
  • Page 126: 005] Flexible Co Button Assignment

    User Programming 3.2.5 [005] Flexible CO Button Assignment Description Used to determine the use of the flexible CO buttons on Proprietary Telephones in the system. Selection • Extension number: 3 or 4 digits • Button Code (plus parameter, if required): Button Code 0 (Single-CO) 1 (DSS)

  • Page 127
    CO/INTERCOM (ringer frequency) 1 through 8 (ring tone type number) Phantom (ringing on/off) † Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone [DPT] integration; e.g., KX-TVS100. Default For all PTs — CO button 1 = Loop-CO;…
  • Page 128
    User Programming Programming Display PT Dial 005. <PT Display> 005 FLEXIBLE CO To program another CO button of the same extension port: Repeat these steps Press CO which is changed to another button. The display shows the contents pre-assigned to the button. <PT Display Example>…
  • Page 129
    Canceling Display PT Dial 005. <PT Display> 005 FLEXIBLE CO Press CO which is changed to another button. The display shows the contents pre-assigned to the button. <PT Display Example> CO-10101 Conditions • The number of the CO buttons available for each PT varies depending on the telephone type <Section 1.16 Button Features, «Buttons on Proprietary Telephones and DSS Consoles»…
  • Page 130
    User Programming Features Guide References 1.16 Button Features • Button, Flexible • Buttons on Proprietary Telephones and DSS Consoles User Manual…
  • Page 131: 006] Caller Id Dial Set

    3.2.6 [006] Caller ID Dial Set Description Sets the identification code of the calling party (Caller ID Code) to utilize Caller ID Service provided by a specific central office (CO). If an ID Code transmitted from CO is found in the Caller ID Code Table, the caller’s ID Code or a name given to the code in program [007] «Caller ID Name Set»…

  • Page 132
    User Programming Programming Display PT Dial 006. <PT Display> 006 CALLER ID # Repeat these steps Caller ID Number Enter a Caller ID Number. To delete the current entry, press CLEAR. To change the current entry, press CLEAR and enter the new number. <To end:>…
  • Page 133
    User Programming Features Guide References 1.5 Attended Features • Caller ID Service User Manual…
  • Page 134: 007] Caller Id Name Set

    User Programming 3.2.7 [007] Caller ID Name Set Description With Caller ID Service, the calling party is displayed either by its ID Code or by its name. If the name display is required, use this program to give a name to a Caller ID Code stored in program [006] «Caller ID Dial Set.»…

  • Page 135
    Programming Display PT Dial 007. <PT Display> 007 CALLER NAME Repeat these steps Caller ID Name Enter a Caller ID Name. To delete the current entry, press CLEAR. To change the current entry, press CLEAR and enter the new number. <To end:>…
  • Page 136
    User Programming Features Guide References 1.5 Attended Features • Caller ID Service User Manual…
  • Page 137: 008] Absent Messages Set

    3.2.8 [008] Absent Messages Set Description Used to program the absent messages. An absent message, if set by the extension user, is displayed on the display of calling extension’s PT to show the reason for the user’s absence. Selection • Message number: 1 through 9 •…

  • Page 138
    User Programming Programming Display PT Dial 008. <PT Display> 008 ABSENT MSG. Repeat these steps message Enter the message. To delete the current entry, press CLEAR. To change the current entry, press CLEAR and enter the new message. <To end:> Press END.
  • Page 139
    Conditions • There is a maximum of nine messages. Messages 1 through 6 are programmed at the factory but can be changed. Each message has a maximum of 16 characters. • For entering characters, please refer to Section «2.2.17 Station Speed Dialing Number/ Name Assignment [KX-T7235/KX-T7431/KX-T7433/KX-T7436 only].»…
  • Page 140: 009] Quick Dial Number Set

    User Programming 3.2.9 [009] Quick Dial Number Set Description Stores up to eight quick dial numbers. Selection • Location number: 1 through 8 • Desired number: 24 digits (max.) Default All location numbers — Not Stored User Manual…

  • Page 141
    Programming Display PT Dial 009. <PT Display> 009 QUICK DIAL Repeat these steps desired no. Enter a desired number. To delete the current entry, press CLEAR. To change the current entry, press CLEAR and enter the new number. <To end:> Press END.
  • Page 142
    User Programming Features Guide References 1.7 Dialing Features • Quick Dialing User Manual…
  • Page 143: 010] Disa / Tie User Code Set

    3.2.10 [010] DISA / TIE User Code Set Description Used to program a list of up to 32 DISA/TIE User Codes. Each code is appended with a COS level. Selection • Location number: 01 through 32 • DISA / TIE User Code: 4 through 10 digits consisting of 0 through 9 •…

  • Page 144
    <To end:> Press END. Conditions • The KX-TD500 System can store up to 32 programmable DISA user codes with a COS level for each. Each code should be unique. User Manual References • 4.3.26 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) NEXT Press NEXT.
  • Page 145
    Features Guide References 1.5 Attended Features • Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 3.1 TIE Line Features • TIE Line Service Programming Guide References • 5.9 DISA/TIE User Code User Manual User Programming…
  • Page 146
    User Programming User Manual…
  • Page 147: Station Features And Operation (Pt/Slt)

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Section 4 Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) User Manual…

  • Page 148: Before Operating

    Time=default: 1 s) after lifting the handset. This time can be changed by System Programming. If you use a Panasonic Proprietary Telephone which has the special function button or the display or both, you will follow the operation with the button or display for easy access.

  • Page 149
    The functions of Terminal Equipment are similar to Single Line Telephone functions except for the following features: • Absent Message • Alternate Calling — Ring / Voice • Automatic Callback Busy • Call Forwarding • Call Hold • Call Hold Retrieve •…
  • Page 150
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Notes • If your telephone is not noted in the operating step box (ex. only «PT» is noted), this means your telephone does not have the ability to execute that feature. • If your telephone has the ability to perform several operations for one feature, you can select the method according to your needs.
  • Page 151: Basic Operations

    4.2 Basic Operations 4.2.1 Making Calls Inter Office Calling You can make a call to another extension. PT and SLT Lift the handset or press Dial extension number SP-PHONE/MONITOR. (3 or 4 digits). Outward Dialing You can make a call to an outside party using one of the following three Trunk Access ways. Trunk Access, Idle Trunk Access, Trunk Group Trunk Access, Individual Trunk (PT only)

  • Page 152
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Making Outside Calls by «Trunk Access, Trunk Group» Allows you to access an idle trunk line within a designated trunk group. PT and SLT (CO) trunk group no. Lift the handset For PT: Press CO assigned or press as Group-CO.
  • Page 153
    Programming Guide References • 2.2 Tenant – Automatic Route Selection • 2.3 Numbering Plan – Local CO Line Access / ARS – Trunk Group Access • 2.4 Class of Service (COS) – Trunk Group Setting • 2.6 Local Hunt Sequence •…
  • Page 154: Receiving Calls

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.2.2 Receiving Calls PT and SLT Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE. Conditions • There are three types of Line Preference for incoming calls (— No Line/Prime Line/ Ringing Line). Each preference can be selected by Station or System Programming. •…

  • Page 155
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) User Manual References • 2.2.11 Preferred Line Assignment — Incoming • 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment • 3.2.5 [005] Flexible CO Button Assignment • 4.3.5 Answering, Direct Trunk • 4.3.40 Hands-free Answerback • 4.3.41 Hands-free Operation User Manual…
  • Page 156: Station Features And Operation

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3 Station Features and Operation 4.3.1 Absent Message Capability You can select one of nine pre-programmed Absent Messages (1-9) for your extension. The display PT users calling your extension see the message you select. Absent messages are used to inform the party calling your extension of the reason for your absence.

  • Page 157
    Note • % indicates the digit where you enter the desired parameter. Canceling the absent message PT and SLT Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. <PT Display Example> Message Cancel Conditions • All nine messages can be programmed either by User or System Programming. •…
  • Page 158
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) • Absent Message Capability User Manual References • 3.2.8 [008] Absent Messages Set • 4.5.9 KX-T7235 Display Features — System Feature Access Menu • 4.5.12 KX-T7431 / KX-T7433 / KX-T7436 Display Features — System Feature Access Menu User Manual…
  • Page 159: Account Code Entry

    4.3.2 Account Code Entry An Account Code (max. 10 digits) is used to identify incoming and outgoing CO calls for accounting and billing purposes. The account code is appended to the «Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)» call record. For incoming CO calls, account code entry is optional. For outgoing CO calls, you may be required to enter an account code.

  • Page 160
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Entering account codes during or after a conversation During a conversation or within 15 seconds after the other party hangs up; 7230 / 7235 / 7433 / 7436 ACCNT account code Press ACCNT (S3). Enter account code (10 digits max., 0…9).
  • Page 161
    • An account code can be up to 10 numeric digits (0 through 9). FLASH, PAUSE, etc., are not allowed. After entering an account code, the delimiter «#» must be entered. • Memory Dialing An account code can be stored into Memory Dialing («One-Touch Dialing,» «System / Station Speed Dialing»).
  • Page 162
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Features Guide References 1.3 System Features • Account Code Entry • Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 1.6 Originating Features • Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry User Manual References • 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment •…
  • Page 163: Alternate Calling — Ring / Voice

    4.3.3 Alternate Calling — Ring / Voice You can voice-announce your intercom call or have the called extension ring. When you make an intercom call by voice-announcement, the other party hears your voice over the built-in speaker of PT and can speak in the hands-free mode. Alternating (to Voice-Calling mode) 7230 / 7235 / 7433 / 7436 If the extension you are calling is in Ring-Calling mode,…

  • Page 164
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Alternating (to Ring-Calling mode) 7230 / 7235 / 7433 / 7436 If the extension you are calling is in Voice-Calling mode, you hear a confirmation tone. Tone Press Tone (S2). PT and SLT If the extension you are calling is in Voice-Calling mode, you hear a confirmation tone. Dial Conditions •…
  • Page 165
    Programming Guide References System Programming is not required. Features Guide References 1.6 Originating Features • Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice • Inter Office Calling 1.9 Answering Features • Hands-free Answerback User Manual References • 2.2.7 Intercom Alert Assignment • 4.3.40 Hands-free Answerback • 4.3.42 Inter Office Calling User Manual Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT)
  • Page 166: Answer And Release Buttons Operation

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.4 ANSWER and RELEASE buttons Operation ANSWER and RELEASE buttons are useful when using the headset or in hands-free mode. With the ANSWER button, you can answer all incoming calls to the paired telephone. With the RELEASE button, you can disconnect the line during or after a conversation or complete a Call Transfer.

  • Page 167
    Conditions • ANSWER and RELEASE Buttons Assignment ANSWER and RELEASE buttons are provided as a fixed button on the KX-T7441 (DSS Console). For other PTs and DSS Consoles, these buttons can be assigned to a flexible (CO, DSS, PF) button by Station, User or System Programming. •…
  • Page 168: Answering, Direct Trunk

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.5 Answering, Direct Trunk You can answer a CO call by pressing a flashing CO button directly. You do not have to lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button. To answer an incoming CO call (CO) Press the CO that is flashing green or red rapidly.

  • Page 169
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) User Manual References • 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment • 3.2.5 [005] Flexible CO Button Assignment • 4.3.41 Hands-free Operation User Manual…
  • Page 170: Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-On)

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.6 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-On) When the selected CO line or extension you have dialed is busy, dial the camp-on code and hang up. Your telephone will ring when the selected CO line or the called party becomes idle. Setting 7230 / 7235 / 7433 / 7436 If you hear a busy tone after making a call (intercom or outside);…

  • Page 171
    Answering an intercom recall PT and SLT If you hear the telephone ringing; Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. <PT Display Example> xxxx: Free You hear a ringback tone and the other extension begins to ring automatically. Answering a CO line recall PT and SLT If you hear the telephone ringing;…
  • Page 172
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Canceling PT and SLT Dial 46. Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. Conditions • If you do not answer the recall ringing within 10 seconds (four callback ring signals), this feature is canceled automatically. • If the called party becomes busy again after the callback ringing starts, the ringing stops but this feature will be executed again when the extension becomes free.
  • Page 173: Background Music (Bgm)

    4.3.7 Background Music (BGM) You can hear background music through the built-in speaker of your PT. An external music source, such as a radio, must be connected. The music stops whenever a call comes in or when you go off-hook. Setting / Canceling 7230 / 7235 / 7433 / 7436 When the handset is on the cradle and the SP-PHONE button is off;…

  • Page 174
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) • Distinctive Dial Tone When this feature is assigned to the extension, the extension user may hear a distinctive dial tone (dial tone 2) after going off-hook depending on System Programming <Section 2.8 System Option, «15. Special dial tone after setting feature» in the Programming Guide>. Installation Manual References •…
  • Page 175: Busy Station Signaling (Bss)

    4.3.8 Busy Station Signaling (BSS) You can prompt a busy extension (ringing or during a call) to answer your call. The other extension hears three beeps and knows that you are waiting. 7230 / 7235 / 7433/ 7436 If you hear a busy tone after making an intercom call; Press BSS (S1).

  • Page 176
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) • BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA If an extension user dials «1» while hearing a busy tone, BSS or OHCA or Whisper OHCA may be activated at the called extension. This is determined by the following conditions. Calling extension COS-OHCA assignment…
  • Page 177: Call Forwarding

    4.3.9 Call Forwarding Automatically transfers incoming calls to the pre-assigned extension or to an external party. The following types are available: Type Call Forwarding — All Calls Call Forwarding — Busy Call Forwarding — No Answer Call Forwarding — Busy/No Answer Call Forwarding —…

  • Page 178
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Setting 7436/7235 FWD/DND Lift the handset or Press FWD/DND. press SP-PHONE. FWD/DND Cancel Do Not Disturb FWD-All Calls ( ext) extension no. extension no. ( ext) FWD-Busy ( ext) FWD-No Answer MENU PREV NEXT Enter extension NEXT number.
  • Page 179
    Setting PT and SLT FWD/DND For PT For SLT, PT Lift the handset For PT: Press FWD/DND. or press For SLT, PT: Dial 710. SP-PHONE/ MONITOR. You may press the flexible button assigned as the FWD/DND button instead. User Manual Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) For «Follow Me,»…
  • Page 180
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Canceling 7436/7235 FWD/DND Lift the Press FWD/DND. handset or press From destination SP-PHONE. PT and SLT FWD/DND Lift the handset For PT: Press FWD/DND. or press For SLT, PT: Dial 710. SP-PHONE/MONITOR. You may press the flexible button assigned as the FWD/DND button instead.
  • Page 181
    Conditions [General] • Types of calls which are forwarded by these features are: Outside calls Direct In Line (DIL) 1:1; Direct Inward Dialing (DID); Direct Inward Dialing (DID) (ISDN); Direct Inward System Access (DISA); Intercept Routing; Multiple Directory Number (MDN) TIE;…
  • Page 182
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) • Confirmation tone Confirmation tone 2 (two beeps) is sent when the previously programmed data is same as the new data. If it is not, confirmation tone 1 (one beep) is sent. Please refer to Section «6.1.3 Tone List»…
  • Page 183
    [To CO / TIE Line] • Class of Service Class of Service programming determines the extension that can perform this feature <Section 2.4 Class of Service (COS), «Call FWD to CO / TIE» in the Programming Guide>. • Treatment of the forwarded call Toll Restriction, Automatic Route Selection (ARS) and Account Code Entry requirements of the extension in Call Forwarding mode still apply to the call forwarded by this feature.
  • Page 184
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) • Co-to-CO Line Call If a call between two outside parties is established by this feature, the call duration is determined by System Programming <Section 2.5 System Timer, «CO-to-CO Line Call Duration Time» in the Programming Guide>. An alarm tone is sent to both outside parties 15 seconds before the time-out.
  • Page 185
    1.8 Ringing Features • Do Not Disturb (DND) 1.11 Transferring Features • Call Forwarding 3.1 TIE Line Features • TIE Line and Outside (CO) Line Connection User Manual References • 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment • 3.2.5 [005] Flexible CO Button Assignment •…
  • Page 186: Call Forwarding — All Calls To An Incoming Group

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.10 Call Forwarding — All Calls to an Incoming Group Automatically transfers all calls to an Incoming Group to the pre-assigned Incoming Group or Extension Group. Setting PT and SLT Lift the handset or press Dial 7141.

  • Page 187
    Conditions • Types of calls which are forwarded by this feature are: Outside calls Direct In Lines (DIL); Direct Inward Dialing (DID); Direct Inward Dialing (DID) (ISDN); Direct Inward System Access (DISA); Intercept Routing; Multiple Directory Number (MDN); TIE; Transfer Intercom calls Extension;…
  • Page 188
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) • While setting, you can temporarily cancel this feature by pressing the Group FWD button. Pressing the Group FWD button alternates between setting and canceling the mode. The lighting patterns of the Group FWD button are as follows: Off: This feature is not set.
  • Page 189: Call Hold

    4.3.11 Call Hold You can place a call (intercom or outside) on hold (Call Hold). While the call is on hold, you can make or receive other calls. The held call can be retrieved not only from your extension but from any other extension in the same tenant (Call Hold Retrieve).

  • Page 190
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Retrieving an outside call held at another extension PT and SLT At another extension; Lift the handset or press Dial 53. SP-PHONE/MONITOR. At another extension; (CO) Press CO whose indicator is flashing red slowly. The CO indicator light turns steady green.
  • Page 191
    Placing a call on exclusive hold During a conversation; HOLD Press HOLD. Press HOLD again. Confirmation tone (optional) The CO or INTERCOM or DN indicator light flashes green slowly. The current call is placed on hold. Retrieving a call on exclusive hold (CO) INTERCOM (DN)
  • Page 192
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) • It is possible to disable the Hold Recall tone by System Programming <Section 2.5 System Timer, «Hold Recall Time» in the Programming Guide>. • Automatic Disconnection If an inside / outside call put on hold is not retrieved within 30 minutes, it is disconnected automatically.
  • Page 193
    – Confirmation tone for Call Pickup, Paging, Paging – Answer, TAFAS – Answer, Hold Retrieve and Call Park Retrieve Features Guide References 1.3 System Features • Music on Hold 1.10 Holding Features • Call Hold • Call Park 1.13 Audible Tone Features •…
  • Page 194: Call Park

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.12 Call Park Allows you to place a held call into a system parking area. You can be released from the parked call to perform other operations. The parked call can be retrieved from any extension. Parking a call PT and SLT During a conversation;…

  • Page 195
    Retrieving a parked call PT and SLT Dial 52. Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. Conditions • Up to 800 calls can be parked at the same time in the system. • Tenant Service If «Tenant Service» is employed, each tenant can use up to 100 parking areas (00-99) independently.
  • Page 196
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Features Guide References 1.10 Holding Features • Call Park 1.12 Conversation Features • Conference, 5-Party User Manual References • 4.3.22 Conference, 5-Party • 4.5.9 KX-T7235 Display Features — System Feature Access Menu • 4.5.12 KX-T7431 / KX-T7433 / KX-T7436 Display Features — System Feature Access Menu User Manual…
  • Page 197: Call Pickup

    4.3.13 Call Pickup Allows you to answer a call (intercom, outside, doorphone) ringing at any other extension. The following types are available. Feature Type Directed Group CO Line Preventing other extensions from picking up calls ringing at your extension is also possible (Call Pickup Deny).

  • Page 198
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Call Pickup, Group PT and SLT Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. Conditions [General] • Confirmation Tone A confirmation tone is sent to the extension user who picked up the call. Eliminating the tone is programmable <Section 2.8 System Option, «9. Confirmation tone for Call Pickup, Paging, Paging-Answer, TAFAS-Answer, Hold Retrieve and Call Park Retrieve «…
  • Page 199
    [CO Line] • Tenant Service If «Tenant Service» is utilized, this feature is only available for an outside call ringing on an extension within the same tenant. • If more than one CO call is ringing on an extension, Call Pickup starts with the first arrived CO call.
  • Page 200: Call Pickup Deny

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.14 Call Pickup Deny Allows you to prevent another extension from picking up your calls with the «Call Pickup» feature. Setting / Canceling PT and SLT Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. <PT Display Example> When setting: C.Pickup Deny Hang up or press…

  • Page 201
    Programming Guide References • 2.3 Numbering Plan – Dial Call Pickup Deny Set / Cancel • 2.8 System Option – Special dial tone after setting feature • 4.3 Extension Line – Call Pickup Deny Features Guide References 1.9 Answering Features •…
  • Page 202: Call Splitting

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.15 Call Splitting Allows you to have two callers on a line and alternate between them. If a call comes in while you are already on the line, you can place the current call (1st call) on hold and have a conversation with the other party (2nd call).

  • Page 203
    When you are engaged in the 2nd call (inside/outside), while placing the 1st call (inside/ outside) on (exclusive) hold HOLD (CO) INTERCOM Press HOLD. Press CO or INTERCOM or DN. Conditions • This feature does not work during a doorphone call or paging. Programming Guide References System Programming is not required.
  • Page 204: Call Transfer

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.16 Call Transfer You can transfer a call (intercom, CO, TIE) to another extension or external party. The following types are available. Feature Type Screened to Extension to CO/TIE Line Unscreened to Extension to CO/TIE Line Transferring a call to an extension (Screened) PT and SLT During a conversation;…

  • Page 205
    Transferring a call to an extension (Unscreened) PT and SLT During a conversation; TRANSFER For PT For SLT For PT: Press TRANSFER. For SLT: Flash the switchhook. The other party is placed on hold. Ringing starts at the destination extension. Transferring a call to the Remote Resource (Unscreened) PT and SLT During a conversation;…
  • Page 206
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) One-Touch Transfer During a conversation with an external party; (DSS) Press DSS (flexible button). The other party is placed on hold and the destination extension is called immediately. Transferring a call to an external party via a CO or TIE line (Screened) PT and SLT During a conversation;…
  • Page 207
    Transferring a call to an external party via a CO or TIE line (Unscreened) PT and SLT During a conversation; TRANSFER For PT For SLT For PT: Press TRANSFER. Confirmation For SLT: Flash the switchhook. tone and dial tone The current call is placed on hold. Conditions [General] •…
  • Page 208
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 2.4 Class of Service (COS), «Automatic Hold» in the Programming Guide>. However, it cannot be performed when there is another call on Consultation Hold. • DSS Button DSS buttons are provided on a DSS Console by default. A flexible CO/DSS button can be assigned as a DSS button by Station, User or System Programming.
  • Page 209
    [Unscreened – To Extension] • Transfer Recall Destination If the call (intercom, CO, TIE) transferred to the destination extension is not answered within a specified period of time <Section 2.5 System Timer, «Transfer Recall Time» in the Programming Guide>, it may ring an Operator extension instead of the extension who originally transferred it.
  • Page 210
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) – DSS Key Features Guide References 1.3 System Features • Limited Call Duration • Music on Hold • Released Link Operation 1.10 Holding Features • Automatic Hold—For Hold 1.11 Transferring Features • Call Transfer • One-Touch Transfer 1.12 Conversation Features •…
  • Page 211: Call Waiting

    4.3.17 Call Waiting During a call, a Call Waiting tone informs you that there is another call waiting for you. You can answer the second call by disconnecting or placing the current call on hold. PT users can choose one of three Call Waiting modes. Setting 1.

  • Page 212
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Canceling PT and SLT Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. <PT Display Example> C.Waiting Off To talk to the new party by terminating the current call While hearing a Call Waiting tone; (CO) INTERCOM (DN) Press the flashing CO or INTERCOM or DN.
  • Page 213
    To talk to the new party by holding the current call While hearing the Call Waiting tone and the CO or INTERCOM or DN indicator is flashing rapidly; HOLD (CO) INTERCOM Press the flashing Press HOLD. CO or INTERCOM or DN. The current call is placed on hold.
  • Page 214
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Conditions • BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA If an extension user dials «1» while hearing a busy tone, BSS or OHCA or Whisper OHCA may be activated at the called extension. This is determined by the following conditions. Calling extension COS-OHCA assignment…
  • Page 215
    – Call Waiting Set / Cancel • 2.4 Class of Service (COS) – Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA) • 2.8 System Option – Special dial tone after setting feature – Answering Call Waiting call by SLT hooking • 4.3 Extension Line –…
  • Page 216: Call Waiting From Central Office

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.18 Call Waiting from Central Office During a conversation with an outside party, a call waiting tone offered by the local Central Office signals your extension that there is another incoming CO call that is waiting. You can answer the second call by placing the first call on hold.

  • Page 217
    Using the feature number PT and SLT While hearing a Call Waiting tone through the handset; TRANSFER Press TRANSFER or flash the switchhook. • The first party is placed on hold. Conditions • This is an optional telephone company service. For more information, consult the local telephone company.
  • Page 218
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Features Guide References 1.9 Answering Features • Call Waiting from Central Office 1.12 Conversation Features • External Feature Access • Flash User Manual References • 4.3.35 External Feature Access User Manual…
  • Page 219: Calling Line Identification Presentation (Clip)

    4.3.19 Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP) When you make an outside call through an ISDN line, you can let the other party see your pre- assigned identification number. You can select to show an identification number assigned for an ISDN line or your extension. This is one of the ISDN supplementary service. To select a CLIP number for an outside line PT and SLT Lift the handset or press…

  • Page 220
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) CLIP number assigned to the extension line The number stored in «[CLIP Number] Public/Private» <Section 4.3 Extension Line in the Programming Guide>. • CLIP Number for ISDN BRI Line When you make an outside call using an ISDN BRI line, the number stored in «DN» <Section 1.2.10 Card Properties (BRI) –…
  • Page 221: Calling Line Identification Restriction (Clir) / Calling Name Identification Restriction (Cnir)

    4.3.20 Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR) / Calling Name Identification Restriction (CNIR) When making an outside call through an ISDN line, you can prevent the other party from seeing you identification number/name. You can change the setting at any time for a particular call.

  • Page 222
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) To change the setting at any time for a particular call PT and SLT Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. For PT For SLT, PT trunk group no. For SLT, PT For PT: Press CO. For SLT, PT: Dial 9.
  • Page 223: Conference, 3-Party

    4.3.21 Conference, 3-Party During a two-party conversation, you can add a third party to make a three-party conference. The members of a conference on a line may be three extensions, one extension and two CO lines, or two extensions and one CO line. To establish a 3-party conference During a two-party conversation;…

  • Page 224
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) To leave a 3-party conference PT and SLT Hang up or press SP-PHONE. The other two parties may continue their conversation. If both other two parties are on outside lines, they will be disconnected. To terminate one party and talk to the other (CO) INTERCOM (DN)
  • Page 225
    To talk to the original party while holding the third party Flash the switchhook. Confirmation tone (optional) To put both parties on hold HOLD Press HOLD. For an ICM type PT, this operation is available only when at least one party is on a CO line. For a DN type PT, this operation is available only when the extension user established the conference call using two different line access buttons.
  • Page 226
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) leaving the other two parties connected unless they both are on CO lines. If they both are on CO lines, they will be disconnected. • You can return to the original party before the third party answers by pressing the TRANSFER button.
  • Page 227
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) User Manual References • 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment • 3.2.5 [005] Flexible CO Button Assignment • 4.3.23 Conference, Unattended • 4.3.33 Executive Busy Override • 4.3.63 Privacy Release User Manual…
  • Page 228: Conference, 5-Party

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.22 Conference, 5-Party A PT user can originate a 5-party conference call which includes outside or inside parties or both in any combination. To establish a 5-party conference Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. Repeat these steps extension / phone no.

  • Page 229
    To terminate the 5-party conference (conference originator only) During the 5-party conference call (CO) Press an idle CO or DN Hang up or press button. SP-PHONE/MONITOR. Conditions • Up to two 5-party conference calls can be held at a time in the system, even if TSW Conference Expansion card is installed on the TSW card.
  • Page 230
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Features Guide References 1.12 Conversation Features • Conference, 5-Party User Manual References • 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment • 3.2.5 [005] Flexible CO Button Assignment User Manual…
  • Page 231: Conference, Unattended

    4.3.23 Conference, Unattended When you are in a conference with two outside parties, you can leave the three-party conference allowing the other two parties to continue their conversation. To establish an Unattended Conference During a conversation with two outside parties; CONF Press CONF to leave the conference.

  • Page 232
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Conditions • Class of Service An Unattended Conference cannot be established unless the extension is allowed to transfer a call to an outside party by COS programming. • Limited Call Duration The duration of an unattended conference is restricted by a system timer. Hold Recall tone Hold Recall tone is sent to the extension user who left the conference 50 seconds before the time-out.
  • Page 233
    • Conference, Unattended 1.13 Audible Tone Features • Hold Recall User Manual References • 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment • 3.2.5 [005] Flexible CO Button Assignment • 4.3.21 Conference, 3-Party User Manual Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT)
  • Page 234: Cti (Computer Telephony Integration) Code Entry

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.24 CTI (Computer Telephony Integration) Code Entry A CTI Code (max. 16 digits) can be sent from the KX-TD500 to the CTI application (such as Panasonic Call Center Management Software, CMS). The code is interpreted by the application for suitable action.

  • Page 235: Data Line Security

    4.3.25 Data Line Security Your extension is protected against interruptions from the «Call Waiting,» «Hold Recall,» and «Executive Busy Override» features. Data communication devices, such as computers and facsimiles, operate uninterrupted. Setting / Canceling PT and SLT Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR.

  • Page 236
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) – Special dial tone after setting feature • 4.3 Extension Line – Data Line Mode Features Guide References 1.6 Originating Features • Executive Busy Override 1.9 Answering Features • Call Waiting 1.12 Conversation Features • Data Line Security •…
  • Page 237: Direct Inward System Access (Disa)

    4.3.26 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Allows an outside caller to access specific system features as if the caller is an extension in the system. A DISA outgoing message is used to give outside callers assistance, such as listing the extension numbers in the system.

  • Page 238
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Calling an outside party From Outside Telephone In Non Security Mode: DISA phone no. Dial the DISA Ringback tone phone number. phone no. Dial the phone number of the outside party. In Trunk Security Mode: DISA phone no.
  • Page 239
    Extending the call duration while calling a CO line From Outside Telephone When you make a call to any CO line using the DISA feature, the line is disconnected after a pre-programmed time (default: 10 min) any key except » » Dial any key except «…
  • Page 240
    Delayed Answer Time» expires. The caller can dial while hearing the OGM message. • DISA User Code The KX-TD500 System can store up to 32 programmable DISA user codes with a COS level for each. Each code should be unique.
  • Page 241
    Programming <Section 2.5 System Timer, «DISA Prolong Time» in the Programming Guide>. If this parameter is set to zero, the caller cannot prolong the call duration. The caller can repeat the prolonging operation 10 times or without limit depending on the System Programming <Section 2.8 System Option, «13.
  • Page 242
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Programming Guide References • 1.7 DISA Port Assignment • 2.3 Numbering Plan – OGM Playback / Record • 2.4 Class of Service (COS) – TRS Level – Day/Night • 2.5 System Timer – CO-to-CO Line Call Duration Time –…
  • Page 243
    Features Guide References 1.3 System Features • Outgoing Message (OGM) 1.5 Attended Features • Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 1.11 Transferring Features • Intercept Routing User Manual References • 3.2.10 [010] DISA / TIE User Code Set • 4.4.6 Outgoing Message (OGM) Record/Playback User Manual Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT)
  • Page 244: Do Not Disturb (Dnd)

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.27 Do Not Disturb (DND) Allows you to prevent other parties from disturbing you. Your extension will not receive intercom and outside calls. Setting 7235 / 7436 FWD/DND Lift the handset or Press FWD/DND. press SP-PHONE. Canceling 7235 / 7436 FWD/DND…

  • Page 245
    Setting / Canceling PT and SLT FWD/DND Lift the handset For PT: Press FWD/DND. or press For SLT, PT: Dial 710. SP-PHONE/MONITOR. Hang up or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. Conditions • DND also works for an incoming call from a doorphone. • DND does not work for the following calls: —…
  • Page 246
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) • FWD/DND button Regarding the PT (7050/7055/7250) without the FWD/DND button, it can be assigned to a flexible (CO, DSS, PF) button by Station, User or System Programming. • A PT user in DND mode can answer a call by pressing a flashing button which shows the arrival of the call.
  • Page 247
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) • 3.2.5 [005] Flexible CO Button Assignment • 4.3.28 Do Not Disturb (DND) Override • 4.4.7 Remote DND (Do Not Disturb) Control User Manual…
  • Page 248: Do Not Disturb (Dnd) Override

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.28 Do Not Disturb (DND) Override You can override the «Do Not Disturb (DND)» feature set on the other extension, if permitted by System Programming beforehand. 7230 / 7235 / 7433 / 7436 If you make an intercom call and hear the Do Not Disturb (DND) tone; Over Press Over (S2).

  • Page 249
    — Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA) — Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA), Whisper Programming Guide References • 2.4 Class of Service (COS) – DND Override Features Guide References 1.6 Originating Features • Do Not Disturb (DND) Override 1.8 Ringing Features • Do Not Disturb (DND) User Manual References •…
  • Page 250: Doorphone Call

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.29 Doorphone Call Allows you to have a conversation with a visitor at your doorphone. You can also unlock the door from your telephone. Calling an extension from a doorphone — operation for a visitor Doorphone Press the Doorphone button for one second.

  • Page 251
    Calling a doorphone PT and SLT Lift the handset or press Dial 31. SP-PHONE/MONITOR. To unlock the door from an assigned extension PT and SLT Lift the handset or press Dial 55. SP-PHONE/MONITOR. User Manual doorphone no. Enter a doorphone number (1 through 8).
  • Page 252
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) To unlock the door while talking to the visitor at the doorphone from any extension 7230/7235/7433/7436 OPEN Press OPEN (S3). Confirmation tone The door is left unlocked for the pre-programmed amount of time (default: 5 s). <PT Display Example>…
  • Page 253
    • What if a doorphone call is not answered? If not answered within 30 seconds, the call stops ringing and is canceled. • Unlocking the door opener During a doorphone call, any extension user can unlock the door opener (user-supplied) from their extensions by dialing «5»…
  • Page 254
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) User Manual References • 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment • 3.2.5 [005] Flexible CO Button Assignment • 4.5.9 KX-T7235 Display Features — System Feature Access Menu • 4.5.12 KX-T7431 / KX-T7433 / KX-T7436 Display Features — System Feature Access Menu User Manual…
  • Page 255: Electronic Station Lockout

    4.3.30 Electronic Station Lockout Allows you to lock your extension so that other users cannot make outgoing CO calls from your extension. Locking PT and SLT Dial 762. Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. Unlocking PT and SLT Dial 762. Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR.

  • Page 256
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) • Distinctive Dial Tone When this feature is assigned to the extension, the extension user may hear a distinctive dial tone (dial tone 2) after going off-hook depending on System Programming <Section 2.8 System Option, «15. Special dial tone after setting feature» in the Programming Guide>. •…
  • Page 257: Emergency Call

    — in Electronic Station Lockout / Remote Station Lock • If your KX-TD500 System is connected to a host PBX as a behind PBX, you must dial the host PBX line access code after dialing the line access code and it must be included as the first digit of the emergency number.

  • Page 258: End-To-End Dtmf Signaling (Tone Through)

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.32 End-to-End DTMF Signaling (Tone Through) DTMF signaling is required for access to special network services offered by some telephone companies. This system allows you to signal the other end using DTMF tones during an established call.

  • Page 259
    Canceling End-to-End DTMF Signaling mode During a conversation; (Tone Through) Press Tone Through (flexible button). Tone Through mode is canceled. Conditions • If the dial type of the line is assigned to DTMF, Tone Through mode is established automatically after the dialing sequence is finished and the call is established. •…
  • Page 260
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) User Manual References • 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment • 3.2.5 [005] Flexible CO Button Assignment User Manual…
  • Page 261: Executive Busy Override

    4.3.33 Executive Busy Override You can interrupt an existing call. This establishes a 3-party conference call. This feature can be categorized as follows: Executive Busy Override – Barge-In (PT only) Allows the PT user to interrupt an existing outside call (either «between two outside parties» or «between an outside party and an inside party») by pressing the red lit S-CO or DN button.

  • Page 262
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) To terminate one party and talk to the other (CO) INTERCOM Press CO or INTERCOM of the party to remain connected. To leave the conference Hang up or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR . Conditions [General] • Class of Service Class of Service programming determines the extension that can perform this feature.
  • Page 263
    [Barge-in] • This feature is available between two extensions who share the same S-CO button. • This feature is available when one extension has an SDN button associated with the PDN button of the other extensions. • The pre-assigned extension users can interrupt an existing outside call even if access to that line is not allowed by System Programming.
  • Page 264: Executive Busy Override Deny

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.34 Executive Busy Override Deny Allows you to prevent other extension users from interrupting your telephone conversation. PT and SLT Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR . Hang up or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR . Conditions • Class of Service «Class of Service»…

  • Page 265
    1.9 Answering Features • Executive Busy Override Deny User Manual References • 4.3.33 Executive Busy Override • 4.5.9 KX-T7235 Display Features — System Feature Access Menu • 4.5.12 KX-T7431 / KX-T7433 / KX-T7436 Display Features — System Feature Access Menu User Manual Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT)
  • Page 266: External Feature Access

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.35 External Feature Access Allows you to access special features (e.g., Call Waiting) offered by a host PBX, Centrex or Central Office. This feature is effective only during an outside call. 7230 / 7235 / 7433 / 7436 During a conversation with an outside party;…

  • Page 267
    Conditions • Flash Time The flash time must be assigned as required by the Centrex, host PBX or CO line. • FLASH Button Operation Pressing the FLASH button on a PT results in either sending Flash signal or disconnecting the current call. This is determined by System Programming <Section 2.8 System Option, «3.
  • Page 268: External Modem Control

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.36 External Modem Control Allows you to control the external modem, connected to the RS-232C port 1 by sending a pre- assigned AT Command (for enabling Automatic Answer, etc.). Activating an AT Command to the RS-232C port 1 PT and SLT Lift the handset or press Dial 791.

  • Page 269
    – [Serial Interface Port] PROG (Port 1) Features Guide References 1.2 System Administration • System Programming and Diagnosis with Personal Computer 1.3 System Features • External Modem Control User Manual References • 4.5.9 KX-T7235 Display Features — System Feature Access Menu •…
  • Page 270: Flash

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.37 Flash You can disconnect the current call and make another call without hanging up. While hearing any tone, dialing, or talking; FLASH Press FLASH. Dial tone Conditions • Flash or External Feature Access Pressing the FLASH button on a PT results in either sending Flash signal (External Feature Access) or disconnecting the current call (Flash).

  • Page 271: Full One-Touch Dialing

    4.3.38 Full One-Touch Dialing The hands-free speakerphone is automatically activated. You can enter a phone number or access a system feature with the touch of a button. REDIAL Press a flexible button assigned as One-Touch Dialing, Phantom, DSS or SAVE or press REDIAL. •…

  • Page 272
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 1.17 Display Features • Call Directory User Manual References • 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment • 2.2.4 Full One-Touch Dialing Assignment • 3.2.5 [005] Flexible CO Button Assignment • 4.3.52 One-Touch Dialing • 4.3.66 Redial User Manual…
  • Page 273: Handset Microphone Mute

    4.3.39 Handset Microphone Mute While on a handset call, you can turn off your PT’s handset microphone so that you can consult privately with others in the room. When you activate Handset Microphone Mute, you can still listen to the other party’s voice but he cannot hear your voice. Setting While on a handset call;…

  • Page 274
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Programming Guide References System Programming is not required. Features Guide References 1.15 Proprietary Telephone Features • Handset Microphone Mute • Microphone Mute User Manual References • 4.3.47 Microphone Mute User Manual…
  • Page 275: Hands-Free Answerback

    4.3.40 Hands-free Answerback You can answer an intercom call and talk to the caller without lifting the handset. Setting When the SP-PHONE and the AUTO ANSWER/MUTE indicator are off; AUTO ANSWER Press AUTO ANSWER/MUTE. The AUTO ANSWER/MUTE indicator light turns on. Canceling When the AUTO ANSWER/MUTE indicator is on;…

  • Page 276
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) — Calls to an Incoming Group — Calls to a Phantom button — Calls from a VM (Voice Mail) extension (except a call from a PT) — Calls ringing on an SDN button • This feature is not available if your PT has no AUTO ANSWER/MUTE button. •…
  • Page 277: Hands-Free Operation

    4.3.41 Hands-free Operation You can make an intercom / CO call and talk to the caller without lifting the handset. Setting SP-PHONE Press SP-PHONE. The microphone and speaker are now activated and the hands-free operation is available. Switching from the handset to hands-free mode SP-PHONE Press SP-PHONE.

  • Page 278
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Conditions • The hands-free mode is canceled if you do not start dialing within 10 seconds. • The KX-T7050, KX-T7350 and the KX-T7250 have a MONITOR button instead of a SP- PHONE button. It can be used for hands-free dialing, etc., but not for a hands-free conversation.
  • Page 279: Inter Office Calling

    4.3.42 Inter Office Calling You can make a call to another extension user within the system or a tenant. Using the handset PT and SLT extension no. Lift the handset. Dial the extension number (3 or 4 digits). Using the Speakerphone SP-PHONE INTERCOM (DN)

  • Page 280
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Do Not Disturb (DND) tone: Indicates the destination extension has set the «Do Not Disturb (DND)» feature. • DSS Button DSS buttons permit One-Touch access to an extension and provide Busy Lamp Field. • You can assign a DSS button on a Proprietary Telephone (PT) or DSS Console by Station, User or System Programming.
  • Page 281
    – 5th Hundred Block Extension – 6th Hundred Block Extension – 7th Hundred Block Extension – 8th Hundred Block Extension – 9th Hundred Block Extension – 10th Hundred Block Extension – 11th Hundred Block Extension — 16th Hundred Block Extension •…
  • Page 282: Live Call Screening (Lcs)

    • Setting the password (Feature Number/System Programming) • Setting the LCS feature Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone [DPT] integration; e.g., KX-TVS100).

  • Page 283
    When using the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button in the Private Mode: To set LCS on Press LCS button. Enter the password. Hands-free Mode Having a conversation with another party (Call Waiting Tone) To monitor (Automatic) Hang up* To cancel monitoring To intercept the call Press FLASH or Lift the handset, or press LCS Cancel button.
  • Page 284
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) When using the handset in the Private Mode; To set LCS on • Press LCS button. • Enter the password. Hands-free Mode Having a conversation with another party (Call Waiting Tone) To monitor (Automatic) Hang up* To cancel monitoring To intercept the call Press FLASH or…
  • Page 285
    Canceling the password Dial 799. Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. Setting Live Call Screening When the telephone is idle and on-hook; (LCS) Press LCS (flexible button). <PT Display Example> Canceling Live Call Screening When the telephone is idle and on-hook; (LCS) Press LCS (flexible button).
  • Page 286
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) In the Hands-free mode; When callers are connected to your voice mailbox, the message recording is monitored automatically through your extension speaker. While monitoring in the Hands-free mode, the LCS indicator light flashes green slowly. Having a conversation with a party (LCS) Lift the handset…
  • Page 287
    In the Private mode; When callers are connected to your voice mailbox, an alert tone is sent. The LCS indicator light flashes green rapidly when a caller is connected to your voice mailbox. (When using a Single Line Telephone, which is connected with a Proprietary Telephone in parallel, you hear ringing.) Stopping the alert tone FLASH…
  • Page 288
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Having a conversation with a party Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. The LCS indicator light turns red from flashing green slowly. In Keep Recording mode, the Two-Way Record indicator lights. During a conversation with another party; When the extension user is having a conversation, a call waiting tone is sent.
  • Page 289
    — If you want to hold the current call Monitoring HOLD Press HOLD. Hang up or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. An alarm tone is sent. (PDN) Press PDN. Press ANSWER. Having a conversation with the party (LCS) Press the flashing LCS (flexible button). Conditions •…
  • Page 290
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) • The Two-Way Record indicator shows the feature status as follows. On: Recording the conversation Off: Not recording • During Keep Recording mode, if you want to stop recording the conversation, press the Two-Way Recording button. •…
  • Page 291
    Features Guide References 1.3 System Features • Integration, DPT 1.9 Answering Features • Live Call Screening (LCS) User Manual References • 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment • 2.2.8 Live Call Screening (LCS) Mode Set • 3.2.5 [005] Flexible CO Button Assignment •…
  • Page 292: Lockout

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.44 Lockout If one party in a conversation goes on-hook, they both are disconnected from the speech path automatically. A reorder tone is sent to the off-hook party before it is disconnected. No operation is necessary. User Manual…

  • Page 293: Log-In / Log-Out

    4.3.45 Log-In / Log-Out Allows the extension user to join (log-in) or leave (log-out) the group. They can leave the group temporarily when they are away from their desks, to prevent calls being sent to their extensions. They can return to the group when they are ready to answer calls. This feature can be categorized as follows: Log-In/Log-Out Allows members (extension users) of an Extension Group (except Group Type: None) and…

  • Page 294
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Log-In / Log-Out for members of an Extension Group and Phantom Extensions (Using the feature number) PT and SLT Lift the handset For Log-In mode: Dial 451. or press For Log-Out mode: Dial 450. SP-PHONE/MONITOR. <PT Display Example>…
  • Page 295
    Group Log-In / Log-Out for members of an Incoming Group (Using the feature number) PT and SLT Lift the handset For Log-In mode: Dial 481. or press For Log-Out mode: Dial 480. SP-PHONE/MONITOR. Confirmation tone Hang up or press and dial tone SP-PHONE/MONITOR.
  • Page 296
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) group (log-out). At least one extension must be logged in. However, this does not apply to Auto-Logout of the UCD group extensions. Programming Guide References • 2.3 Numbering Plan – Login / Logout – Group Login / Logout •…
  • Page 297: Message Waiting

    4.3.46 Message Waiting When the called extension or phantom extension is busy or does not answer your call, you can leave a notification so that the called party may call you back. As a message receiver, you will know that a call has been received by the MESSAGE button light and an indication tone which you will hear when going off-hook.

  • Page 298
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Canceling PT and SLT Lift the handset or press Dial 700. SP-PHONE/MONITOR. Confirmation Hang up or press tone and SP-PHONE/MONITOR. dial tone Checking and Selecting a message waiting notification by the receiver Display PT If there is any message waiting notification, the message waiting lamp, another extension message waiting lamp or phantom extension message waiting lamp (MESSAGE indicator) light will be on.
  • Page 299
    Calling back the message waiting notification sender Lift the handset or press Dial tone 4*, when SP-PHONE/MONITOR. a message has been received at your extension. If there are more than one message waiting notification left on your extension, you can choose the desired message sender (display PT only).
  • Page 300
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Conditions • The system supports a maximum of 448 simultaneous message waiting notifications. If you try to set the 449th message, you will hear a reorder tone. • Callback Order If multiple message waiting notifications are left at your extension, callback is executed in the order received.
  • Page 301
    • 5.10 VPS Integration – Turn off control of Message Waiting lamp Features Guide References 1.3 System Features • Integration, Voice Mail (VM) Service 1.17 Display Features • Message Waiting User Manual References • 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment • 3.2.5 [005] Flexible CO Button Assignment •…
  • Page 302: Microphone Mute

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.47 Microphone Mute During a conversation in the hands-free mode, you can turn off your PT’s microphone so that you can consult privately with others in the room. When you activate Microphone Mute, you can still listen to your caller’s voice but your caller cannot hear your voice. Setting During a conversation in the hands-free mode;…

  • Page 303
    Features Guide References 1.15 Proprietary Telephone Features • Handset Microphone Mute • Microphone Mute User Manual References • 4.3.39 Handset Microphone Mute User Manual Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT)
  • Page 304: Night Service On/Off

    Allows you to switch the Day / Night / Lunch / Break mode. The KX-TD500 System supports both the Night and Day modes of operation. The Day mode includes the Lunch and Break mode. Only a DIL destination can perform in Lunch / Break mode.

  • Page 305
    Switching Day / Night / Lunch / Break mode (Display operation) 7431 MODE Press MODE until Lift the handset or «Feature Access» press SP-PHONE. is displayed. For Auto Mode For Day Mode For Night Mode For Lunch Mode For Break Mode For Auto : Dial 0.
  • Page 306
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Switching Day / Night / Lunch / Break mode (Display operation) 7433 SHIFT Press SHIFT Lift the handset or until “FEAT” is press SP-PHONE. displayed. For Auto Mode For Day Mode For Night Mode For Lunch Mode For Break Mode For Auto : Dial 0.
  • Page 307
    Switching Day / Night / Lunch / Break mode (DAY/NIGHT button operation) (DAY/NIGHT) Lift the handset Press DAY/NIGHT or press (flexible button). SP-PHONE /MONITOR. The status of DAY/NIGHT indicator. Mode CO button Night On (Red) Lunch On (Green) Break Slow Flash (Green) <PT Display Example>…
  • Page 308
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Switching Day / Night / Lunch / Break mode (Feature number operation) PT and SLT Lift the handset Dial 78. or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. Hang up or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. Confirming the current mode Display PT When the telephone is idle; Press #.
  • Page 309
    Conditions • Class of Service (COS) Programming COS programming determines the extensions that can perform this feature. • By System Programming, you can select either automatic Day/Night mode switching or manual Day/Night mode switching. • In the automatic case, the default start/end time for each mode is as follows: •…
  • Page 310
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) – Intercept Destination – Day / Night • 3.3 Extension Group – [Overflow Setting] Destination – Day / Night • 3.5 Incoming Group – [Overflow Setting] Destination – Day / Night • 4.2 Trunk Line –…
  • Page 311: Off-Hook Call Announcement (Ohca)

    4.3.49 Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA) Allows you to signal a busy extension on a handset call that your call is waiting. Your voice is heard through the built-in speaker of the called party’s PT (KX-T7130, KX-T7235 or KX- T7436). The called extension user can select to talk to you or their initial caller. Setting 7130 / 7235 / 7436 Lift the handset or press…

  • Page 312
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Executing 7230 / 7235 / 7433 / 7436 If you hear a busy tone after making an intercom call; Press BSS (S1). Confirmation tone PT and SLT If you hear a busy tone after making an intercom call; Confirmation tone Dial 1.
  • Page 313
    To talk to the third party by terminating the current call in hands-free mode 7130 / 7235 / 7436 If OHCA is activated by the other party when you are engaged in a call using the handset, you hear a confirmation tone and then the caller’s voice through the built-in speaker of your PT. Hang up.
  • Page 314
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) To talk to the third party after placing the current call on hold 7130 / 7235 / 7436 If OHCA is activated by the other party when you are engaged in a call using the handset, you hear a confirmation tone and then the caller’s voice through the built-in speaker of your PT.
  • Page 315
    Installation Manual References • 2.3.3 DOHCA Card • 2.7.2 OHCA Card (KX-T96136) Programming Guide References • 2.3 Numbering Plan – Call Waiting Set / Cancel • 2.4 Class of Service (COS) – Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA) Features Guide References 1.6 Originating Features •…
  • Page 316: Off-Hook Call Announcement (Ohca) -Whisper

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.50 Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA) —Whisper This is a version of the OHCA feature. The difference is, OHCA provides two-way communication between two extensions but this feature provides one-way communication. When this feature is activated, the called party can hear caller’s voice through the handset but the caller cannot hear the called party’s voice.

  • Page 317
    Executing 7433 / 7436 If you hear a busy tone after making an intercom call; Press BSS (S1). Confirmation tone 7420 / 7425 / 7431 / 7433 / 7436 If you hear a busy tone after making an intercom call; Dial 1.
  • Page 318
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) To talk to the third party by terminating the current call in hands-free mode 7420 / 7425 / 7431 / 7433 / 7436 If Whisper OHCA is activated by the other party when you are engaged in a call, you hear a confirmation tone.
  • Page 319
    To talk to the third party after placing the current call on hold 7420 / 7425 / 7431 / 7433 / 7436 If Whisper OHCA is activated by the other party when you are engaged in a call, you hear a confirmation tone. Then you will be engaged in both calls with the current caller (two-way) and the third party (one-way).
  • Page 320
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) • Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA) • Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA), Whisper 1.9 Answering Features • Call Waiting User Manual References • 4.3.17 Call Waiting User Manual…
  • Page 321: Off-Hook Monitor

    4.3.51 Off-Hook Monitor While you are on a handset call, your call can be monitored by the other people in the room through SP-PHONE. Setting While on a handset call; SP-PHONE Press SP-PHONE. The SP-PHONE indicator light turns red. Your handset call is heard through the SP-PHONE.

  • Page 322
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Conditions • This feature is available for the following PT extensions only: KX-7431, KX-T7433, KX- T7436 • If the SP-PHONE button is pressed during a handset call, either Off-Hook Monitor or SP- PHONE mode (hands-free mode) will be established. This is determined by System Programming <Section 2.8 System Option, «20.
  • Page 323: One-Touch Dialing

    4.3.52 One-Touch Dialing Allows you to make a call (intercom or outside) or access a system feature with the touch of a button. This is done by storing an extension number, telephone number or feature number (up to 24 digits) in a One-Touch Dialing button. Dialing Lift the handset or press Press CO, if required.

  • Page 324
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Programming Guide References • 4.3 Extension Line – CO Key – PF Key • 4.4 DSS Console – DSS Key – PF Key Features Guide References 1.7 Dialing Features • Full One-Touch Dialing • One-Touch Dialing User Manual References •…
  • Page 325: Operator Call

    4.3.53 Operator Call Allows you to call an operator within the system. PT and SLT Lift the handset or press Dial 0. SP-PHONE/MONITOR. You may dial the FDN (3-4 digits) for the Operator Group instead. Conditions • If no operator is assigned, this feature is not available and you will hear a reorder tone after dialing the feature number.

  • Page 326
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) • 2.3 Numbering Plan – Operator Call • 3.3 Extension Group – FDN – Group Type – Tenant No. – [Overflow Setting] Destination – Day / Night – [Overflow Setting] Timer – [Operator Setting] Ringing Type –…
  • Page 327: Outward Dialing, Trunk Access

    4.3.54 Outward Dialing, Trunk Access There are the following your ways to select an idle CO line for making a call. Type Idle Direct Individual Trunk Trunk Group Trunk Access – Idle PT and SLT (CO) Lift the handset or press For PT: Press CO assigned SP-PHONE/MONITOR.

  • Page 328
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Trunk Access – Direct (CO) Lift the handset Press CO. or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. • The CO indicator light turns green. • You may press a CO button (S-CO, G-CO or L-CO) button directly without first going off-hook. Trunk Access –…
  • Page 329
    Trunk Access – Trunk Group PT and SLT (CO) trunk group no. Lift the handset For PT: Press CO assigned as Group-CO. or press For SLT, PT: Dial 8 and the trunk SP-PHONE/MONITOR. (01 through 48). The selected CO indicator light turns green. You may press a G-CO button directory without first going off-hook.
  • Page 330
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) • After dialing the feature number or pressing the CO button, you will hear one of the following tones: Dial tone: Indicates an idle CO line is seized. xxxxx —is shown on the display, if available. (xxxxx: trunk port physical number) Busy tone: Indicates the selected CO line is busy.
  • Page 331
    [Idle] • Automatic Route Selection (ARS) «Trunk Access, Idle» functions when Automatic Route Selection (ARS) is not activated. If ARS is activated by System Programming <Section 2.2 Tenant, «Automatic Route Selection» in the Programming Guide>, the least expensive route for the destination is selected automatically.
  • Page 332
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) • 3.2 Trunk Group – Line Hunting Order • 4.3 Extension Line – CO Key – [Preferred Line] Outgoing Features Guide References 1.3 System Features • Account Code Entry • Remote Station Lock Control • Trunk Group 1.6 Originating Features •…
  • Page 333: Paging

    4.3.55 Paging Allows you to make a voice announcement to a lot of people in the office simultaneously. Your message is announced through built-in speakers of Proprietary Telephones (PTs) or external speakers (External Pagers) or both. The paged person can answer your paging announcement from any telephone in the office (Paging Answer).

  • Page 334
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Paging – External: To access all external pagers PT and SLT Dial 320. Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. <PT Display Example> Extrnl Page All Paging – External: To access a particular pager PT and SLT Dial 32.
  • Page 335
    [All], [External] • An external pager (user-supplied) must be connected to the System beforehand. Up to two external pagers can be connected to the KX-TD500 System. • External Paging Tone External paging tone is emitted from external pagers, before the voice announcement.
  • Page 336
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) [All], [Group] • A maximum of 16 station paging groups, each consisting of one or more extension groups, can be created in the System <Section 3.4 Paging Group in the Programming Guide>. • A single Extension Group cannot belong to two or more different Paging Groups at a time. •…
  • Page 337
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) • 4.3.58 Paging and Transfer • 4.3.78 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS) • 4.4.2 Background Music (BGM) — External • 4.5.9 KX-T7235 Display Features — System Feature Access Menu • 4.5.12 KX-T7431 / KX-T7433 / KX-T7436 Display Features — System Feature Access Menu User Manual…
  • Page 338: Paging — Answer

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.56 Paging — Answer Allows you to answer an announced page at any extension within the system. Answering a page sent through a built-in speaker PT and SLT Lift the handset or press Dial 43. SP-PHONE/MONITOR.

  • Page 339
    – Extension Group No. Features Guide References 1.14 Paging Features • Paging User Manual References • 4.3.55 Paging • 4.5.9 KX-T7235 Display Features — System Feature Access Menu • 4.5.12 KX-T7431 / KX-T7433 / KX-T7436 Display Features — System Feature Access Menu User Manual Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT)
  • Page 340: Paging Deny

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.57 Paging Deny Allows you to deny receiving paging announcement through the built-in speakers of your PTs. Setting Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. <PT Display Example> Paging Deny On Canceling Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR.

  • Page 341
    – Paging Deny Set / Cancel • 2.8 System Option – Special dial tone after setting feature Features Guide References 1.14 Paging Features • Paging User Manual References • 4.3.55 Paging • 4.5.9 KX-T7235 Display Features — System Feature Access Menu •…
  • Page 342: Paging And Transfer

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.58 Paging and Transfer You can transfer a call after making a paging announcement via Paging — All, Paging — External, or Paging — Group. Using Paging — All PT and SLT During a conversation; TRANSFER For PT For SLT…

  • Page 343
    Using Paging — External: to all external pagers PT and SLT During a conversation; TRANSFER For PT For SLT For PT: Press TRANSFER. Dial tone For SLT: Flash the switchhook. The other party is placed on consultation hold. Wait for an answer. Confirmation tone (optional) Using Paging —…
  • Page 344
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Using Paging — Group: to all paging groups (01-16) PT and SLT During a conversation; TRANSFER For PT For SLT For PT: Press Dial tone TRANSFER. For SLT: Flash the switchhook. The other party is placed on consultation hold.
  • Page 345: Paralleled Telephone Connection

    4.3.59 Paralleled Telephone Connection A Proprietary Telephone (PT) can be connected in parallel with a Single Line Telephone (SLT). This feature allows you to enable or disable SLT ringing. When a parallel connection is made, either telephone can be used. To enable / disable SLT ringing Lift the handset or press Dial 39.

  • Page 346
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) • This feature is only available for PT extensions that are connected to a DHLC or HLC card. • With the KX-T7431, KX-T7433, KX-T7436, or KX-T7235, you can execute this feature using the display operation. Installation Manual References •…
  • Page 347: Pdn Call

    4.3.60 PDN Call If an SDN button (which corresponds with the PDN of another extension) is assigned on your PT, you can call that extension with a simple operation. Making a PDN call (SDN) Lift the handset or Press an idle SDN press (flexible button).

  • Page 348: Screened Call Transfer

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Screened Call Transfer During a conversation; TRANSFER Press TRANSFER. Confirmation tone and dial tone • The other party is placed on consultation hold. (SDN) Press the same Wait for SDN again. an answer. Unscreened Call Transfer During a conversation;…

  • Page 349
    Conditions • SDN button An SDN button can be assigned to a flexible CO button on a DN type PT by Station, User or System Programming. • FWD/DND Override The call originated by this feature overrides FWD/DND (Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb) feature assigned on the PDN owner extension.
  • Page 350: Phantom Extension

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.61 Phantom Extension Allows you to route calls to a phantom extension. The call arrives at the extension who has the corresponding Phantom button. A flexible CO button can be assigned as the Phantom button. The lighting patterns of Phantom button and status are as follows.

  • Page 351
    To transfer a call to a phantom extension (Screened Call Transfer) During a conversation; TRANSFER Press TRANSFER. Confirmation tone The other party is placed on consultation hold. Wait for an answer. Announce. The call is transferred. During a conversation; Flash the Confirmation switchhook.
  • Page 352
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) To transfer a call to a phantom extension (Unscreened Call Transfer) During a conversation; TRANSFER Press TRANSFER. Confirmation tone The other party is placed on hold. consultation hold. During a conversation; Flash the Confirmation switchhook. tone The other party is placed on hold.
  • Page 353
    To answer a phantom extension call While the Phantom button indicator light is flashing green, and INTERCOM button associated with the incoming call is flashing green or CO/DN button associated with the incoming call is flashing red; (Phantom) Press Phantom (flexible button).
  • Page 354
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) – CO Key • 5.3 Phantom Extension Features Guide References 1.3 System Features • Phantom Extension 1.8 Ringing Features • Log-In/Log-Out 1.10 Holding Features • Automatic Hold—For Transfer User Manual References • 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment •…
  • Page 355: Pickup Dialing (Hot Line)

    4.3.62 Pickup Dialing (Hot Line) You can make a call to the pre-programmed party simply by going off-hook. Programming the phone number PT and SLT Lift the handset or press Dial 742. SP-PHONE/MONITOR. You must dial a line access code (9 or 801 through 848) as the first digit when storing an outside phone number.

  • Page 356
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) • During the waiting time after going off-hook, you can dial another party and override this feature. This waiting time (between going off-hook and connecting with the called line) can be changed by System Programming (Default: 1 second). •…
  • Page 357: Privacy Release

    4.3.63 Privacy Release Allows you to establish a three-party conference call while connected to an existing call. Setting During a conversation with an outside party, to allow another extension to join the conversation; -at your extension (CO) Press the corresponding The corresponding CO indicator light flashes green rapidly.

  • Page 358
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Conditions • The CO button pressed to join the conversation needs to be assigned as a Single-CO (S-CO) button. • After the user presses the CO button, the CO indicator light of the other extension flashes rapidly for only 5 seconds.
  • Page 359: Pulse To Tone Conversion

    4.3.64 Pulse to Tone Conversion You can change the dialing mode from Pulse to Tone temporarily to access services such as computer telephone services, Voice Mail, etc., that require a tone. PT and SLT phone no. (Pulse mode) Dial the phone number (Pulse mode).

  • Page 360: Quick Dialing

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.65 Quick Dialing Allows you to make a quick dial call by dialing a pre-assigned quick dial number. For example, Quick Dialing is convenient for room service calls in a hotel. Dialing PT and SLT Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR.

  • Page 361: Redial

    4.3.66 Redial «Redial» feature can be categorized as the following two types. Type Last Number Saves the last telephone number dialed to a CO line and allows the extension user to dial the same number again. Saved Number Allows the PT user to save a telephone number while in conversation on a CO line or while hearing a busy tone and redial the number afterwards.

  • Page 362
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Conditions [General] • Up to 24 digits (excluding the CO line access code) can be stored and redialed. • » ,» «#,» «PAUSE,» and «INTERCOM» (for secret dialing) are counted as one digit. • If «Full One-Touch Dialing» feature is enabled at the extension, there is no need to go off- hook, before pressing the REDIAL or SAVE button.
  • Page 363
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) • 2.2.4 Full One-Touch Dialing Assignment • 3.2.5 [005] Flexible CO Button Assignment User Manual…
  • Page 364: Released Link Operation

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.67 Released Link Operation When Released Link Operation is enabled by System Programming, you will be automatically released from a call (extension, outside) after transferring it to the destination, if the destination extension is idle. This feature simplifies the transfer operation by eliminating the need for going on-hook or pressing the RELEASE button after transferring the call.

  • Page 365
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 1.11 Transferring Features • Call Transfer User Manual References None User Manual…
  • Page 366: Ringing Transfer

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.68 Ringing Transfer Allows a DN type PT user to transfer a call on the SDN button (flexible button) to the owner extension of the SDN which has the PDN button associated with it simply by pressing the SDN button.

  • Page 367
    Conditions • If the owner extension is in the Station or User Programming mode, Ringing Transfer does not function. • FWD/DND Override The call transferred by this features rings the PDN owner extension even if Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb feature is assigned on it. •…
  • Page 368: Secret Busy Override

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.69 Secret Busy Override You can interrupt an existing call (either «between two inside parties» or «between an inside party and an outside party») without informing the other party. Some extensions may be restricted from performing this function. To interrupt an existing call 7230 / 7235 / 7433 / 7436 If you hear a busy tone after making an intercom call;…

  • Page 369
    Conditions • Class of Service (COS) programming COS programming <Section 2.4 Class of Service (COS), «Busy Override» and «Secret Busy Override» in the Programming Guide> determines the extension users who can perform this feature. • This feature does not work if «Executive Busy Override Deny» or «Data Line Security» is set at either one of two extensions or both of them.
  • Page 370: Secret Dialing

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.70 Secret Dialing Allows you to conceal all or part(s) of a «System Speed Dialing» or «One-Touch Dialing» number assigned to a flexible button on your PT and DSS Console which normally appears on the display. Additionally, KX-T7431, KX-T7433, KX-T7436 and KX-T7235 Model Telephones are capable of Secret Dialing for «Station Speed Dialing»…

  • Page 371
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) User Manual References • 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment • 3.2.5 [005] Flexible CO Button Assignment • 4.3.52 One-Touch Dialing • 4.3.72 Station Speed Dialing • 4.3.73 System Speed Dialing User Manual…
  • Page 372: Station Program Clear

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.71 Station Program Clear Allows you to reset the following station features to the default settings. Absent Message Capability (The message set on your extension) Automatic Callback Busy Background Music that has been turned on Call Forwarding, Do Not Disturb (DND) Call Log, Incoming Call Pickup Deny…

  • Page 373
    Conditions • With the KX-T7431, KX-T7433, KX-T7436 or KX-T7235, you can execute this feature using the display operation. Programming Guide References • 2.3 Numbering Plan – Station Program Clear Features Guide References 1.15 Proprietary Telephone Features • Station Program Clear User Manual References •…
  • Page 374: Station Speed Dialing

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.72 Station Speed Dialing Allows you to store up to 10 speed dial numbers at your extension. These numbers are available for your extension only. Storing the phone number PT and SLT station speed dial no. Dial 30.

  • Page 375
    • The SLT may be replaced with a PT temporarily to store One-Touch dialing into memory. The Function Buttons (F1 through F10) correspond to speed dial numbers as follows: F1 — 0 F2 — 1 F3 — 2 F4 — 3 F5 —…
  • Page 376: System Speed Dialing

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.73 System Speed Dialing Allows you to make a call using speed dial numbers programmed previously. This system supports 2000 speed dial numbers which are available to all extension users. PT and SLT Lift the handset or press For PT: Press AUTO DIAL/STORE.

  • Page 377
    • If a stored feature number includes » » or «#,» rotary or pulse SLTs cannot use it. Programming Guide References • 2.2 Tenant – System Speed Dialing Entries Max. – System Speed Dial TRS Level Override • 2.3 Numbering Plan –…
  • Page 378: Timed Reminder (Wake-Up Call)

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.74 Timed Reminder (Wake-Up Call) Allows you to set your extension to sound an alarm once or daily at a preset time. Each telephone can be set to generate an alarm tone at a preset time as a reminder. When this feature is set, an alarm tone will ring for 30 seconds (default) at the programmed time.

  • Page 379
    Canceling PT and SLT Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. <PT Display Example> Alarm Cancelled Checking the setting time Display PT Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE. If “10:10 AM” has been set: <PT Display Example> Alarm Alarm Stopping the alarm PT and SLT Lift the handset.
  • Page 380
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Unanswered Timed Reminder Alert [PT only] If an extension user has not responded to the wake-up call, the Alert button (assigned on the «Alert Extension») light turns red. The Alert button can be used to confirm the not-responded room number and to call back the room.
  • Page 381
    • If other extension user calls your extension when the alarm is sounding, he will hear a busy tone. However, if your PT is DN type and there is an idle PDN button, the call comes in on that PDN button. In this case, the caller hears a ringback tone.
  • Page 382
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) • Distinctive Dial Tone When this feature is assigned to the extension, the extension user may hear a distinctive dial tone (dial tone 2) after going off-hook depending on System Programming <Section 2.8 System Option, «15. Special dial tone after setting feature» in the Programming Guide>. •…
  • Page 383
    Features Guide References 1.3 System Features • Outgoing Message (OGM) • Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 1.8 Ringing Features • Timed Reminder (Wake-Up Call) • Timed Reminder, Remote (Wake-Up Call) User Manual References • 3.2.1 [000] Date and Time Set •…
  • Page 384: Toll Restriction Override

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.75 Toll Restriction Override There are two types of toll restriction override: • Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry • Toll Restriction Override for System Speed Dialing User Manual…

  • Page 385: Toll Restriction Override By Account Code Entry

    4.3.76 Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry Allows you to temporarily override toll restriction and make a toll call from a toll-restricted telephone. You can carry out this feature by entering an appropriate account code before dialing the telephone number. For operation procedure, please refer to Section «4.3.2 Account Code Entry.»…

  • Page 386: Toll Restriction Override For System Speed Dialing

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.77 Toll Restriction Override for System Speed Dialing Allows you to cancel toll restriction in «System Speed Dialing.» Normally, calls originated by «System Speed Dialing» are restricted depending on the extension’s toll restriction level. Once this option is set, it permits all extension users to make «System Speed Dialing»…

  • Page 387: Trunk Answer From Any Station (Tafas)

    4.3.78 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS) Allows you to answer an incoming CO call, paged through an external pager, from any extension. PT and SLT Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. Conditions • TAFAS can be used in the following cases: The FDN of an external pager is assigned as the DIL 1:1 destination.

  • Page 388
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) – Confirmation tone for Call Pickup, Paging, Paging-Answer, TAFAS-Answer, Hold Retrieve and Call park Retrieve • 4.2 Trunk Line – Incoming Type – Destination – Day / Night / Lunch / Break • 4.6 External Paging –…
  • Page 389: Two-Way Recording Into The Voice Mail

    (flexible button) again. The Two-Way Record indicator light turns off. Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone [DPT] integration; e.g., KX-TVS100). User Manual…

  • Page 390
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Recording into the mailbox of another extension During a conversation; (Two-Way-Tran) Press Two-Way Transfer (flexible button). The Two-Way Transfer indicator light turns red. Stopping recording (Two-Way-Tran) Press Two-Way Transfer (flexible button). The Two-Way Transfer indicator light turns off. Conditions •…
  • Page 391
    Programming Guide References • 4.3 Extension Line – CO Key • 4.4 DSS Console – DSS Key Features Guide References 1.3 System Features • Integration, DPT 1.12 Conversation Features • Two-Way Recording into the Voice Mail User Manual References • 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment •…
  • Page 392: Ucd Login Monitor

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.80 UCD Login Monitor Allows an extension user (PT only) to see at a glance which UCD Group Members are logged in and which ones are logged out. Write down the DNs of the UCD Group Members that you want to monitor. Write them on the «TEL CARD»…

  • Page 393: Ucd Monitor Mode

    4.3.81 UCD Monitor Mode Allows the extension user specified as the Supervisor Extension to monitor the number of calls put in the waiting queue. Setting Lift the handset or press Dial 725. SP-PHONE/MONITOR. Canceling Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. <PT Display Example>…

  • Page 394
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) • When this feature is started for Incoming Group members, not only the number of calls put in the waiting queue but also Login / Logout status of the UCD Group members can be monitored. Programming Guide References •…
  • Page 395: Voice Mail Transfer

    4.3.82 Voice Mail Transfer You can transfer the calls to the Voice Processing System so that callers can leave their messages in a desired extension mailbox. When you transfer the call to the designated extension; —If the extension has set the «Call Forwarding» function whose destination is Voice Mail;…

  • Page 396
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) – [Voice Mail Command] Get Message – [Voice Mail Command] AA Message – [Voice Mail Command] VM Message Features Guide References 1.3 System Features • Integration, VPS User Manual References • 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment •…
  • Page 397: Vps Integration

    4.3.83 VPS Integration Allows you to have your calls forwarded to your Voice Processing System mailbox. Setting Call Forwarding destination to Voice Mail PT and SLT Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. You may press the flexible button assigned as the FWD/DND button instead.

  • Page 398
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Canceling PT and SLT FWD/DND Lift the handset or press For PT: Press FWD/DND. SP-PHONE/MONITOR. For SLT, PT: Dial 710. You may press the flexible button assigned as the FWD/DND button instead. Listening to a stored message You can listen to the messages stored in your mailbox easily.
  • Page 399
    Manual dialing PT and SLT Lift the handset or press Enter the Voice Mail extension number SP-PHONE/MONITOR. (3 or 4 digits). Conditions • Outside callers can leave their messages in your mailbox. When an incoming CO call arrives, the Operator answers the call and transfers it to your extension. And… —If you set the «Call Forwarding»…
  • Page 400
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Programming Guide References • 4.3 Extension Line – CO Key – PF Key • 4.4 DSS Console – DSS Key – PF Key Features Guide References 1.3 System Features • Integration, VPS 1.11 Transferring Features •…
  • Page 401: Walking Cos

    4.3.84 Walking COS Allows you to make a toll call at other lower level COS extensions (toll/outward restricted) by employing your own higher level COS temporarily. Making a call PT and SLT At another extension; Lift the handset Dial 47. or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR.

  • Page 402
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) — Switching Day/Night Mode — Account Code Mode — SDN COS — Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA) — Released Link Operation — Automatic Hold • With the KX-T7431, KX-T7433, KX-T7436 or KX-T7235, you can execute this feature using the display operation.
  • Page 403
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) User Manual References • 4.5.9 KX-T7235 Display Features — System Feature Access Menu • 4.5.12 KX-T7431 / KX-T7433 / KX-T7436 Display Features — System Feature Access Menu User Manual…
  • Page 404: Walking Station

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.3.85 Walking Station Used to move an extension to a new location without re-programming. Extension data such as extension number, One-Touch dialing memory remain the same after the re-location of the extension. This feature is convenient if you don’t want to change the current extension setting (extension number, etc.) after your desk is moved to another location in the office.

  • Page 405
    Conditions • The telephone type (PT, SLT, OPX) must be the same at the source and destination. • Walking Station is not available in the following cases: — If the extension is connected to a DHLC card (KX-TD50170). — If the extension is connected to a HLC card (KX-T96170) in parallel. —…
  • Page 406: Operator / Manager Service Features

    1.3 System Features • Manager Extension • Operator Group Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone [DPT] integration; e.g., KX-TVS100). User Manual…

  • Page 407: Background Music (Bgm) — External

    4.4.2 Background Music (BGM) — External Allows the Manager and the Operators to broadcast background music (BGM) in the office through the external pagers. Setting / Canceling 7235 / 7436 Features Lift the handset or Press «Features.» press SP-PHONE. Confirmation tone Hang up or press and dial tone SP-PHONE.

  • Page 408
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Setting / Canceling 7431 MODE Lift the handset or Press MODE until press SP-PHONE. «Feature Access» is displayed. Hang up or press Confirmation tone and dial tone SP-PHONE. → Ext-BGM On/Off Rotate Jog Dial until Press SELECT.
  • Page 409
    Setting / Canceling 7433 SHIFT Lift the handset or Press SHIFT until press SP-PHONE. «FEAT» is displayed. Confirmation tone Hang up or press and dial tone SP-PHONE. PT and SLT Lift the handset or press Dial 35. SP-PHONE/MONITOR. The display shows either one of the following depending on whether the BGM is on or off.
  • Page 410
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) • External Pager Priority Priority of access to external pager is: (1) TAFAS; (2) Paging; (3) BGM Higher priorities will override the BGM. • The default is «External BGM Off.» Installation Manual References • 2.8.1 External Pager (Paging Equipment) •…
  • Page 411: Call Log Incoming, Log Lock

    4.4.3 Call Log Incoming, Log Lock The Manager and the Operators can cancel the «Call Log Incoming, Log Lock» feature set at any other extension. Programming PROGRAM Press PROGRAM. Dial 99. You are in the Station Programming mode: <PT Display Example> PT—PGM Mode <PT Display Example>…

  • Page 412: Live Call Screening (Lcs) Password Clear

    User Manual References • 4.3.43 Live Call Screening (LCS) Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone [DPT] integration; e.g., KX-TVS100). Dial 99.

  • Page 413: Local Alarm

    4.4.5 Local Alarm If a system error is detected during on-line communication mode, the Alarm light on the Manager extension turns red. The Manager can confirm the error message by pressing the red lit Alarm button. If a major error occurs, minor errors will be neglected and only the first major error message will be displayed.

  • Page 414
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Error Message List (Priority order) Error Message DSP1LNK DSP-1 link failure ERR xyy Card status fault ERR xyy CD FLT Regarding the T1 card, please refer to Reference Guide for T1 Digital Trunk card. [Legend] Error Message Shelf Number (1-3) Slot Number (01-14)
  • Page 415
    When the problem is solved, the Alarm light goes off and the display PT shows the initial display. Displaying an error message When the Alarm button turns red; (Alarm) Press the red lit Alarm (flexible button). <PT Display Example> ERR 20211DISCNCT Clearing the error message While the error message is displayed;…
  • Page 416
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Programming Guide References • 4.3 Extension Line – CO Key Features Guide References 1.4 Fault Recovery/Diagnostics • Local Alarm User Manual References • 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment • 3.2.5 [005] Flexible CO Button Assignment User Manual…
  • Page 417: Outgoing Message (Ogm) Record/Playback

    4.4.6 Outgoing Message (OGM) Record/Playback The Manager and the Operators can record and play back outgoing voice messages. Recording a message 7235 / 7436 Features Press «Features.» Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE. OGM Group no. Enter OGM Group Confirmation tone number (1 through 8).

  • Page 418
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Recording a message 7431 MODE Press MODE until Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE. «Feature Access» is displayed. OGM Group no. Enter OGM Group Confirmation tone number (1 through 8). <PT Display Example> OGM 2 Rec.:00 •…
  • Page 419
    Recording a message 7433 SHIFT Lift the handset or Press SHIFT until press SP-PHONE. «FEAT» is displayed. OGM Group no. Enter OGM Group Confirmation tone number (1 through 8). <PT Display Example> OGM 2 Rec.:00 • The STORE indicator light flashes red slowly. Recording starts after the confirmation tone.
  • Page 420
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Recording a message PT and SLT Lift the handset or press Dial 361. SP-PHONE/MONITOR. AUTO DIAL STORE Press STORE or wait until Confirmation a maximum recording time tone (30 seconds) has elapsed. The recording is stopped and STORE indicator light turns steady red. The recorded message will be played back automatically.
  • Page 421
    Playing back a message 7235 / 7436 Features Press «Features.» Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE. OGM Group no. Enter OGM Group Confirmation tone number (1 through 8). <PT Display Example> OGM 1 Play:28 The STORE indicator lights. The message is played back and the counter starts. User Manual NEXT Rotate Jog Dial or press «NEXT»…
  • Page 422
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Playing back a message 7431 MODE Press MODE until Lift the handset or «Feature Access» is press SP-PHONE. displayed. OGM Group no. Enter OGM Group Confirmation tone number (1 through 8). <PT Display Example> OGM 1 Play:28 The STORE indicator lights.
  • Page 423
    Playing back a message 7433 SHIFT Lift the handset or Press SHIFT until press SP-PHONE. «FEAT» is displayed. OGM Group no. Enter OGM Group Confirmation tone number (1 through 8). <PT Display Example> OGM 1 Play:28 The STORE indicator lights. The message is played back and the counter starts.
  • Page 424
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Playing back a message Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. AUTO DIAL STORE Press STORE or wait until Confirmation tone playback is finished. and dial tone The STORE indicator light turns off. Conditions • The following three types of outgoing messages can be recorded. DISA message: This message is played when an outside caller accesses the system via DISA line.
  • Page 425
    • OGM Group Recording of OGM is performed per OGM Group (1-8) which consists of one or more DISA cards. Up to eight OGM Groups are available in the system. • Before recording your OGM, you must assign its OGM Group No. to a physical card (DISA Port Assignment) •…
  • Page 426: Remote Dnd (Do Not Disturb) Control

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.4.7 Remote DND (Do Not Disturb) Control The Manager and the Operators can set/cancel the DND feature to other extensions. Setting/Canceling 7235 / 7436 Features Press «Features.» Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE. destination extension no. (DSS) Dial the destination extension number (3 or 4 digits) or press…

  • Page 427
    Setting/Canceling 7431 MODE Lift the handset or Press MODE until press SP-PHONE. «Feature Access» is displayed. destination extension no. (DSS) Dial desired extension number (3 or 4 digits) or press DSS (flexible button). <PT Display Example> DND Set:EXXXX DND Cancel:EXXXX User Manual Rotate Jog Dial until «Remote DND»…
  • Page 428
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Setting/Canceling 7433 SHIFT Lift the handset or Press SHIFT press SP-PHONE. until «FEAT» is displayed. destination extension no. (DSS) Dial the destination extension number (3 or 4 digits) or press DSS (flexible button). <PT Display Example> DND Set:EXXXX DND Cancel:EXXXX FEAT…
  • Page 429
    Setting/Canceling PT and SLT Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. Hang up or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. Conditions • Remote DND Control operation sets or cancels the DND feature to the specified extension. This depends on the status of the extension, whether DND is set by the extension user or not. Programming Guide References •…
  • Page 430: Remote Fwd (Call Forwarding) Cancel — Once

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.4.8 Remote FWD (Call Forwarding) Cancel — Once The Manager and the Operators can ring an extension that has set Call Forwarding. Canceling FWD temporarily 7235 / 7436 Features Lift the handset or Press «Features.» press SP-PHONE.

  • Page 431
    Canceling FWD temporarily 7431 MODE Lift the handset or Press MODE until press SP-PHONE. «Feature Access» is displayed. destination extension no. (DSS) Dial the destination extension number (3 or 4 digits) or press DSS (flexible button). • Ringing starts at the destination extension. User Manual Rotate Jog Dial until «FWD Cancel Once»…
  • Page 432
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Canceling FWD temporarily 7433 SHIFT Lift the handset or Press SHIFT press SP-PHONE. until «FEAT» is displayed. destination extension no. (DSS) Dial the destination extension number (3 or 4 digits) or press DSS (flexible button). Ringing starts at the destination extension.
  • Page 433
    Canceling FWD temporarily PT and SLT Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. Conditions • This feature cancels the Call Forwarding feature set at the extension temporarily so that the Manager or an Operator can call the extension user. Programming Guide References •…
  • Page 434: Remote Station Lock Control

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.4.9 Remote Station Lock Control The Manager and the Operators can remotely lock or unlock any extension. To lock an extension, you can select to lock outside calls or intercom calls. Programming PROGRAM Press PROGRAM. Dial 99.

  • Page 435
    Features Guide References 1.6 Originating Features • Electronic Station Lockout User Manual References • 4.3.30 Electronic Station Lockout User Manual Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT)
  • Page 436: Switching Cos

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.4.10 Switching COS You can assign either primary or secondary level of COS (Class of Service) for each extension. Setting 7235 / 7436 NEXT Features Press «Features.» Rotate Jog Dial or press «NEXT» until the following is displayed.

  • Page 437
    Setting 7433 FEAT SHIFT Press SHIFT Press «FEAT.» until «FEAT» is displayed. (DSS) extension no. Dial the desired extension number (3 or 4 digits) or press DSS (flexible button). PT and SLT Lift the handset or press Dial 79. SP-PHONE/MONITOR. Hang up or press Confirmation tone SP-PHONE/MONITOR.
  • Page 438
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Programming Guide References • 2.3 Numbering Plan – COS Primary – COS Secondary • 2.4 Class of Service (COS) • 4.3 Extension Line – [COS No.] Primary – [COS No.] Secondary • 4.7 ISDN Extension Line –…
  • Page 439: Timed Reminder, Remote (Wake-Up Call)

    4.4.11 Timed Reminder, Remote (Wake-Up Call) The Manager and the Operators can remotely set or cancel the Timed Reminder to the desired extension. Setting 7235 / 7436 Features Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE. Press «Features.» (DSS) extension no. Dial the desired extension Press «NEXT»…

  • Page 440
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Setting 7431 MODE Lift the handset Press MODE until or press “Feature Access” is SP-PHONE. displayed. extension no. Dial 1. Dial the desired extension number (3 or 4 digits) or press DSS (flexible button). For one time alarm* : Dial 0.
  • Page 441
    Setting 7433 SHIFT Press SHIFT Lift the handset or press until “FEAT” is SP-PHONE. displayed. extension no. Dial 1. Dial the desired extension number (3 or 4 digits) or press DSS (flexible button). For one time alarm* : Dial 0. Confirmation For daily alarm* : Dial 1.
  • Page 442
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Setting PT and SLT Dial 7 1. Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. minute Enter the minute For AM: Dial 0. (00 through 59). For PM: Dial 1. You hear an alarm ringing at the preset time and then the setting is cleared. You hear an alarm ringing daily at the preset time until the setting is changed or canceled.
  • Page 443
    Canceling 7235 / 7436 Features Lift the handset or Press «Features.» press SP-PHONE. (DSS) extension no. Dial the desired extension number (3 or 4 digits) or press DSS on which you have set the Timed Reminder. <PT Display Example> Extension #:1234 Time(hh:mm):07:00 AM/PM(0/1) :0 Hang up or press the…
  • Page 444
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Canceling 7431 MODE Lift the handset or Press MODE until press SP-PHONE. “Feature Access” is displayed. extension no. Dial 0. Dial the desired extension number (3 or 4 digits) or press DSS on which you have set the Timed Reminder.
  • Page 445
    Canceling PT and SLT Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. Confirmation tone Hang up or press and dial tone SP-PHONE/MONITOR. Checking the time setting Display PT Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE. <PT Display Example> If «10:10» has been set, the display shows; Alarm 10:10AM Alarm 10:10AM* User Manual…
  • Page 446
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Unanswered Timed Reminder Alert [PT only] If an extension user has not responded to the wake-up call, the Alert button (assigned on the «Alert Extension») light turns red. The Alert button can be used to confirm the not-responded room number and to call back the room.
  • Page 447
    Conditions • The system clock must be set correctly beforehand. • There is no limit to the number of the extensions who can set the Timed Reminder at the same time. • Only the latest time setting is valid at the extension whether it was set by the extension user (Timed Reminder) or by the Manager extension or an Operator (Timed Reminder, Remote).
  • Page 448
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) – Timed Reminder Ringing Time – Timed Reminder Arrive Count – Timed Reminder Arrive Wait Time • 2.8 System Option – Special dial tone after setting feature – Alert Ringing • 3.6 OGM Group – OGM Type •…
  • Page 449: Trunk Busy-Out Setting

    4.4.12 Trunk Busy-Out Setting Allows the Manager and the Operators to busy out a trunk. Setting / Canceling 7235 / 7436 Features Lift the handset or Press «Features.» press SP-PHONE. trunk port physical no. Enter the trunk port Confirmation tone physical number.

  • Page 450
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Setting / Canceling 7431 MODE Lift the handset or Press MODE until press SP-PHONE. «Feature Access» is displayed. trunk port physical no. Enter the trunk port Confirmation tone physical number. and dial tone <PT Display Example> •…
  • Page 451
    Setting / Canceling 7433 SHIFT Lift the handset or Press SHIFT press SP-PHONE. until «FEAT» is displayed. → To set B S Y O u t S e t BSY Ovr DNY M E N U Press «SEL.» To cancel →…
  • Page 452
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Setting / Canceling PT and SLT To set To cancel Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. Hang up or press Confirmation tone SP-PHONE/MONITOR. and dial tone Confirming 7235 / 7436 Lift the handset or Press «Features.» press SP-PHONE.
  • Page 453
    Confirming 7431 MODE Lift the handset or Press MODE until press SP-PHONE. «Feature Access» is displayed. trunk port physical no. Enter the trunk port physical number. <PT Display Example> When setting: B.Out 10201 When no setting: B.Out None 7433 SHIFT Lift the handset or Press SHIFT press SP-PHONE.
  • Page 454
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Confirming Display PT Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR. Dial tone Programming Guide References • 2.3 Numbering Plan – Trunk Busy-out • 2.8 System Option – ELCOT / LCOT Busy-out Loop Relay – GCOT Busy-out Loop Relay Features Guide References 1.3 System Features •…
  • Page 455: Trunk Route Control

    4.4.13 Trunk Route Control Allows the Manager and the Operators to make a call using a specific trunk. They can verify the status of the specified trunk. 7235 / 7436 Features Press «Features.» Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE. trunk port physical no. Enter the trunk port physical number.

  • Page 456
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 7433 Press SHIFT Lift the handset or until «FEAT» is press SP-PHONE. displayed. → T R K R o u t e C TL U C D M o n i t o r E n d S E L M E N U Press «SEL.»…
  • Page 457
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) User Manual References None User Manual…
  • Page 458: Special Display Features

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.5 Special Display Features 4.5.1 Special Display Features With the display telephone, KX-T7230, KX-T7235, KX-T7431, KX-T7433 or KX-T7436, you can easily access several features. The display telephones have the ability to perform the following features. Feature Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Call Information Display…

  • Page 459: Call Forwarding / Do Not Disturb (Kx-T7436 / Kx-T7235 Only)

    4.5.2 Call Forwarding / Do Not Disturb (KX-T7436 / KX-T7235 only) You can set or cancel the Call Forwarding and Do Not Disturb features using the display. Features on the First Display FWD/DND Cancel Cancels the Call Forwarding and Do Not Disturb (DND) features at your extension.

  • Page 460
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Features on the Second Display Call Forwarding – Busy / No Answer Sets forwarding incoming calls to another extension when busy or you do not answer. Call Forwarding – to CO/TIE Line Sets forwarding all incoming calls to an external party.
  • Page 461
    4.5.3 Call Information Display (KX-T7436 / KX-T7433 / KX-T7235 / KX-T7230 only) When receiving a call from the CO line assigned to receive Caller ID service telephone number and name are displayed simultaneously. You can also record the information in the call log. 7230 / 7433 While receiving an incoming CO call, the display shows the caller’s telephone number…
  • Page 462
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Conditions • This feature is available for KX-T7230, KX-T7235, KX-T7433 and KX-T7436 only. • The SHIFT indicator light may turn on when receiving a call. Pressing this button provides you with more information about the caller. •…
  • Page 463
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) • 4.5.5 Call Log Incoming, Log Lock (KX-T7436 / KX-T7433 / KX-T7235 / KX-T7230 only) User Manual…
  • Page 464: Call Log, Incoming (Kx-T7436 / Kx-T7433 / Kx-T7235 / Kx-T7230 Only)

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.5.4 Call Log, Incoming (KX-T7436 / KX-T7433 / KX-T7235 / KX- T7230 only) If you do not answer an incoming CO call, your extension automatically records the call information from the Caller ID service, can be logged per extension. When the call log is full (30 calls are stored), you can select how the 31st call is treated.

  • Page 465
    Logging a call information while talking KX-T7433 / KX-T7230 While receiving an incoming CO call, the display shows the caller’s telephone number and name. 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 J O H N W H I T E To answer, go off-hook.
  • Page 466
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Confirming and calling back When the SHIFT indicator is red, there are calls logged. KX-T7433 / KX-T7230 Second Display W E D J A N 0 1 0 3 : 0 0 P SHIFT O L D 7 To see the confirmed information 0 1 : 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1…
  • Page 467
    Operating sequence Press the SHIFT button. Press the OLD (S1) or NEW (S2) button to see the confirmed or unconfirmed information. Press the NEXT (S3) or PREV (S3) button to see other caller’s information. Or press the INFO (S1) button repeatedly to see the information in detail.
  • Page 468
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) KX-T7436 / KX-T7235 Second Display WED JAN01 03:00P SHIFT Extension Features Call Log OLD7 To see the confirmed information 10101:AB COMPANY 0102030405 Bob Jones OCT30 09:03PM SEQ01 02CALL MENU MENU To modify the phone number, press «…
  • Page 469
    Operating sequence Press the SHIFT button. Press the OLD (S1) or NEW (S2) button to see the confirmed or unconfirmed information. Press the NEXT (S3) or PREV (S2) button to see other caller’s information. Or modify the number, if required. To call back, go off-hook and then press the CALL (S1) button.
  • Page 470
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) – [Local Call] Area Code – [Local Call] Digits to delete – [Local Call] Number to be added – [Long Distance Call] Digits to delete – [Long Distance Call] Number to be added • 5.12 Caller ID Registration •…
  • Page 471: Call Log Incoming, Log Lock (Kx-T7436 / Kx-T7433 / Kx-T7235 / Kx-T7230 Only)

    4.5.5 Call Log Incoming, Log Lock (KX-T7436 / KX-T7433 / KX- T7235 / KX-T7230 only) Allows you to lock the display of your extension so that the «Call Log, Incoming» feature is not shown on the display, if you do not want others to see the information. Locking 7230 / 7235 / 7433 / 7436 Dial 57.

  • Page 472
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) – Call Log Incoming, Log Lock • 4.2 Trunk Line – Name • 4.3 Extension Line – Initial Display Selection – [Call Log Incoming] Overwrite Mode – [Call Log Incoming] Lock Password Features Guide References 1.5 Attended Features •…
  • Page 473: Call Log, Outgoing (Kx-T7436 / Kx-T7235 Only)

    4.5.6 Call Log, Outgoing (KX-T7436 / KX-T7235 only) The last five outside telephone numbers (Up to 24 digits for each) you made are automatically logged. You can make a call using the call log. Extension Features Call Log <Example> To select 111 1234567890 0987654 000111222333…

  • Page 474: Kx-T7235 Display Features

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.5.7 KX-T7235 Display Features The KX-T7235 telephone allows you to make a call or operate the features using the display message with the Function buttons. 1) Call Directory Extension Dialing Station Speed Dialing System Speed Dialing 2) System Feature Access Menu The System Feature Access Menu provides a display of the system features which appear in alphabetical order.

  • Page 475: Kx-T7235 Display Features — Call Directory

    To alternate the display between name and number, press the NEXT (S3) button. Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Station Speed Dialing Makes a call to a party stored in your phone. <Example> To select Panasonic KME-soft Jim Kopp Panasonic Ronald Police Zangril…

  • Page 476
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) • 2.8 System Option – Station Speed Dialing Initial display • 4.3 Extension Line – Name • 5.2 System Speed Dialing – Name – Number Features Guide References 1.7 Dialing Features • One-Touch Dialing • System Speed Dialing 1.17 Display Features •…
  • Page 477: Kx-T7235 Display Features — System Feature Access Menu

    4.5.9 KX-T7235 Display Features — System Feature Access Menu You can access various features using the messages which are displayed in alphabetical order. To access the features, press the Feature (F4) button on the initial display first, search for the desired feature message by pressing the NEXT (S3) button.

  • Page 478
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Features on the Second Display Executive Busy Override Deny Denies or allows other people from joining your conversation. Call Pickup, Outside Line Picks up an outside call for another extension. Call Pickup Deny Denies or allows other people from picking up Dial 1 or 0.
  • Page 479
    Features on the Third Display Call Waiting Sets or cancels the Call Waiting feature (Call Waiting, OHCA or Whisper OHCA). Call Park Places a call on Dial 1 through 3 or 0. hold in a parking area or retrieves it. — 1: to set Call Waiting — 2: to set OHCA Dial parking…
  • Page 480
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Features on the Fourth Display Data Line Security Refuses or accepts an indication tone, e.g., call waiting tone. Dial 1 or 0. Door Opener Unlocks the door. Doorphone Call — 1: Set (On) Calls the doorphone. — 0: Cancel (Off) On-hook.
  • Page 481
    Features on the Fifth Display Remote FWD Cancel –Once (operator/manager only) Group Log-In/ Refer to the corresponding feature Log-Out in Section 4.4, Joins or leaves the «Operator / Manager incoming group. Service Features.» Group Call FWD Sets or cancels forwarding all calls to an incoming group Cancel Enter FDN for source…
  • Page 482
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Features on the Sixth Display Call Log, Incoming Selects whether the 31st call is disregarded or overwrites the oldest call. Log-In / Log-Out Joins or leaves the extension group. Dial 1 or 0. Dial 1 or 0. — 1: overwrite (On) — 1: Log-In (On) — 0: disregard (Off)
  • Page 483
    Features on the Seventh Display Outgoing Message (OGM) (operator/manager only) Refer to the corresponding feature in Section 4.4, «Operator / Manager Service Features.» Paging – DENY Denies or allows being paged. Dial 1 or 0. — 1: Deny — 0: Allow On-hook.
  • Page 484
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Features on the Eighth Display Paging – External Pages through all or particular external Paralleled Telephone pager. Connection Sets the paralleled telephone connection on or off. Dial the external pager number (1 or 2) or 0. 1 or 2: external pager no.
  • Page 485
    Features on the Ninth Display Electronic Station Lockout Denies or allows other people from using your telephone. Timed Reminder, Remote (Wake-Up Call) (operator/manager only) Refer to the corresponding feature in Section 4.4, «Operator / Manager Service Features.» Enter lock code (000 through 999).
  • Page 486
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Features on the Tenth Display UCD Monitor Mode Allows Supervisor Extension to monitor the number of calls in the waiting queue. Cancel Enter FDN On-hook. for UCD Group. On-hook. Trunk Route Control (operator/manager only) Refer to the corresponding feature in Section 4.4, «Operator / Manager…
  • Page 487: Kx-T7431 / Kx-T7433 / Kx-T7436 Display Features

    4.5.10 KX-T7431 / KX-T7433 / KX-T7436 Display Features The KX-T7431, KX-T7433 and KX-T7436 telephones allow you to make a call or operate the features using the display message. 1) Call Directory Extension Dialing Station Speed Dialing System Speed Dialing 2) System Feature Access Menu The System Feature Access Menu provides a display of the system features which appear in alphabetical order.

  • Page 488
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Jog Dial Operation You can search for desired items on the corresponding display menu by using the Jog Dial. Rotate the Jog Dial in either direction as desired. The items will be displayed as follows. Left (counterclockwise) To the previous…
  • Page 489
    — KX-T7433 The Jog Dial operation is available in the initial and third display. While idle, the bottom line of the display changes by pressing the SHIFT button as follows. Initial Display Second Display Third Display — KX-T7436 The Jog Dial operation is available in the initial and third display. While idle, the bottom line of the display changes by pressing the SHIFT button as follows.
  • Page 490: Kx-T7431 / Kx-T7433 / Kx-T7436 Display Features — Call Directory

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.5.11 KX-T7431 / KX-T7433 / KX-T7436 Display Features — Call Directory There are three Call Directory features as follows. Feature Extension Dialing You can make an intercom call using the directory. System Speed Dialing You can make a call to a party stored in the system using the directory.

  • Page 491
    • 3.2.2 [001] System Speed Dialing Number Set • 3.2.3 [002] System Speed Dialing Name Set • 3.2.4 [004] Extension Name Set KX-T7431 System Speed Dialing Second Display System Speed System Speed Dialing / Station Speed Dialing / Extension Dialing Rotate the Jog Dial until the desired item is displayed.
  • Page 492
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) KX-T7433 Third Display W E D J A N 0 1 0 3 : 0 0 P S T A E X T Station Speed Dialing → A d a m A l i c e M E N U →…
  • Page 493
    KX-T7436 – Using the Function button – Initial Display WED JAN01 03:00P Extension Features Call Log CONT Extension Dialing Yoshida Zaydel → Adam Alice Ann Parker MENU MENU Ann Parker Beth → Bob Jones Carol Chris MENU CALL MENU NEXT User Manual Station Speed Dialing STA Speed…
  • Page 494
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Extension Dialing / Station Speed Dialing / System Speed Dialing Press the Extension (F3), STA Speed (F8) or SYS Speed (F9) button. Rotate the Jog Dial until the desired item is at the arrow. Press the CALL (S3) button or go off-hook. —…
  • Page 495
    System Speed Dialing Rotate the Jog Dial until the desired item is at the arrow. Press the CALL (S3) button or go off-hook. Station Speed Dialing / Extension Dialing Press the STA (S1) or EXT (S2) button. Rotate the Jog Dial until the desired item is at the arrow.
  • Page 496: Kx-T7431 / Kx-T7433 / Kx-T7436 Display Features — System Feature Access Menu

    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) 4.5.12 KX-T7431 / KX-T7433 / KX-T7436 Display Features — System Feature Access Menu You can access the features which are displayed in alphabetical order. To access the features, you may shift the display to the Jog Dial Operation display by pressing the MODE or SHIFT button first.

  • Page 497
    KX-T7431 Rotate the Jog Dial until the desired item is displayed. Press the SELECT Button. Enter the parameter, if required. On-hook, if required. KX-T7433 Press the FEAT (S3) button. Rotate the Jog Dial until the desired item is at the arrow. Press the SEL (S3) button.
  • Page 498
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Display (KX-T7436/KX-T7235) Busy Ovrd Deny ( 1/0) C.Pickup CO C.Pickup Deny ( 1/0) C.Pickup Direct ( ext) C.Pickup Group C.Waiting ( 0-3) Call Park ( 00-99) Callback Busy Cancel COS Primary ( ext) COS Secondary ( ext) Data Line On/Off ( 1/0) Door Open ( 1-8) Doorphone Call ( 1-8)
  • Page 499
    Display (KX-T7436/KX-T7235) Log Ovrt On/Off ( 1/0) Login/Logout ( 1/0) Message Off ( ext) Message On ( ext) Night Mode ( 0-4) OGM Playback ( 1-8) OGM Recording ( 1-8) Page Deny On/Off ( 1/0) Page-Ext Answer ( 1-2) Page-GRP Answer Paging External ( 0-2) Paging Group ( #,01-16) Parallel On/Off ( 1/0)
  • Page 500
    Station Features and Operation (PT/SLT) Display (KX-T7436/KX-T7235) Station Program Clear Timed Reminder TRK Route CTL ( PHY) UCD Monitor End UCD Monitor STRT ( FDN) Walking COS ( code+ext) Only available for the Manager and the Operators. After selecting this message, follow the steps as follows. — KX-T7436: steps of the «Timed Reminder»…
  • Page 501: Dss Console Features

    DSS Console Features Section 5 DSS Console Features Note: All illustrations of the DPT (paired telephone) used in these operating instructions are based on model KX-T7235. User Manual…

  • Page 502: Configuration

    • Up to 8 DSS Consoles can be connected to a PT. • A Single Line Telephone cannot be paired with the DSS Console. • For System Programming, please refer to the Programming Guide of the KX-TD500 System. Programming Guide References •…

  • Page 503: Location Of Controls

    PF (Programmable Function) Buttons (01 through 16): These buttons are provided with no default settings. With a paired telephone, you can program the buttons as other function buttons. <Back View> Used to connect to the KX-TD500 System User Manual TO EMSS DSS Console Features…

  • Page 504
    DSS Console Features KX-T7440 DSS Buttons with Busy Lamp Field (BLF)(01 through 66) Connection Included telephone line cord KX-T7441 DSS Buttons with Busy Lamp Field (BLF)(01 through 48) ANSWER Button RELEASE Button → Connect to the KX-TD500 System. User Manual…
  • Page 505: Feature Buttons

    5.1.3 Feature Buttons DSS Consoles have the following types of Feature Buttons: DSS Buttons with Busy Lamp Field (BLF) Used to access extensions. The BLF indicates the busy or idle status of each extension in the system. These buttons can also be changed to other function buttons. PF (Programmable Feature) Buttons [KX-T7040 / KX-T7240 only] These buttons are provided with no default settings.

  • Page 506: Dss Console Features

    DSS Console Features 5.2 DSS Console Features 5.2.1 Station Programming Both DSS buttons and PF buttons (KX-T7040 and KX-T7240 only) are provided with no default settings. To meet your various needs, DSS buttons can be changed to other function buttons. Every DSS or PF button can be assigned to another extension number, telephone number or feature number by Station Programming.

  • Page 507: Account Button (Assignment)

    5.2.2 Account Button (Assignment) You can assign a Flexible DSS or PF button as an Account button. —Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. PT and DSS Console [DSS Console] (DSS) (PF) Press the desired DSS or PF button.

  • Page 508: Answer Button (Assignment)

    DSS Console Features 5.2.3 Answer Button (Assignment) You can assign a Flexible DSS or PF button as an Answer button. —Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. PT and DSS Console [DSS Console] (DSS) (PF) Press the desired…

  • Page 509: Conference (Conf) Button (Assignment)

    5.2.4 Conference (CONF) Button (Assignment) You can assign a Flexible DSS or PF button as a Conference (CONF) button. —Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. PT and DSS Console [DSS Console] (DSS) (PF) Press the desired DSS or PF button.

  • Page 510: Day / Night Button (Assignment)

    DSS Console Features 5.2.5 DAY / NIGHT Button (Assignment) You can assign a Flexible DSS button as a DAY / NIGHT button. —Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. PT and DSS Console [DSS Console] (DSS) Press the desired…

  • Page 511: Direct Station Selection (Dss) Button (Assignment)

    5.2.6 Direct Station Selection (DSS) Button (Assignment) You can assign the desired extension number to a DSS button. —Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. PT and DSS Console [DSS Console] [Paired telephone] (DSS) Press the desired Dial 1.

  • Page 512: Fwd/Dnd Button (Assignment)

    DSS Console Features 5.2.7 FWD/DND Button (Assignment) You can assign a Flexible DSS or PF button as an FWD/DND button. —Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. PT and DSS Console [DSS Console] (DSS) (PF) Press the desired…

  • Page 513: Group-Co (G-Co) Button (Assignment)

    5.2.8 Group-CO (G-CO) Button (Assignment) You can assign a Flexible DSS button as a Group-CO button. —Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. PT and DSS Console [DSS Console] [Paired telephone] (DSS) Press the desired Dial #.

  • Page 514: Group Fwd Button (Assignment)

    DSS Console Features 5.2.9 Group FWD Button (Assignment) You can assign a Flexible DSS button as a Group FWD button. —Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. PT and DSS Console [DSS Console] [Paired telephone] (DSS) Press the desired…

  • Page 515: Live Call Screening (Lcs) Button (Assignment)

    <PT Display Example> ——To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM]. Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone [DPT] integration; e.g., KX-TVS100).

  • Page 516: Live Call Screening (Lcs) Cancel Button (Assignment)

    LCS Cancel —To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM]. Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone [DPT] integration; e.g., KX-TVS100). [Paired telephone] [Paired telephone] Dial 93.

  • Page 517: Message Waiting (Message) Button (Assignment)

    5.2.12 Message Waiting (MESSAGE) Button (Assignment) You can assign a Flexible DSS button as a Message Waiting (MESSAGE) button. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. PT and DSS Console [DSS Console] (DSS) Press the desired DSS button.

  • Page 518: One-Touch Dialing Button (Assignment)

    DSS Console Features 5.2.13 One-Touch Dialing Button (Assignment) You can assign a DSS or PF button as a One-Touch Dialing button. The number can be an extension number or a telephone number. Up to 24 digits can be stored into each memory location.

  • Page 519: One-Touch Access Assignment For System Features

    5.2.14 One-Touch Access Assignment for System Features You can assign the desired feature number to a DSS or PF button. —Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. PT and DSS Console [DSS Console] [Paired telephone] (DSS) (PF)

  • Page 520: Release Button (Assignment)

    DSS Console Features 5.2.15 Release Button (Assignment) You can assign a Flexible DSS or PF button as a Release button. —Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. PT and DSS Console [DSS Console] (DSS) (PF) Press the desired…

  • Page 521: Save Button (Assignment)

    5.2.16 SAVE Button (Assignment) You can assign a Flexible DSS or PF button as a SAVE button. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. PT and DSS Console [DSS Console] (DSS) (PF) Press the desired DSS or PF button.

  • Page 522: Single-Co (S-Co) Button (Assignment)

    DSS Console Features 5.2.17 Single-CO (S-CO) Button (Assignment) You can assign a DSS button as a Single-CO button. —Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. PT and DSS Console [DSS Console] [Paired telephone] (DSS) Press the desired Dial 0.

  • Page 523: Tone Through Button (Assignment)

    5.2.18 Tone Through Button (Assignment) You can assign a Flexible DSS button as a Tone Through button. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. PT and DSS Console [DSS Console] [Paired telephone] (DSS) Press the desired DSS button.

  • Page 524: Two-Way Record Button (Assignment)

    Programming mode.) — To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM]. Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone [DPT] integration; e.g., KX-TVS100).

  • Page 525: Two-Way Transfer Button (Assignment)

    Programming mode.) — To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM]. Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone [DPT] integration; e.g., KX-TVS100).

  • Page 526: Voice Mail (Vm) Transfer Button (Assignment)

    DSS Console Features 5.2.21 Voice Mail (VM) Transfer Button (Assignment) You can assign a Flexible DSS or PF button as a VM Transfer button. This allows you to record a conversation into your own mailbox. — Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9]. PT and DSS Console [DSS Console] [Paired telephone]…

  • Page 527
    To correct an error while programming 7230 / 7235 / 7433 / 7436 [Paired telephone] Press CLR (S2). [Paired telephone] TRANSFER Press TRANSFER (CLEAR). • The TRANSFER button becomes the CLEAR button when using the overlay. To erase after programming PT and DSS Console [DSS Console] [Paired telephone]…
  • Page 528
    – DSS Key – PF Key Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone [DPT] integration; e.g., KX-TVS100). Can only be assigned by System Programming.
  • Page 529
    Features Guide References 1.15 Proprietary Telephone Features • DSS Console User Manual References • 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment User Manual DSS Console Features…
  • Page 530: Direct Station Dialing

    DSS Console Features 5.2.22 Direct Station Dialing An extension can be called and accessed, simply by pressing a DSS button. The BLF shows if the extension is busy. PT and DSS Console [Paired telephone] Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/NOMITOR. [DSS Console] (DSS) Press the desired DSS button.

  • Page 531: One-Touch Dialing

    5.2.23 One-Touch Dialing The stored number is dialed automatically by pressing a programmed DSS or PF button. PT and DSS Console [Paired telephone] Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/NOMITOR. User Manual [DSS Console] (DSS) (PF) Press the desired DSS or PF button. DSS Console Features…

  • Page 532: One-Touch Access For System Features

    DSS Console Features 5.2.24 One-Touch Access for System Features You can access system features by pressing a programmed DSS or PF button. PT and DSS Console [Paired telephone] Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/NOMITOR. [DSS Console] (DSS) (PF) Press the desired DSS or PF button.

  • Page 533: Call Transfer

    5.2.25 Call Transfer A call can be transferred to an extension by using the DSS button. PT and DSS Console During a conversation; [Paired telephone] TRANSFER Press TRANSFER. One-Touch Transfer An outside call can be transferred to an extension with a One-Touch operation. The One-Touch Transfer function must be set by System Programming.

  • Page 534: Answer And Release Buttons Operation

    DSS Console Features 5.2.26 ANSWER and RELEASE Buttons Operation The DSS Console for Attendant KX-T7441 is provided with the ANSWER button and the RELEASE button which are useful for operators who use headsets. For other DSS Consoles, ANSWER button and RELEASE button can be assigned to a DSS or PF button.

  • Page 535
    DSS Console Features One-Touch Transfer PT and DSS Console During a conversation with the headset or handset; RELEASE (DSS) Press the desired DSS button. Press RELEASE. • The other party is placed on hold and the destination is called immediately. Programming Guide References •…
  • Page 536: Monitoring An Outside Line Activity

    DSS Console Features 5.2.27 Monitoring an outside line activity You can monitor the activity of an outside line by assigning an S-CO button (Section 5.2.17 Single-CO (S-CO) Button (Assignment)) or a G-CO button (Section 5.2.8 Group- CO (G-CO) Button (Assignment)) or both. Conditions •…

  • Page 537: 6 Appendix

    Appendix Section 6 Appendix User Manual…

  • Page 538: Appendix 6.1 Appendix

    1234:Tony Viola 1234:Tony Viola 2345: Busy 2345: OCCUPE 4567: 4567: 5678: Free 5678: LIBRE 3456:MDM Access 3456: ACCES MDM 1234567890 1234567890 Panasonic Panasonic 950-1001PP12345& 950-1001PP12345& 1234:Tony Viola 1234:Tony Viola 1234 10101:Tony 1234 10101:Tony 2345: Busy 2345: OCCUPE 4567: 4567: French Display Factory setting.

  • Page 539
    English Display Account Alarm 10:15AM AVERT. 10:15AM Alarm 10:15AM* AVERT. 10:15AM* Alarm Cancelled AVERT. ANNULE Alarm Not Stored AVERT. NON REGLE All Call Page RECH INT ET EXT At Ext 1234 At Ext 1234 Back at 11:00 Back at 11:00 BGM On MUSIQUE:OUI BGM Off…
  • Page 540
    Appendix English Display 10101 & 10102 10101 & 10102 10101: Free 10101: 10301:AB COMPANY 10301:AB COMPANY Conference CONFERENCE CO in Use LR OCCUPEE CO Not Assigned LR NON ASSIGNEE CONT RNGOFF BGM CONT SONN-N MUS Contrast:*** CONTRAST:*** Data Mode Off PROTECTION:NON Data Mode On PROTECTION:OUI…
  • Page 541
    English Display Extrnl Page 1 RECH. EXT. 1 FWD(ALL) Ext1234 RNV(TOUS)PST1234 FWD(B/NA)Ext1000 RNV(O/SR)PST1000 FWD(BSY) Ext2345 RNV(OCC) PST2345 FWD(CO) 91201431 RNV(LR) 91201431 FWD(From)Ext1234 RNV(DE) FWD(NA) Ext3456 RNV(SR) PST3456 FWD(NACO) 91234 RNV(SRLR) 91234 FWD Cancel E1234 ANNUL. RNV P1234 FWD/DND Cancel ANNULER RNV/NPD Gone Home Gone Home Group Page 01…
  • Page 542
    Appendix English Display In a Meeting In a Meeting Locked NO. : 123 CODE VERR. : 123 Log Locked :123 REG FERME : 123 Message Cancel MESSAGE ANNULE MODEM command 1 COMMANDE MODEM 1 MW at Ext 1234 MESS. PST 1234 MW Not Accepted MESS ATT.
  • Page 543
    English Display Ringer : *** SONN. : *** SP:************ HP:************ Transfer to CO TRANSFERT A LR Try Again RESSAYER Unlocked DEVERROUILLE Will Return Soon Will Return Soon Provides you with a caller’s information, such as his name and telephone number, on the CO line assigned to receive Caller ID service calls.
  • Page 544
    Appendix Examples – in Station Programming mode English Display Account COMPTE C.W. Tone1 TON.APPEL1 Clear Ready? ANNULER DONNEES? CO-10101 LR-10101 Conference CONFERENCE 1400:CO Lock 1400:LR VERR. 1400:ICM Lock 1400:INTCM VERR. 1400:Unlock 1400:DEVERR. Ext-1234 PST-1234 FWD/DND RNV/NPD Hands-free:Off MAINS LIB.:NON Hands-free:On MAINS LIB.:OUI Handset COMBINE…
  • Page 545
    Examples – in Station Programming mode English Display Pref.Out:ICM SOR.PREF:INTCM Pref.Out:Idle SOR.PREF:LIB. Pref.Out:No SOR.PREF:NON Save SAUVEGARDE Tone Call APPEL-TON. Tone Type-2 TON. TYPE-2 TRK GRP-03 GR LR VTR-1010 TMV-1010 Voice Call APPEL VOCAL 092-555-2111 092-555-2111 Conditions • If the displayed characters exceed 16 digits, «&» is shown at the right-hand edge. •…
  • Page 546: Feature Numbers List

    Appendix 6.1.2 Feature Numbers List Numbers listed below are the initial factory settings (default value). There are flexible feature numbers and fixed feature numbers. The flexible feature numbers can be changed by System Programming <Section 2.3 Numbering Plan in the Programming Guide>. Feature 1st hundred block extension 2nd hundred block extension…

  • Page 547
    Feature Call Pickup, Group Call Pickup Deny set/cancel Call Waiting set/cancel Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP) Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR)/ Calling Name Identification Restriction (CNIR) Data Line Security set/cancel Dial Information (CTI) Do Not Disturb (DND) set/cancel Doorphone Call calling Doorphone Call door open Electronic Station Lockout set Electronic Station Lockout cancel…
  • Page 548
    Appendix Feature Paging — All Paging — External Paging — External Answer/TAFAS Answer Paging — Group Paging — Group Answer Paging Deny set/cancel Paralleled Telephone Connection set/cancel Pickup Dialing (Hot Line) assign/set/cancel Quick Dial 1-8 Redial, Last Number Remote DND (Do Not Disturb) set/cancel Remote FWD (Call Forwarding) Cancel-Once Station Program clear Station Speed Dialing…
  • Page 549
    hhmm hh: hour(01-12) mm: minute(00-59) While a busy tone is heard: Automatic Callback Busy Busy Station Signaling (BSS) / Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA) / Whisper OHCA Executive Busy Override While a Do Not Disturb tone is heard: Do Not Disturb Override While calling or talking: Account Code Delimiter Alternate Calling — Ring / Voice…
  • Page 550
    Appendix example, to set Call Waiting, the feature number for «Call Waiting» must be followed by «1» and to cancel it, the same feature number should be followed by «0.» • Fixed Feature Numbers Type-1 or Type-2 can be selected by System Programming. (Default = Type-1) Programming Guide References •…
  • Page 551: Tone List

    6.1.3 Tone List <TONE> Confirmation Tone 1 Confirmation Tone 2 Confirmation Tone 3 Confirmation Tone 4 Dial Tone 1 Dial Tone 2 Dial Tone 3 Dial Tone 4 Busy Tone Reorder Tone Ringback Tone 1 Ringback Tone 2 Do Not Disturb (DND) Tone CO-CO Line Call Limit Warning Tone…

  • Page 552
    Appendix <TONE> Call Waiting Tone 1 (outside/intercom) Call Waiting Tone 2 (outside) Call Waiting Tone 2 (intercom) Hold Alarm Tone <RING TONE> Outside Calls / Outside Call Hold Recall Intercom Calls / Intercom Call Hold Recall Doorphone Calls / Timed Reminder Callback Ringing (Camp-on Recall) 15 s…
  • Page 553: Troubleshooting

    6.1.4 Troubleshooting If a power failure should occur… Your KX-TD500 System enables conversations between specific CO lines and extensions (Power Failure Transfer), and supports system data backup. Power Failure Transfer Specific extensions are automatically connected straight to specific CO lines. This provides CO line conversations between the pre-assigned extensions and CO lines: •…

  • Page 554
    Copyright: This manual is copyrighted by Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. (PCC). You may print out this manual solely for internal use with this model. Except above, you may not reproduce this manual in any form, in whole or part, without the prior written consent of PCC and its licensee.

background image

Инструкция по эксплуатации

Модель

KX-TCD500RU

Перед использованием телефона прочтите эти инструкции

по эксплуатации и сохраните их для будущих применений.

Перед первым включением заряжайте аккумуляторные

батареи в течение примерно 7 часов.

По

дг

от

ов

ка

к использов

анию

Бесп

ро
вод

н

о

й

те

л

ефо
н

По
лез

н

а

я

информаци

я

Функции АОН и

Caller ID

Цифровой беспроводный телефон

Содержание

Подготовка к использованию

Перед первым включением…………………….2
Важная информация………………………………5
Расположение органов управления ………..6
Смысл пиктограмм над
программными клавишами……………………..7
Значения символов и функции клавиш……8
Дисплей…………………………………………………9
Настройка ……………………………………………10

Беспроводной телефон

Пользование телефоном………………………14
АОН и Caller ID …………………………………….19
Меню списка ………………………………………..23
Использование Телефонной книги ………..26
Таблица меню настроек ……………………….34
Настройки трубки …………………………………36
Настройки базового блока…………………….46
Одновременное использование
нескольких аппаратов…………………………..52
Уоки-токи……………………………………………..59

Полезная информация

Использование клипсы для
ношения трубки на ремне……………………..62
Дополнительная гарнитура …………………..62
Установка на стене ………………………………62
Прежде чем обращаться за помощью……63
Важные сведения…………………………………66
Телефонная книга ………………………………..68
Указатель…………………………………………….69
Техническая информация …………………….70

500RU_RU.book Page 1 Wednesday, December 10, 2003 10:36 AM

  • Contents

  • Table of Contents

  • Bookmarks

Quick Links

DIG

ITAL

SUP

ER

HYB

RID

SYS

TEM

RUN

OFF

LINE

ALA

RM

Digital Super Hybrid System

Features Guide

KX-TD500

Model No.

Please read this manual before connecting the Digital Super Hybrid System

and save this manual for future reference.

Thank you for purchasing the Panasonic Model KX-TD500, Digital Super Hybrid System.

loading

Related Manuals for Panasonic KX-TD500

Summary of Contents for Panasonic KX-TD500

  • Page 1
    LINE Digital Super Hybrid System Features Guide KX-TD500 Model No. Please read this manual before connecting the Digital Super Hybrid System and save this manual for future reference. Thank you for purchasing the Panasonic Model KX-TD500, Digital Super Hybrid System.
  • Page 2
    This Features Guide is designed to serve as an overall features reference for the Panasonic Digital Super Hybrid System, KX-TD500. It explains what the KX-TD500 System can do, and how to obtain the most out of its many features and capabilities.
  • Page 3
    Provides step-by-step instructions for performing System Programming using the Maintenance Console software for a PC. User Manual Designed for users of Digital Super Hybrid System, KX-TD500. The focus is Digital Proprietary Telephones (DPTs), Digital DSS Consoles, Single Line Telephones (SLTs) and their features.
  • Page 4: Table Of Contents

    EXtra Device Port (XDP) … 10 1.2 System Administration… 11 System Programming and Diagnosis with Personal Computer … 11 Traffic Measurement… 14 User Programming with Proprietary Telephone … 15 1.3 System Features … 16 Account Code Entry … 16 Automatic Calling Cancel… 18 Automatic Configuration …

  • Page 5
    T1 Carrier …97 Tenant Service …99 Time-Out, Variable …101 Trunk Busy-Out …104 Trunk Group …108 Trunk Route Control…110 Walking Station …111 1.4 Fault Recovery/Diagnostics …112 Local Alarm…112 Power Failure Re-Start …115 Power Failure Transfer …116 1.5 Attended Features …117 Caller ID Service …117 Caller ID Service on T1 Line …119 Direct In Lines (DIL)…121 Direct Inward Dialing (DID) …124…
  • Page 6
    Table of Contents Quick Dialing… 210 Redial … 211 Station Speed Dialing … 213 System Speed Dialing… 214 1.8 Ringing Features … 216 Do Not Disturb (DND) … 216 Log-In/Log-Out … 218 Station Hunting … 220 Timed Reminder (Wake-Up Call)… 222 Timed Reminder, Remote (Wake-Up Call) …
  • Page 7
    Hold Recall …288 Ringing Tone Selection …290 Ringing, Delayed …291 Ringing, Discriminating …292 1.14 Paging Features …293 Paging …293 1.15 Proprietary Telephone Features…296 Background Music (BGM)…296 DSS Console…298 Handset Microphone Mute …301 Handset/Headset Selection …302 Microphone Mute …303 Station Program Clear …304 Station Programming…306…
  • Page 8
    Table of Contents Calling Name Identification Restriction (CNIR)… 361 2.3 ISDN Attended Features … 362 Direct Inward Dialing (DID) … 362 Multiple Directory Number (MDN) Ringing Service … 365 3 TIE Line Features … 369 3.1 TIE Line Features… 370 Outside (CO) Line and TIE Line Connection…
  • Page 9: General Features

    General Features Section 1 General Features Features Guide…

  • Page 10: System Expansion

    Installation Manual References • 2.4.13 Extra Device Port (XDP) Connection Programming Guide References • 1.4 Extension Port Assignment – Parallel / XDP (DHLC card) Features Guide References 1.3 System Features • Paralleled Telephone User Manual References Not applicable. Features Guide…

  • Page 11: System Administration

    1.2 System Administration System Programming and Diagnosis with Personal Computer Description The KX-TD500 system can be programmed and administered using a Personal Computer (PC). The Programming Guide is required to perform PC Programming. There are two programming methods: On-Site Programming By connecting a PC to your system, System Programming and maintenance can be performed locally.

  • Page 12
    • If you have the backup system data, you can find the password by loading the backup system data to your PC and check the Password with programming screen. • If you don’t have the backup system data, you have to program again or contact your Panasonic dealers. Conditions • One Time One Access Only one device is allowed to perform System Programming at a time.
  • Page 13
    Installation Manual References • 2.6.3 RMT Card (KX-T96196) • 2.6.4 ERMT Card (KX-TD50197) Programming Guide References • 10.2 External Modem 1/2 • 10.3 External Modem 2/2 • 10.6 System Parameters – [Password] System Programming – Protection Level 1 – [Password] System Programming – Protection Level 2 –…
  • Page 14: Traffic Measurement

    General Features Traffic Measurement Description Provides current traffic information about following items individually. You can collect and display the traffic information using the Maintenance Console PC. Station Trunk Group Operator Incoming Group Please refer to Section «4.3.1 Traffic Information» in the Installation Manual. Conditions None Installation Manual References…

  • Page 15: User Programming With Proprietary Telephone

    User Programming with Proprietary Telephone Description Allows a PT user to assign or change the following System Programming items at his own PT. Access No. Date and Time Set System Speed Dialing Number Set System Speed Dialing Name Set Extension Name Set…

  • Page 16: System Features

    General Features 1.3 System Features Account Code Entry Description An Account Code (max. 10 digits) is used to identify incoming and outgoing CO calls for accounting and billing purposes. [For Outgoing CO Calls] One of the following three Account Code Entry modes is selected for each extension on a Class of Service basis: Verified-All Calls mode: An extension user must always enter a pre-assigned account code when making CO calls.

  • Page 17
    • TRS Level Each account code is appended with unique TRS Level for «Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry» feature. • Emergency numbers Regardless of the Account Code Entry mode setting, emergency numbers can be dialed out without entering an account code. •…
  • Page 18: Automatic Calling Cancel

    General Features Automatic Calling Cancel Description If this feature is enabled, the system automatically disconnects the CO line in use when the CO call is not answered in a specified period of time. Conditions • This feature applies to the following trunks: T1 (DID, TIE), DID, ISDN (PRI23, BRI) Programming Guide References •…

  • Page 19: Automatic Configuration

    Features Guide References 1.3 System Features • Integration, DPT Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone [DPT] integration; e.g., KX-TVS100). Features Guide…

  • Page 20
    General Features User Manual References Not applicable. Features Guide…
  • Page 21: Background Music (Bgm)-External

    – External BGM On / Off • 4.6 External Paging – BGM – BGM Source Features Guide References 1.15 Proprietary Telephone Features • Background Music (BGM) User Manual References • 4.4.2 Background Music (BGM) — External Features Guide General Features…

  • Page 22: Calling Party Control (Cpc) Signal Detection

    The Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal is an on-hook indication (disconnect signal) sent from the Central Office when the telephone is hung up at the other end. To maintain efficient utilization of CO lines, the system monitors their status and when CPC Signal is detected from a line, the system disconnects the line and alerts the extension with a reorder tone.

  • Page 23
    General Features User Manual References Not applicable. Features Guide…
  • Page 24: Class Of Service (Cos)

    General Features Class of Service (COS) Description Used to define a set of services available to the extension user. Up to 96 different types of Class of Service can be established by System Programming. A Class of Service number is assigned to each extension by System Programming.

  • Page 25
    Conditions • Walking COS The extension user can make a toll call at other lower level COS extensions (toll / outward restricted) by employing his own higher level COS temporarily. • Switching COS Two different levels of COS, Primary COS and Secondary COS, are assigned to all extensions.
  • Page 26: Dial Type Selection

    General Features Dial Type Selection Description Used to select the desired dialing mode for each CO line regardless of originating call extension (rotary or tone). There are two dialing modes available: DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency) Mode The dialing signal from an extension, either tone or rotary, is converted to tone dialing. DTMF signals are transmitted to the CO line.

  • Page 27: Dil 1:N Group

    DIL 1:N Group Description Used to group extensions or Extension Groups or both so that an incoming CO call comes in on multiple extensions simultaneously. DIL 1:N is one of the five different types of Incoming Group. Up to 96 DIL (Direct In Lines) 1:N Groups can be set up in the system. Each group can include up to 72 extensions or Extension Groups or both.

  • Page 28: Door Opener

    General Features Door Opener Description Allows the extension users to unlock the door for a visitor from their extensions. The door can be unlocked by extension users assigned as the destination of doorphone calls anytime by dialing the appropriate feature number. However, during a doorphone call, any extension user can open the door from their extensions by dialing «5»…

  • Page 29: Extension Group

    Extension Group Description To support efficient utilization of extensions, they can be grouped together as an Extension Group. Any extension in the Extension Group can pick up a call ringing at another extension within the same Extension Group (Call Pickup — Group). Extension Group is used to direct incoming calls (both extension and outside) to a group of answering extensions associated with the type of incoming calls.

  • Page 30
    General Features Programming Guide References • 1.4 Extension Port Assignment – Group No. • 2.3 Numbering Plan – Login / Logout • 3.3 Extension Group – Group No. – FDN – Tenant No. – [Overflow Setting] Destination – Day / Night –…
  • Page 31
    General Features User Manual References Not applicable. Features Guide…
  • Page 32: External Modem Control

    • Error Correction is not necessary. Notes • Not all modems will be compatible. Please contact the Panasonic Bulletin Board System (BBS) at (201)271-3346 for a list of recommended modems. • Please refer to the modem instructions as the AT Commands depend on the manufacturer of your model.

  • Page 33
    • The connection chart for the external modem (25-pin) is as follows: Serial Interface (RS-232C) port on the main unit Signal Name SD (TXD) RD (RXD) ER (DTR) • An AT Command (for initialization, enabling Automatic Answer, etc.) can only be programmed by Serial Interface / remote programming software.
  • Page 34: Flexible Numbering

    General Features Flexible Numbering Description The numbers used for the access codes of system features and the numbers used for extension numbers are not fixed. They can be set as required, provided there are no conflicts. Feature numbers can be from 1 to 4 digits, utilizing numbers «0 through 9″ as well as » » and «#.»…

  • Page 35
    Absent Message Set / Cancel Timed Reminder Confirm / Set / Cancel Station Lock Set / Cancel Night Mode Set / Cancel Parallel telephone mode External BGM On / Off Live Call Screening Call Log Incoming, Overwrite Mode Call Log Incoming, Log Lock…
  • Page 36
    105-120 Reserved Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone [DPT] integration; e.g., KX-TVS100). In addition to the flexible feature numbers, fixed feature numbers are provided on the next page.
  • Page 37
    • Flexible feature numbers can only be dialed while a dial tone is heard. • If » » or «#» is included in a feature number, it will not be possible for users with dial pulse (DP) telephone to access the feature. • Feature Number Conflicts Examples: 1 and 11, 0 and 00, 2 and 21, 10 and 101, 32 and 321, etc.
  • Page 38
    General Features Programming Guide References • 1.4 Extension Port Assignment – Attribute – DN • 2.3 Numbering Plan • 2.8 System Option – Fixed Feature Number Features Guide References None User Manual References • 6.1.2 Feature Numbers List Features Guide…
  • Page 39: Floating Station

    Floating Station Description Virtual extension numbers can be assigned to resources to make them appear as real extensions. These numbers are defined as Floating Directory Numbers (FDN). The following resources can have FDNs: Max. number Resource Name of FDN External Pager (TAFAS) OGM Group (DISA)

  • Page 40
    General Features Programming Guide References • 2.3 Numbering Plan – 1st Hundred Block Extension – 2nd Hundred Block Extension – 3rd Hundred Block Extension – 4th Hundred Block Extension – 5th Hundred Block Extension – 6th Hundred Block Extension – 7th Hundred Block Extension –…
  • Page 41: Host Pbx Access

    Description The system may be installed behind an existing host PBX. This is performed by connecting (extension) lines from the host PBX to CO line ports of the KX-TD500 System. Conditions • To enable Host PBX Access, put the host PBX line in a Trunk Group. The extension user can access the host PBX by selecting that CO line.

  • Page 42: Incoming Group

    General Features Incoming Group Description To support efficient utilization of extensions, they can be grouped together as an Incoming Group. Incoming Group is used to direct incoming calls (both extension and outside) to a group of answering extensions associated with the type of incoming calls. Up to 96 Incoming Groups can be created in the system.

  • Page 43
    When «VM» or «AA» is specified in the «Group Type» setting of an Extension Group, and «DIL 1:N» is specified in the «Group Type» setting of an Incoming Group, all the extensions belonging to the Extension Group work as a VM or AA group. •…
  • Page 44
    General Features 1.8 Ringing Features • Log-In/Log-Out • Station Hunting User Manual References Not applicable. Features Guide…
  • Page 45: Integration, Automated Attendant (Aa) Service

    The Automated Attendant (AA) Service, provided by the VPS, answers incoming calls and then routes the caller to the desired extension automatically. If AA Service Integration is enabled, the KX-TD500 System transmits the Call Status Code (busy, answered, ringing, disconnected, etc.) to an AA extension before sending the normal call progress tones.

  • Page 46
    General Features Code (default) Reorder Tone DND Tone Extension Answer Forwarded to Voice Mail (Ringing) Forwarded to Voice Mail (Busy) Forwarded to Ext. (Ringing) Confirmation Tone Extension Disconnection Conditions • Start AA Service after FWD, IRNA of CO call When an outside call is routed to a VM port by Call Forwarding or IRNA feature, AA Service can be activated instead of VM Service by System Programming.
  • Page 47
    Programming Guide References • 1.4 Extension Port Assignment – Group No. • 1.5 VPS (DPT) Port Assignment • 2.3 Numbering Plan – Login / Logout • 3.3 Extension Group – FDN – Tenant No. – [Overflow Setting] Destination – Day / Night –…
  • Page 48: Integration, Dpt

    • 2.4.6 DHLC Card (KX-TD50170) • 2.4.7 DLC Card (KX-TD50172) Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone [DPT] integration; e.g., KX-TVS100). Features Guide…

  • Page 49
    Programming Guide References • 1.2 Slot Assignment • 1.4 Extension Port Assignment – Card No. – Attribute • 1.5 VPS (DPT) Port Assignment – TVS No. – VPS Card – Type – Jack No. – Port No. – [Ext No.1] DN –…
  • Page 50
    General Features 1.9 Answering Features • Live Call Screening (LCS) 1.12 Conversation Features • Two-Way Recording into the Voice Mail User Manual References Not applicable. Features Guide…
  • Page 51: Integration, Inband

    Voice Mail (VM) Service Integration This integration works together with Call Forwarding and IRNA features. When activated, the KX-TD500 System sends the digits of the mailbox number of the called extension with DTMF tone to the VPS before connecting the caller.

  • Page 52
    General Features Programming Guide References • 3.2 Trunk Group – Intercept Destination – Day / Night • 3.3 Extension Group – FDN – Tenant No. – [Overflow Setting] Destination – Day / Night – Group Type • 4.2 Trunk Line –…
  • Page 53
    General Features User Manual References Not applicable. Features Guide…
  • Page 54: Integration, Voice Mail (Vm) Service

    If VM Service Integration is enabled, the KX-TD500 System connects the caller to a VM extension and sends the mailbox number (Follow-on ID) of the corresponding extension so that the caller can leave the message in the mailbox of the corresponding extension without knowing their mailbox number.

  • Page 55
    System Explanation Call Forwarding (All Calls, Busy, No Answer, Busy / No Answer) to a VM extension If the extension user sets Call Forwarding to a VM extension, the call directed to that extension is forwarded to a VM extension with Follow-on ID of the extension user. Intercom Call Outside Call…
  • Page 56
    General Features Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA) to a VM extension If an incoming CO call directed to a certain extension is not answered within a specified period of time (IRNA timer), the call is redirected to a VM extension with Follow-on ID of the corresponding extension.
  • Page 57
    Conditions • IRNA of DIL 1:N calls If a DIL 1:N call (an outside call which comes in on multiple extensions simultaneously) is not answered within a specified period of time, the system redirects the call to the pre- determined covering extension. If a VM extension is assigned as the covering extension, the VM port automatically starts the AA (Automated Attendant) service of the VPS.
  • Page 58
    General Features Programming Guide References • 1.4 Extension Port Assignment – Group No. • 1.5 VPS (DPT) Port Assignment • 2.3 Numbering Plan – Message Waiting Set / Cancel / Call Back – Call FWD — Do Not Disturb Set / Cancel –…
  • Page 59
    1.11 Transferring Features • Call Forwarding • Intercept Routing 1.17 Display Features • Message Waiting User Manual References • 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment • 3.2.5 [005] Flexible CO Button Assignment • 4.3.82 Voice Mail Transfer • 4.3.83 VPS Integration Features Guide General Features…
  • Page 60: Integration, Vps

    How the KX-TD500 System communicate with VPS: Inband Integration The KX-TD500 System sends the VPS several codes with DTMF tone via speech path. Available with not only Panasonic KX-TVS series VPSs but with most other manufactures’ VPSs that fully support Inband Integration.

  • Page 61
    Outline sketch of VPS Integration VPS Integration Conditions None Programming Guide References System Programming is not required. Features Guide References None User Manual References Not applicable. Features Guide Inband VM Service Integration Integration [Follow-on ID] AA Service Integration [Call Status Code] Automatic Configuration Live Call Screening Integration…
  • Page 62: Limited Call Duration

    General Features Limited Call Duration Description Limited Call Duration is a system programmable feature that disconnects a CO call when a specified timer expires. A warning tone is sent to the extension user 15 seconds, 10 seconds, and 5 seconds before the time limit. Conditions •…

  • Page 63
    General Features User Manual References Not applicable. Features Guide…
  • Page 64: Lockout

    General Features Lockout Description If one party in a conversation goes on-hook, they both are disconnected from the speech path automatically. A reorder tone is sent to the off-hook party before it is disconnected. No operation is necessary. Conditions • If nothing is dialed within a certain period of time after the other party goes on-hook, a reorder tone is sent to the extension user and then is disconnected from the speech path.

  • Page 65: Manager Extension

    Manager Extension Description One extension in each tenant can be assigned as the Manager Extension. This extension can perform the following Manager services: <System / Tenant> • BGM—External turn on / off • Local Alarm Indication • OGM (outgoing message) record / play •…

  • Page 66: Mixed Station Capabilities

    General Features Mixed Station Capabilities Description The KX-TD500 system supports a wide range of telephone sets as follows: • Digital Proprietary Telephones (DPTs) • Analog Proprietary Telephones (APTs) • Single Line Rotary Telephones — Dial Pulse Signaling • Single Line Touch Tone Telephones — Tone Dialing •…

  • Page 67
    Installation Manual References • 2.4 Extension Cards • 2.5.6 BRI Card (KX-TD50288) • 2.5.7 PRI23 Card (KX-TD50290) Programming Guide References System Programming is not required. Features Guide References None User Manual References Not applicable. Features Guide General Features…
  • Page 68: Music On Hold

    • 2.2 Tenant – Music on Hold Source – BGM Source • 2.8 System Option – Sound source during transfer Features Guide References 1.10 Holding Features • Call Hold • Consultation Hold 1.15 Proprietary Telephone Features • Background Music (BGM) Features Guide…

  • Page 69
    General Features User Manual References Not applicable. Features Guide…
  • Page 70: Night Service

    General Features Night Service Description The system supports both Night and Day modes of operation in a different arrangement. The Day mode includes the Lunch and Break mode. Only a DIL destination can perform in Lunch / Break mode. And, any other feature can perform in Day mode. The system operation for originating and receiving calls can be different for day and night modes.

  • Page 71
    • The following programming items may be assigned in a different way between day mode and night mode: (2.2 Tenant) — Alert Extension – Day / Night (2.4 Class of Service (COS)) — TRS Level – Day / Night (2.4.1 Trunk Group Setting) —…
  • Page 72
    General Features Programming Guide References • 2.2 Tenant – Alert Extension – Day / Night – DAY / NIGHT Switching Mode – Day (SUN-SAT) – Night (SUN-SAT) – Lunch-Start (SUN-SAT) – Lunch-End (SUN-SAT) – Break-Start (SUN-SAT) – Break-End (SUN-SAT) • 2.3 Numbering Plan –…
  • Page 73: Off Premise Extension (Opx)

    OPX card (KX-T96185) or T1 Digital Trunk card (KX-T96187), and OPX Power Unit (KX-T96186) are required. • Ring Tone Pattern Any call to an OPX telephone rings like a CO call. • Call Restriction Calls between OPX and Doorphone are restricted. That is, both «Calling from OPX to Doorphone»…

  • Page 74: Operator Group

    General Features Operator Group Description It is efficient to handle a high volume of operator-seeking calls by a group of extensions called «Operator Group,» which can consist of one or more extensions. [Operator Features] The extension assigned as an Operator has the ability to perform the following operations: <System / Tenant>…

  • Page 75
    (1) Outline sketch of Operator feature 1. When «Ringing Type» is set to «Multi» An incoming call (intercom / outside call) arrives at all Operator extensions at the same time. Calls have arrived at an Operator Group 3rd call in the queue 2nd call in the queue 1st call Operator Group…
  • Page 76
    General Features (2) What if all Operator extensions are busy? Overflow Destination is not programmed. Intercept Destination is not programmed. Waiting Queue All Busy Outside calls Waiting Queue Intercept Destination is programmed. (Intercept Time) Intercept Destination Intercom calls Waiting Queue Overflow Destination is programmed.
  • Page 77
    General Features All Logout «Calls to Empty Group» «Calls to Empty Group» are allowed. are not allowed. Intercom calls Outside calls Intercom calls Outside calls Waiting Queue Waiting Queue Disconnected Overflow Destination Overflow Destination Overflow Destination Overflow Destination is not programmed. is programmed.
  • Page 78
    General Features Conditions • Tenant Service If «Tenant Service» is employed, each tenant can have its own unique «Operator Group» in the Extension Group independently. Programming Guide References • 1.4 Extension Port Assignment – Group No. • 2.3 Numbering Plan –…
  • Page 79: Outgoing Message (Ogm)

    Outgoing Message (OGM) Description Allows the Manager or an Operator to record and playback Outgoing Messages. The following three types of Outgoing Messages can be recorded. DISA message: This message is played when an outside caller accesses the system via DISA line. Timed Reminder (wake-up) message: This message is used in Timed Reminder.

  • Page 80
    General Features Features Guide References 1.3 System Features • Outgoing Message (OGM) Group 1.5 Attended Features • Direct Inward System Access (DISA) • Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) 1.8 Ringing Features • Timed Reminder (Wake-Up Call) • Timed Reminder, Remote (Wake-Up Call) User Manual References •…
  • Page 81: Outgoing Message (Ogm) Group

    Outgoing Message (OGM) Group Description OGM resources on the DISA card can be grouped together as an OGM Group. Up to eight OGM Groups can be created in the system. Conditions • Tenant Service If Tenant Service is employed, the affiliation of OGM Group should be decided by System Programming.

  • Page 82: Paralleled Telephone

    • The PT can be used to perform normal operations whether or not the SLT is enabled. • In the DPT + SLT combination, if one telephone goes off-hook while the other telephone is on a call, the call is switched to the former.

  • Page 83
    • 1.4 Extension Port Assignment – Parallel / XDP (DHLC card) – Parallel / XDP (HLC card) Features Guide References 1.1 System Expansion • EXtra Device Port (XDP) User Manual References • 4.3.59 Paralleled Telephone Connection Features Guide General Features…
  • Page 84: Phantom Extension

    General Features Phantom Extension Description This allows the system to route the calls to a phantom extension. The call to a phantom extension arrives at the extension who has the corresponding Phantom button. One phantom extension number can be assigned to multiple extensions so that the caller can ring a group of extensions simultaneously.

  • Page 85
    User Manual References • 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment • 2.2.10 Phantom Button Ringing On/Off Assignment • 3.2.5 [005] Flexible CO Button Assignment • 4.3.61 Phantom Extension Features Guide General Features…
  • Page 86: Released Link Operation

    General Features Released Link Operation Description When Released Link Operation is enabled, an extension user will be automatically released from a call (extension, outside) after transferring it to the destination, if the destination extension is idle. This feature simplifies the transfer operation by eliminating the need for going on-hook or pressing the RELEASE button after transferring the call.

  • Page 87: Remote Station Feature Control

    Remote Station Feature Control Description Allows both the Manager and the Operators to set and cancel the following features for other extensions. Remote Station Lock Control Used to lock other extensions so that no one can make an outside call or an intercom call (except an operator call) from those extensions.

  • Page 88
    General Features 1.9 Answering Features • Live Call Screening (LCS) 1.11 Transferring Features • Call Forwarding User Manual References • 4.4.3 Call Log Incoming, Log Lock • 4.4.4 Live Call Screening (LCS) Password Clear • 4.4.7 Remote DND (Do Not Disturb) Control •…
  • Page 89: Remote Station Lock Control

    Remote Station Lock Control Description Allows the Manager and the Operators to lock other extensions remotely, that is, from their own extensions. Locked extensions cannot be used for making outside calls or intercom calls or both (except calls to the Operators and the emergency calls) depending on the setting. Conditions •…

  • Page 90: Secret Dialing

    • One-Touch Dialing • System Speed Dialing • Station Speed Dialing (Special display features) When a display PT user makes a call using a telephone number with Secret Dialing, all or part of the number does not appear on the display. Conditions •…

  • Page 91: Station Message Detail Recording (Smdr)

    Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Description Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) automatically records detailed call information for CO calls. A printer connected to SIO #2 port of RS-232C on the basic shelf can be used to print incoming and outgoing CO calls. To print the call records, use the program «SMDR» which allows you to print out the following records: •…

  • Page 92
    General Features <Type-B> Date Time T Ext 15/02/00 06:42PM 1 E1009 16/02/00 01:29PM 1 E1001 16/02/00 01:29PM 1 E1001 16/02/00 01:29PM 1 E1001 02/02/00 03:13PM 1 E1001 02/02/00 03:13PM E1001 02/02/00 03:13PM E1001 02/02/00 03:47PM 1 E1001 02/02/00 03:47PM 1 E1001 02/02/00 03:47PM 1 E1001…
  • Page 93
    ARS procedure will be printed out by SMDR. • The KX-TD500 System can store up to 1000 call information data. If more than 1000 calls are originated or received, the oldest data is overwritten by the newest one.
  • Page 94
    General Features • SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) records the detailed Timed Reminder information and prints it out automatically when the Timed Reminder starts and it is answered or not answered. This can be enabled or disabled by System Programming. •…
  • Page 95
    General Features User Manual References Not applicable. Features Guide…
  • Page 96: System Data Default Set

    System Data Default Set Description This system permits re-initialization of system-programmed data. Starting up the KX-TD500 system with default values can be done using the Operation Switch (MODE) on the CPU card <Section «2.10.2 CPU Rotary-Switch Features» in the Installation Manual>.

  • Page 97: T1 Carrier

    • Hardware Requirements T1 Digital Trunk card (KX-T96187) and user-supplied CSU (Channel Service Unit) are required to utilize T1 carrier with the KX-TD500 System. • Trunk Interface This card supports five different trunk interfaces to provide desired connection at minimum expense.

  • Page 98
    General Features Programming Guide References • 1.2 Slot Assignment – System Clock Status – Clock Configuration Mode – Clock Configuration Master Card No. – Clock Configuration Priority 1 — 8 • 1.6 T1 Port Assignment Features Guide References None User Manual References Not applicable.
  • Page 99: Tenant Service

    Tenant Service Description The KX-TD500 System can be shared with up to eight tenants. When tenant service is utilized, each tenant can use the system resource differently and independently from other tenants. This enables the configuration of more than two systems which, in each case, are suited to different tenants.

  • Page 100
    General Features Conditions • The following features do not work between extensions if they do not belong to the same tenant. — Call Forwarding — Executive Busy Override — Barge-In — Executive Busy Override — Extension — Privacy Release Note •…
  • Page 101: Time-Out, Variable

    Time-Out, Variable Description Provides timers to control various features or functions. The following timers are programmable: System Data Hold Recall Time Transfer Recall Time Pickup Dial Waiting Time Call Duration Count Start Time First Digit Time Inter-digit Time Intercept Time Call Forwarding — No Answer Time Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration Time CO-to-CO Line Call Duration Time…

  • Page 102
    General Features Trunk Group Data Disconnecting Time Pause Time Flash Time Pause Time before Flash Signal Extension Group Data Overflow Setting — Timer (for Operator) Incoming Group Data Ringing Type (for DIL 1:N) Overflow Setting — Timer (for Terminate / Operator / UCD) Trunk Data CPC Signal Detection Time (Outgoing /…
  • Page 103
    Programming Guide References • 2.5 System Timer • 3.2 Trunk Group • 3.3 Extension Group • 3.5 Incoming Group • 4.2 Trunk Line • 4.3 Extension Line Features Guide References None User Manual References Not applicable. Features Guide General Features…
  • Page 104: Trunk Busy-Out

    General Features Trunk Busy-Out Description Allows the Manager and an Operator to busy out a CO line to prevent extension users from accessing it. [The details of Trunk Busy-out feature] There are the following two types of trunk port relay status which is set to Trunk Busy-out. Busy (Loop Relay On): making the line busy by hardware Idle (Loop Relay Off): making the line busy by software The Central Office recognizes a trunk line as shown in the table «The Specification of Trunk…

  • Page 105
    The Specification of Trunk Busy-out On Card Type The status of Trunk Busy-out set to «On» LCOT Idle status (Default) Loop OFF ELCOT Idle status (Default) Loop OFF GCOT Idle status (Default) Loop OFF + Not connected to Ring FG Idle status (Fixed) Features Guide…
  • Page 106
    PBX does not issue a wink signal. So the Central Office cannot complete the call. A reorder tone is returned to the caller. If the Central Office is a KX-TD500, the caller will see on hiss phone display, «CO Not Assigned.» Features Guide…
  • Page 107
    General Features User Manual References • 4.4.12 Trunk Busy-Out Setting Features Guide…
  • Page 108: Trunk Group

    General Features Trunk Group Description All CO lines and TIE lines in the system can be grouped into up to 48 Trunk Groups. This allows extension users to call outside parties without designating a specific CO line, since a CO line is automatically selected from the designated Trunk Group. All CO lines belonging to a Trunk Group follow the assignment determined for that Trunk Group.

  • Page 109
    Programming Guide References • 2.3 Numbering Plan – Trunk Group Access • 2.4 Class of Service (COS) – Trunk Group Setting • 2.7 Trunk to Trunk Restriction • 3.2 Trunk Group – Intercept Destination – Day / Night – Pause Time before Flash Signal –…
  • Page 110: Trunk Route Control

    General Features Trunk Route Control Description Allows the Manager and the Operators to make a call using a specific trunk. They can verify the status of the specified trunk. Conditions • Executive Busy Override When the outside call made using a specific trunk is busy on another call, the Manager or the Operators can join the existing outside call by dialing «2»…

  • Page 111: Walking Station

    One-Touch dialing memory remain the same after the re-location of the extension. Conditions • The telephone type (PT, SLT, OPX) must be the same at the source and destination. • Walking Station is not available in the following cases: – If the extension is connected to a DHLC card (KX-TD50170).

  • Page 112: Fault Recovery/Diagnostics

    General Features 1.4 Fault Recovery/Diagnostics Local Alarm Description If a system error is detected during on-line communication mode, the Alarm light on the Manager extension turns red. An error message will be shown on the display PT of the Manager by pressing the red lit Alarm button. If a major error occurs, minor errors will be neglected and only the first major error message will be displayed.

  • Page 113
    Error Message List (Priority order) Error Message OGM LOS DISA OGM is lost ERR xyy OPX POW OPX power failure ERR xyy SMDR DSP1LNK DSP-1 link failure ERR xyy ERR xyy CD FLT Regarding the T1 card, please refer to Reference Guide for T1 Digital Trunk card. [Legend] Error Message Shelf Number (1-3)
  • Page 114
    General Features (When the problem is solved) A/B/C/D: LED on PT…ON (no change) LED on Top Shelf / Card…ON LED on PT / Top Shelf…ON When the problem is solved, the Alarm light goes off and the display PT shows the initial display.
  • Page 115: Power Failure Re-Start

    Power Failure Re-Start Description When turning back on the electricity, the system re-starts the stored data automatically. Before re-starting, the system records the error log if necessary. Conditions • Memory Protection In the event of a power failure, system memory is protected by a factory-provided lithium battery.

  • Page 116: Power Failure Transfer

    • DC Power Source If DC power is available by the backup batteries even if the AC power fails, the KX-TD500 System will not change the current connection to the Auxiliary connection. Installation Manual References •…

  • Page 117: Attended Features

    Service can be shared among each tenant under the condition of up to 1000 entries per tenant. • If neither the telephone number nor the name is stored in the Caller ID Table, the number sent from Caller ID service is displayed.

  • Page 118
    General Features Installation Manual References • 2.5.5 ELCOT Card (KX-TD50180) • 2.7.4 Caller ID Card (KX-TD193) Programming Guide References • 1.2 Slot Assignment – Caller ID Detection • 2.8 System Option – Automatic adjustment of the clock using Caller ID information –…
  • Page 119: Caller Id Service On T1 Line

    Service can be shared among each tenant under the condition of up to 1000 entries per tenant. • If neither the telephone number nor the name is stored in the Caller ID Table, the number sent from Caller ID service is displayed.

  • Page 120
    General Features Installation Manual References • 2.5.4 T1 Digital Trunk Card (KX-T96187) Programming Guide References • 1.6 T1 Port Assignment – Channel Type • 4.2 Trunk Line – Incoming Type – Name – Caller ID • 4.3 Extension Line – Initial Display Selection –…
  • Page 121: Direct In Lines (Dil)

    Direct In Lines (DIL) Description Enables an incoming CO call to go directly to one or more answering points without assistance of the operator. Assignable destinations are: (1) Extension (2) Floating Extension — Modem (Remote Administration) — External Pager (TAFAS) —…

  • Page 122
    General Features Outline sketch of Direct In Lines (DIL) Extension (DN) Floating Extension (FDN) Conditions • DIL to the modem allows the caller to perform remote administration. When receiving incoming calls (TAFAS feature), DIL pages an external pager. DIL to DISA message allows an external caller to access the system directly (DISA feature).
  • Page 123
    Features Guide References None User Manual References Not applicable. Features Guide General Features…
  • Page 124: Direct Inward Dialing (Did)

    General Features Direct Inward Dialing (DID) Description Allows incoming CO calls to reach a specific extension, a virtual extension or a group of extensions in the system directly in accordance with the subscriber number sent from the Central Office. Possible destination of DID calls •…

  • Page 125
    If the destination of a DID call is in busy status, the caller may hear a busy tone or the call is redirected to the IRNA destination or the call waits until the destination becomes idle. Features Guide 2311 Destination Destination (Day) (Night) General Features Name (Max. 10 characters) PANASONIC…
  • Page 126
    General Features This is determined by System Programming <Section 2.8 System Option, «18. Destination Busy — DID» in the Programming Guide>. • The tenant number and VPS trunk group number can be assigned in the DID table so that the system is shared with tenants on a DID No. basis. It is programmable whether to enable or disable the tenant assigned on a DID No.
  • Page 127
    1.17 Display Features • Display, Call Information User Manual References Not applicable. Features Guide General Features…
  • Page 128: Direct Inward System Access (Disa)

    When you enable the CO-to-CO Line Call feature of Direct Inward System Access (DISA) function, if a third party discovers the password (a DISA User Code) of the system, you have a risk that they will make illegal phone calls using your telephone line, and the cost may be charged to your account.

  • Page 129
    Flow chart of possible cases and results for DISA calls An outside call is initiated. The DISA Delayed Timer starts. The caller reaches the DISA line. All resources are busy. One of the resources is available. (Outgoing Message is sent.) The call is accepted.
  • Page 130
    General Features The DISA OGM(s) should be recorded by the Manager or an Operator. The OGM Type should be set to «DISA» under OGM Group setting. • DISA Delayed Answer Time A DISA call is answered after a ringback tone is returned to the caller after the «DISA Delayed Answer Time»…
  • Page 131
    3. Silence Detection: Used to disconnect the trunk line when the system detects no signal during a CO-to-CO line call by DISA or AGC. • DISA Call Re-try by Pressing The » » key can be entered during a DISA call. The action taken by the system depends upon System Programming <Section 2.8 System Option, «14.
  • Page 132
    General Features Programming Guide References • 1.7 DISA Port Assignment • 2.3 Numbering Plan – OGM Playback / Record • 2.4 Class of Service (COS) – TRS Level – Day / Night • 2.5 System Timer – Call Forwarding-No Answer Time –…
  • Page 133
    1.11 Transferring Features • Intercept Routing User Manual References • 3.2.10 [010] DISA / TIE User Code Set • 4.3.26 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) • 4.4.6 Outgoing Message (OGM) Record/Playback Features Guide General Features…
  • Page 134: Ring Group

    General Features Ring Group Description Allows both extension and outside users to ring all extensions in a Ring Group simultaneously by dialing the Floating Directory Number (FDN) of the Ring Group. This feature is useful for talking to or transferring calls to anyone in the same group. This feature can be categorized as follows: Extension Group Ring Group can be made up by assigning the group type of an Extension Group as «Ring.»…

  • Page 135
    Programming Guide References • 1.4 Extension Port Assignment – Group No. • 2.3 Numbering Plan – Login / Logout – Group Login / Logout • 3.3 Extension Group – FDN – Tenant No. – Group Type • 3.5 Incoming Group –…
  • Page 136: Trunk Answer From Any Station (Tafas)

    General Features Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS) Description A tone signal is emitted from the external pager when an incoming CO call is received. Any extension user can answer the call. Conditions • Hardware Requirements A user-supplied external paging device is required to utilize this feature. Up to two external pagers can be installed in the system.

  • Page 137
    Features Guide References 1.3 System Features • Floating Station User Manual References • 4.3.78 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS) Features Guide General Features…
  • Page 138: Uniform Call Distribution (Ucd)

    General Features Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) Description Calls to a UCD group are distributed uniformly among the group members so that each member can share the same load. This UCD feature is particularly helpful when a certain extension receives a high volume of calls compared with other extensions.

  • Page 139
    (1) Outline sketch of UCD feature 1. When more than one call is in the UCD group, the 1st call will arrive at extension A first. Calls have arrived at a UCD group 3rd call in queue 2nd call in queue 1st call in queue UCD group Extension A…
  • Page 140
    General Features 2. If the 1st call arrives at extension A, a) the 2nd call will arrive at extension B. b) the 2nd call will arrive at extension A. a) Search Mode : UCD UCD group Extension B Extension C Extension A 3.
  • Page 141
    (Group Login / Logout) button in the off-hook status to go back to the Login mode. Any telephone: After the system activates Auto Logout, enter the feature number for Login (Group Login) in the off-hook status to go back to the Login mode.
  • Page 142
    General Features • UCD Call Waiting This feature is different from regular Call Waiting. This feature (if enabled) allows UCD group members to hear a Call Waiting tone when an outside / inside call arrives but all the extensions in the UCD Group are busy. However, if a single extension belongs to multiple different Incoming Groups and there are calls in the waiting queue in one of the Incoming Groups, the Call Waiting tone is generated at the busy extensions.
  • Page 143
    KX-TD500 System Ext. Ext. Transfer/IRNA Features Guide Outside Calls DIL1:N Group DISA Ring Group DID (ISDN) Phantom Extensions Ext. Ext. Transfer UCD Group General Features Intercom Calls Ext. Transfer…
  • Page 144
    General Features (3) What if all extensions in a UCD Group are busy or logged out? Outside calls (including transferred calls) Waiting Queue Time Table is programmed. Time Table procedure Intercept Destination is not programmed. Waiting Queue All Busy (including transferred calls) Time Table is not programmed.
  • Page 145
    «Calls to Empty Group» are allowed. See previous page, Outside calls «All Busy.» Overflow Destination is not programmed. Intercept Destination Intercept Destination is not programmed. is programmed. Intercept Waiting Queue Destination Notes • Overflow destination One of the following five destinations can be assigned as the Overflow destination per UCD Group: an extension, other Extension Groups, other Incoming Groups (except DIL 1:N Group), Phantom Extension or TAFAS (outside calls only).
  • Page 146
    General Features Command S (1-8) 1T-4T Example of UCD Time Table Assignment 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 : UCD Group Number : Floating Directory Number of the UCD Group OFDN : Overflow Destination FDN : Time Table Number (1 — 32) Command list and functions Functions OGM (1-8) is sent to the caller if available.
  • Page 147
    Procedure Assignment Example UCD Time Table procedure can be assigned as follows: Table No. (Example 1) UCD group The caller hears OGM 1, if available. (Sample OGM 1) Sorry, all lines are busy. Please wait a moment. • What if OGM 1 is busy? The caller first hears a ringback tone and then will hear OGM 1 as soon as it becomes available (Go to step 2).
  • Page 148
    General Features (Example 2) UCD group The caller hears OGM 1, if available. (Sample OGM 1) Sorry, all lines are busy. Please wait a moment. • What if OGM 1 is busy? The caller first hears a ringback tone and then will hear OGM 1 as soon as it becomes available (Go to step 2).
  • Page 149
    (Example 3) UCD group The caller is put in the waiting queue for 8 seconds (1T). The caller is transferred to the Overflow destination. (Example 4) The caller hears OGM 1, if available. (Sample OGM 1) Sorry, all lines are busy. Please wait a moment.
  • Page 150
    General Features Conditions • This feature must be enabled by System Programming for the desired UCD Group(s). • In addition, each extension must enable regular Call Waiting feature <Section «4.3.17 Call Waiting» in the User Manual>. • UCD-OGM To utilize OGM messages for UCD callers, assign «OGM Type» to «UCD-OGM» by System Programming <Section 3.6 OGM Group, «OGM Type»…
  • Page 151
    Programming Guide References • 1.4 Extension Port Assignment – Group No. • 2.3 Numbering Plan – Login / Logout – Group Login / Logout – UCD Monitor Mode • 2.5 System Timer – Intercept Time • 2.8 System Option – Sound source during transfer –…
  • Page 152
    General Features Features Guide References 1.3 System Features • Extension Group • Incoming Group • Outgoing Message (OGM) 1.8 Ringing Features • Log-In/Log-Out User Manual References • 4.3.80 UCD Login Monitor • 4.3.81 UCD Monitor Mode Features Guide…
  • Page 153: Originating Features

    1.6 Originating Features Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice Description Allows an extension user either to ring-signal (Ring call) or voice-signal (Voice call) the other PT extensions. Ring call: The called PT rings. Voice call: The caller’s voice is heard through the built-in speaker of the called PT instead of ringing.

  • Page 154
    General Features User Manual References • 2.2.7 Intercom Alert Assignment • 4.3.3 Alternate Calling — Ring / Voice • 4.3.40 Hands-free Answerback • 4.3.42 Inter Office Calling Features Guide…
  • Page 155: Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-On)

    Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-On) Description The system calls back the extension user when the called party or the selected CO line becomes idle, if this feature was activated beforehand. Automatic Callback — Extension If the extension user answers the callback ringing, the called extension (previously busy) automatically starts ringing.

  • Page 156: Automatic Route Selection (Ars)

    Step 1. To utilize ARS feature, set «Automatic Route Selection» in «System-Tenant» to «Yes.» Step 2. Store the telephone number of the outside party that will use the ARS feature. For example, if XYZ Company’s telephone number is «1-234-567-8910» (not including the line access code), store the leading 7 digits of the number «1234567»…

  • Page 157
    Table B high Charge a.m. Sat. / Sun. As shown in Table B, the least costly route varies with the day of the week and the time of day. To select the least expensive line at a certain time, split the day into three zones as follows: Sat.
  • Page 158
    General Features Least Costly Carrier / Trunk Group (Priority 1) Next Less Costly Carrier / Trunk Group (Priority 2) Most Costly Carrier / Trunk Group (Priority 3) Assign the above Routing Plan (Table D) to «ARS — Routing Plan» in the Programming Guide. Enter the Trunk Group numbers in order of priority.
  • Page 159
    According to Table F, enter the Access Codes in the respective Modification Tables as follows: Table G (Example : ARS Digits Modification Table) Modification Table 1 Remove Remove 10333 If Modification Table 1 is applied, the user-dialed number «9-1-234-567-8910» is modified to «9-10333-1-234-567-8910″…
  • Page 160
    General Features Flow Chart of ARS procedures Are the leading digits found in an ARS Leading Digits Table? Obtains applicable Routing Plan number from the ARS Leading Digits Table. Determines the Trunk Group of priority 1 in the ARS Routing Plan Table by the current time of day. Is there any line available in the Trunk Group of priority 1? Obtains applicable Modification…
  • Page 161
    Conditions WARNING The software contained in ARS feature to allow user access to the network must be upgraded to recognize newly established network area codes and exchange codes as they are placed into service. Failure to upgrade the premises PBXs or peripheral equipment to recognize the new codes as they are established will restrict the customer and the customer’s employees from gaining access to the network and to these codes.
  • Page 162
    General Features User Manual References • 4.3.54 Outward Dialing, Trunk Access Features Guide…
  • Page 163: Busy Station Signaling (Bss)

    Busy Station Signaling (BSS) Description Used to prompt a busy extension (ringing or engaged in a call) to answer a new incoming call. When BSS is activated by the calling extension, a call waiting tone is generated at the busy extension to inform that another call is waiting.

  • Page 164
    General Features Features Guide References 1.6 Originating Features • Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA) • Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA), Whisper 1.9 Answering Features • Call Waiting User Manual References • 4.3.8 Busy Station Signaling (BSS) • 4.3.12 Call Park • 4.3.49 Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA) •…
  • Page 165: Do Not Disturb (Dnd) Override

    Do Not Disturb (DND) Override Description Allows the extension user to ring the other extension in DND mode by dialing «1» while hearing the DND tone. Conditions • Class of Service (COS) programming COS programming <Section 2.4 Class of Service (COS), «DND Override» in the Programming Guide>…

  • Page 166: Electronic Station Lockout

    General Features Electronic Station Lockout Description Allows the extension user to lock his extension so that other users cannot make outside calls. Any 3-digit numeric code (000-999) can be used to lock and unlock the extension. Conditions • How does this feature restrict the extension? This feature restricts the extension from making an outside call only.

  • Page 167: Emergency Call

    – in Electronic Station Lockout / Remote Station Lock • If the KX-TD500 System is connected to a host PBX as a behind PBX, the extension user must dial the host PBX line access code after dialing the line access code and it must be included as the first digit of the emergency number.

  • Page 168: Executive Busy Override

    General Features Executive Busy Override Description Allows the extension user to interrupt an existing extension / outside call. This establishes a 3- party conference call. This feature can be categorized as follows: Executive Busy Override – Barge-In Allows the PT user to interrupt an existing outside call (either «between two outside parties» or «between an outside party and an inside party») by pressing the red lit S-CO or DN button.

  • Page 169
    Programming Guide References • 2.3 Numbering Plan – Data Line Security Set / Cancel – Executive Busy Override Deny Set / Cancel – Trunk Route Control • 2.4 Class of Service (COS) – Busy Override – Busy Override Deny • 2.8 System Option –…
  • Page 170: Inter Office Calling

    Inter Office Calling Description Allows the extension user to call another extension user within the system or a tenant. An inter office call is a call between two extensions in the KX-TD500 system. Conditions • Definition of busy extension status <ICM type PT>…

  • Page 171
    Programming Guide References • 1.4 Extension Port Assignment – Attribute – Tel. Type – DN • 2.2 Tenant – Inter-tenant Calling (1 — 8) • 2.3 Numbering Plan – 1st Hundred Block Extension – 2nd Hundred Block Extension – 3rd Hundred Block Extension –…
  • Page 172: Line Preference-Outgoing (Idle Line/No Line/Prime Line)

    General Features Line Preference—Outgoing (Idle Line/No Line/Prime Line) Description A PT user can select a desired outgoing line preference to originate calls from the following three line preferences: Idle Line Preference When an extension user goes off-hook to make a call, an idle line is automatically selected from the pre-assigned lines.

  • Page 173
    User Manual References • 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment • 2.2.12 Preferred Line Assignment — Outgoing • 3.2.5 [005] Flexible CO Button Assignment Features Guide General Features…
  • Page 174: Off-Hook Call Announcement (Ohca)

    OHCA is performed the same way as Busy Station Signaling (BSS). It depends on the telephone type of the called party whether BSS or OHCA is activated by the operation. If the called extension is KX-T7130, KX-T7235 or KX-T7436, OHCA becomes active.

  • Page 175
    A DHLC card allows 8 DPTs that can be called with the OHCA feature at the same time. • DHLC card with APT A DHLC card allows one APT telephone that can be called with the OHCA feature at the same time.
  • Page 176: Off-Hook Call Announcement (Ohca), Whisper

    General Features Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA), Whisper Description This is a variation of the OHCA feature. The difference is, OHCA provides two-way communication, but Whisper OHCA provides one-way (from the calling extension to the called extension) communication. Conditions • Call Waiting Whisper OHCA is only effective when the called extension has set Call Waiting feature.

  • Page 177
    Programming Guide References • 2.3 Numbering Plan – Call Waiting Set / Cancel • 2.4 Class of Service (COS) – Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA) • 2.8 System Option – Whisper OHCA to extensions other than T74XX Features Guide References 1.6 Originating Features •…
  • Page 178: Operator Call

    General Features Operator Call Description To direct operator-seeking incoming calls to the Operators, one of the following ways can be used. Intercom calls Extension users can call the Operator: — by dialing the feature number for «Operator Call» — by dialing the FDN for Operator Group Outside calls To direct outside callers to the Operators, set the FDN of an Operator Group as the destination of the following calls:…

  • Page 179
    Programming Guide References • 1.4 Extension Port Assignment – Group No. • 2.2 Tenant – Operator FDN • 2.3 Numbering Plan – Operator Call • 3.3 Extension Group – FDN – Tenant No. – [Overflow Setting] Destination – Day / Night –…
  • Page 180: Pdn Call

    General Features PDN Call Description If the Extension 1001 has an SDN button which corresponds with the PDN button of the Extension 2001 (PDN owner), the Extension 1001 can call the Extension 2001 simply by pressing the associated SDN button twice. The Extension 1001 can also transfer a call (on the CO / PDN) to the Extension 2001 with a simple operation.

  • Page 181: Secret Busy Override

    Secret Busy Override Description Allows the extension user to interrupt an existing call (either «between two inside parties» or «between an inside party and an outside party») without informing the other party. Conditions • Class of Service (COS) programming COS programming <Section 2.4 Class of Service (COS), «Busy Override» and «Secret Busy Override»…

  • Page 182
    General Features User Manual References • 4.3.69 Secret Busy Override Features Guide…
  • Page 183: Toll Restriction

    Toll Restriction Description Toll Restriction is a system programmable feature that, in conjunction with the assigned Class of Service, can prohibit certain extension users from placing unauthorized toll calls. Every extension is programmed to belong to one of 96 Classes of Service. Each Class of Service is programmed to have a toll restriction level for day mode and night mode respectively.

  • Page 184
    General Features Level 8 None [Explanation] Level 1: allows all calls. Level 2: denies codes stored in the TRS Deny Code Table for Level 2 except the codes stored in TRS Exception Code Tables for Levels 2 through 6. Level 3: denies codes stored in the TRS Deny Code Tables for Levels 2 and 3 except the codes stored in TRS Exception Code Tables for Levels 3 through 6.
  • Page 185
    Example of Toll Restriction programming Here is an example to explain the procedures for Toll Restriction programming. Determining the application Determine the dialing numbers that should be denied for levels 2 through 6. (Levels 1, 7 and 8 are fixed and do not require programming.) [Entry Example] Level TRS Deny Code…
  • Page 186
    General Features Level (Day) Toll Restriction — «TRS Deny Code» Depending on the application, enter the TRS Deny codes in the associated tables. Numeric characters and the wild card character «X» can be used. [Entry Example] Level-2 TRS Deny Code Table Location Level-3 TRS Deny Code Table Location…
  • Page 187
    Level-6 TRS Deny Code Table Location Toll Restriction — «TRS Exception Code» Depending on the application, enter the exception codes in the associated tables. Numeric characters and the wild card character «X» can be used. [Entry Example] Level-6 TRS Exception Code Table Location 1911…
  • Page 188
    General Features Flow Chart of Toll Restriction Levels 7, 8 Conditions WARNING The software contained in TRS feature to allow user access to the network must be upgraded to recognize newly established network area codes and exchange codes as they The user makes a toll call.
  • Page 189
    • If a stored Host PBX access code or a stored carrier code is found in the dialed number, a toll restriction check starts for the succeeding telephone number. • Toll Restriction Override for System Speed Dialing This feature can be activated or deactivated per tenant.
  • Page 190
    General Features Programming Guide References • 2.2 Tenant – System Speed Dial TRS Level Override • 2.4 Class of Service (COS) – TRS Level – Day / Night – Call from TRS Level 7 Extension – Transferring CO dial tone (exempted from TRS) •…
  • Page 191: Toll Restriction For Special Carrier Access

    Toll Restriction for Special Carrier Access Description If your system has access to multiple telephone companies, access to a specific company requires a carrier access code preceding the telephone number. Toll Restriction on these calls is activated by storing the carrier codes (maximum 100). If a stored carrier code is found in the dialed number, a toll restriction check starts for the succeeding telephone number.

  • Page 192: Toll Restriction Override By Account Code Entry

    Description Allows the extension user to override toll restriction temporarily to make a toll call from a toll– restricted telephone. The extension user can carry out this feature by entering the appropriate account code before dialing the telephone number. Flow Chart of TRS (Toll Restriction) Override Procedure by Account Code Entry TRS Override by Account Code Entry is attempted.

  • Page 193
    • If the extension user does not enter any account code or enters an invalid account code, an ordinary toll restriction check is done. Programming Guide References • 2.3 Numbering Plan – Account Code • 2.4 Class of Service (COS) –…
  • Page 194: Toll Restriction Override For System Speed Dialing

    General Features Toll Restriction Override for System Speed Dialing Description Allows the extension user to override Toll Restriction in System Speed Dialing. Normally, calls originated by System Speed Dialing are restricted depending on the extension’s toll restriction level. Once this feature is activated, it permits all extension users to make System Speed Dialing calls without restriction.

  • Page 195: Trunk Access

    Trunk Access Description There are the following four ways to access an idle CO line for making a call. Type Idle Selects an idle CO line automatically from the trunk groups assigned to the extension. Direct Selects an idle CO line by pressing an idle CO button directly.

  • Page 196
    • Each PT can have more than one L-CO button. • Ringing Tone Selection The Digital Proprietary Telephone (DPT) users can choose a desired ringing frequency for each S-CO, G-CO or L-CO button <Section «2.2.13 Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons»…
  • Page 197
    [Idle] • Automatic Route Selection (ARS) «Trunk Access, Idle» functions when Automatic Route Selection (ARS) is not activated. If ARS is activated by System Programming <Section 2.2 Tenant, «Automatic Route Selection» in the Programming Guide>, the least expensive route for the destination is selected automatically.
  • Page 198
    General Features Programming Guide References • 2.2 Tenant – Automatic Route Selection • 2.3 Numbering Plan – Local CO Line Access / ARS – Trunk Group Access • 2.4 Class of Service (COS) – Trunk Group Setting • 2.6 Local Hunt Sequence •…
  • Page 199: Trunk Connection Assignment-Outgoing

    Trunk Connection Assignment—Outgoing Description Used to determine the Trunk Group which can be accessed by an extension user for making outside calls on a Class of Service basis. This feature is useful to prevent unauthorized toll calls. Conditions • When the extension user tries to make an outside call on a disallowed Trunk Group, a reorder tone is sent to indicate that the user cannot use it.

  • Page 200: Walking Cos

    General Features Walking COS Description Allows an extension user to make a toll call at other lower level COS extensions (toll / outward restricted) by employing his own higher level COS temporarily. Conditions None Programming Guide References • 2.3 Numbering Plan –…

  • Page 201
    1.6 Originating Features • Toll Restriction User Manual References • 4.3.84 Walking COS Features Guide General Features…
  • Page 202: Dialing Features

    General Features 1.7 Dialing Features Automatic Station Release Description If the extension user fails to dial any digits within a specified time period after going off-hook, the user will be disconnected from the line after a reorder tone is sent. To get a line again, the user must go on-hook first and then go off-hook.

  • Page 203: Full One-Touch Dialing

    Full One-Touch Dialing Description Allows the PT user to have simple access to a desired party or system feature by pressing just one button without first going off-hook. Hands-free operation is automatically provided simply by pressing one of the following buttons.

  • Page 204
    General Features User Manual References • 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment • 2.2.4 Full One-Touch Dialing Assignment • 3.2.5 [005] Flexible CO Button Assignment • 4.3.38 Full One-Touch Dialing • 4.3.52 One-Touch Dialing • 4.3.66 Redial Features Guide…
  • Page 205: One-Touch Dialing

    If «Full One-Touch Dialing» is enabled, press the One-Touch Dialing button directly without going off-hook. • To store the telephone number of an outside party, a line access code (default=9 or 801 through 848) must be stored as the leading digit.

  • Page 206
    General Features User Manual References • 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment • 2.2.4 Full One-Touch Dialing Assignment • 3.2.5 [005] Flexible CO Button Assignment • 4.3.52 One-Touch Dialing • 5.2.13 One-Touch Dialing Button (Assignment) • 5.2.14 One-Touch Access Assignment for System Features •…
  • Page 207: Pause Insertion, Automatic

    Pause Insertion, Automatic Description Used to insert a pre-assigned pausing time between the access code (CO line / host PBX / Centrex / Special Carrier) and dialed digits. Conditions • This feature requires previous programming of the access code (CO line / host PBX / Centrex / Special Carrier) as well as assignment of the pause duration.

  • Page 208: Pickup Dialing (Hot Line)

    Pickup Dialing function. Conditions • To utilize this feature, an extension number or an outside telephone number (up to 24 digits) should be programmed beforehand. • This feature works only when an extension user goes off-hook from on-hook status directly.

  • Page 209
    General Features User Manual References • 4.3.62 Pickup Dialing (Hot Line) Features Guide…
  • Page 210: Quick Dialing

    Conditions • To utilize this feature, an extension number or a telephone number should be stored beforehand either by User or System Programming. • Up to eight quick dial numbers (up to 24 digits for each) can be stored in the system.

  • Page 211: Redial

    REDIAL or SAVE button. [Last Number] • The memorized telephone number is replaced by a new one if at least one digit sent to a CO line is dialed. Dialing a CO line access code alone does not change the memorized number.

  • Page 212
    General Features Features Guide References 1.16 Button Features • Button, Flexible User Manual References • 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment • 2.2.4 Full One-Touch Dialing Assignment • 3.2.5 [005] Flexible CO Button Assignment • 4.3.66 Redial Features Guide…
  • Page 213: Station Speed Dialing

    Allows the extension user to store frequently dialed numbers (up to 24 digits) in order to place a call with abbreviated dialing for personal use. Up to 10 station speed dialing numbers appended with 1-digit station speed dialing code (0-9), can be stored in each telephone. Conditions •…

  • Page 214: System Speed Dialing

    General Features System Speed Dialing Description The KX-TD500 system provides up to 1000 / tenant, 2000 / system abbreviated speed dial numbers (24-digit long for each) available to all extension users. Conditions • System Speed Dialing numbers and names can be programmed either by User or System Programming.

  • Page 215
    <Meaning of each field> Field # Contents Tenant No. Entry No. Dial Name Notes • «Dial» and «Name» can be omitted. If both fields are blank, the effect is to delete the entry in the PBX. • There are limits to the number of entries per tenant and per system. Hence, if either limit is exceeded, data lines will be ignored and will not be registered in the PBX.
  • Page 216: Ringing Features

    General Features 1.8 Ringing Features Do Not Disturb (DND) Description Allows the extension user to appear busy to an incoming CO or extension calls. Conditions • DND does not work for the following calls: — Hold Recall — Timed Reminder Alarm Tone —…

  • Page 217
    Programming Guide References • 2.3 Numbering Plan – Call FWD — Do Not Disturb Set / Cancel • 2.4 Class of Service (COS) – DND Override • 2.8 System Option – Special dial tone after setting feature – FWD / DND lamp pattern •…
  • Page 218: Log-In/Log-Out

    General Features Log-In/Log-Out Description Allows the extension user to join (log-in) or leave (log-out) the group. They can leave the group temporarily when they are away from their desks, to prevent calls being sent to their extensions. They can return to the group when they are ready to answer calls. This feature can be categorized as follows: Log-In/Log-Out Allows members (extension users) of an Extension Group (except Group Type: None) and…

  • Page 219
    same UCD Group through Busy Lamp Field of the corresponding DSS button. UCD Login Monitor is enabled or disabled by System Programming. <For Incoming Group members> Login/Logout status of the UCD Group members can be monitored by the extension specified as the Supervisor Extension through Busy Lamp Field of the corresponding DSS button.
  • Page 220: Station Hunting

    General Features Station Hunting Description If a called extension is busy, Station Hunting redirects the incoming call to an idle extension within the same Extension Group / Incoming Group. Idle extensions are automatically searched for according to the pre-determined hunting type. Extension Group Hunting Type Circular…

  • Page 221
    • Message Waiting notification A message waiting notification to an extension in the station hunting group is treated in the same manner as the ordinary call. Programming Guide References • 1.4 Extension Port Assignment – Group No. • 2.3 Numbering Plan –…
  • Page 222: Timed Reminder (Wake-Up Call)

    Timed Reminder (Wake-Up Call) Description Each telephone can be set to generate an alarm tone at a preset time as a reminder. When this feature is set, an alarm tone will ring for 30 seconds (default) at the programmed time.

  • Page 223
    • Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) SMDR automatically records the detailed Timed Reminder information (date, time, tenant no., extension number, start / no answer / answer). It is programmable to be printed out when the Timed Reminder starts and the alarm is answered or not answered. The print-out example is shown below.
  • Page 224
    General Features Programming Guide References • 2.2 Tenant – Alert Extension – Day / Night • 2.3 Numbering Plan – Timed Reminder Confirm / Set / Cancel • 2.5 System Timer – Timed Reminder Ringing Time – Timed Reminder Arrive Count –…
  • Page 225: Timed Reminder, Remote (Wake-Up Call)

    Timed Reminder, Remote (Wake-Up Call) Description Allows the Manager extension and the Operators to remotely set, cancel and confirm the wake–up call for an extension. Conditions • Only the latest time setting is valid at the extension whether it was set by the extension user (Timed Reminder) or by the Manager or an Operator (Timed Reminder, Remote).

  • Page 226
    General Features • Alert button assignment The Alert button can be assigned to a flexible CO button on the Alert extension. • Alert Ringing If Timed Reminder (Wake-Up Call) is not responded by the guest, a Timed Reminder alert can be sent to the alert extension when the Alert button indicator on it is turned on (in red) by System Programming <Section 2.8 System Option, «Alert Ringing»…
  • Page 227: Answering Features

    1.9 Answering Features ANSWER and RELEASE buttons Operation Description ANSWER and RELEASE buttons are useful when using the headset or in hands-free mode. With the ANSWER button, an extension user can answer all incoming calls. With the RELEASE button, an extension user can disconnect the line during or after a conversation or complete a Call Transfer.

  • Page 228
    General Features User Manual References • 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment • 3.2.5 [005] Flexible CO Button Assignment • 4.3.4 ANSWER and RELEASE buttons Operation • 5.2.26 ANSWER and RELEASE Buttons Operation Features Guide…
  • Page 229: Answering, Direct Trunk

    Answering, Direct Trunk Description Allows the PT user to answer an incoming CO call simply by directly pressing a flashing CO button without lifting the handset or pressing the SP-PHONE / MONITOR button. This feature permits the extension user to answer the desired CO call when multiple incoming CO calls are coming in on his extension.

  • Page 230: Call Pickup

    General Features Call Pickup Description Allows the extension user to answer a call (intercom, outside, doorphone) ringing at any other extension. The following types are available: Feature Type Directed Group CO Line Preventing other extensions from picking up calls ringing at his extension is also possible (Call Pickup Deny).

  • Page 231
    • If more than one call is ringing on an extension, Call Pickup to that extension works for the first arrived call. • Call Waiting Call This feature does not apply to a call waiting call. [CO Line] • Tenant Service If «Tenant Service»…
  • Page 232
    General Features Features Guide References 1.3 System Features • Extension Group User Manual References • 4.3.13 Call Pickup • 4.3.17 Call Waiting • 4.5.9 KX-T7235 Display Features — System Feature Access Menu • 4.5.12 KX-T7431 / KX-T7433 / KX-T7436 Display Features — System Feature Access Menu Features Guide…
  • Page 233: Call Waiting

    Call Waiting Description Used to inform a busy extension that another call is waiting. The busy extension can answer the second call by disconnecting the current call or placing it on hold. This feature can be activated or deactivated by dialing the appropriate feature number. Conditions •…

  • Page 234
    General Features • BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA If an extension user dials «1» while hearing a busy tone, BSS or OHCA or Whisper OHCA may be activated at the called extension. This is determined by the following conditions. Calling extension COS-OHCA assignment…
  • Page 235
    Features Guide References 1.6 Originating Features • Busy Station Signaling (BSS) • Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA) • Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA), Whisper 1.12 Conversation Features • Data Line Security User Manual References • 2.2.2 Call Waiting Tone Type Assignment • 4.3.8 Busy Station Signaling (BSS) •…
  • Page 236: Call Waiting From Central Office

    General Features Call Waiting from Central Office Description During a conversation with an outside party, a call waiting tone offered by the local Central Office informs the extension user of another incoming CO call that is waiting. He can answer the new call by placing the current call on hold.

  • Page 237: Executive Busy Override Deny

    Executive Busy Override Deny Description Allows the extension user to prevent his extension from being interrupted by «Executive Busy Override» from another extension user. Conditions • Class of Service (COS) programming COS programming <Section 2.4 Class of Service (COS), «Busy Override Deny» in the Programming Guide>…

  • Page 238: Hands-Free Answerback

    – Calls ringing on an SDN button • Alternate Calling Ring / Voice Mode Override Hands-free Answerback set on a telephone overrides «Alternate Calling Ring / Voice» preset on the extension; Hands-free conversation mode is established immediately after a confirmation tone is sent.

  • Page 239: Line Preference-Incoming (No Line/Prime Line/Ringing Line)

    Line Preference—Incoming (No Line/Prime Line/ Ringing Line) Description A PT user can select the method used to answer incoming calls from the following three line preferences: No Line Preference No line is selected when an extension user goes off-hook to answer a call. He must press a desired Line Access button to answer an incoming call.

  • Page 240
    General Features User Manual References • 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment • 2.2.11 Preferred Line Assignment — Incoming • 3.2.5 [005] Flexible CO Button Assignment Features Guide…
  • Page 241: Live Call Screening (Lcs)

    (SLT). The handset sounds an alert tone to let you know that a message is being recorded. To intercept the call, flash the switchhook. Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone [DPT] integration; e.g., KX-TVS100).

  • Page 242
    General Features Programming Guide References • 2.3 Numbering Plan – Live Call Screening • 4.3 Extension Line – [LCS Setting] Status – [LCS Setting] Operation Mode – [LCS Setting] Recording Mode – [LCS Setting] LCS Password – CO Key • 4.4 DSS Console –…
  • Page 243: Holding Features

    1.10 Holding Features Automatic Hold—For Hold Description Allows the PT user engaged in a call (extension or outside) to answer an incoming call (extension or outside) or to get a new line for making a call without losing the current call with a simple operation.

  • Page 244: Automatic Hold-For Transfer

    General Features Automatic Hold—For Transfer Description Allows the PT user to transfer the call (intercom, outside) to the destination party with a simple operation, without first pressing the TRANSFER button. If this feature is enabled, the current call is placed on consultation hold automatically when the PT user presses an idle CO, DN, DSS or Phantom button for transferring purpose.

  • Page 245: Call Hold

    • The number of calls that can be put on (exclusive) hold at an extension The number of calls that can be held on an extension at a time differs depending on the telephone type as follows: Intercom call – <ICM type PT>: One, <SLT>: One (Not available) –…

  • Page 246
    General Features • Confirmation Tone A confirmation tone is sent to the extension user who retrieved the held call, when it is retrieved by dialing the feature number. This tone can be eliminated by System Programming <Section 2.8 System Option, «9. Confirmation tone for Call Pickup, Paging, Paging –…
  • Page 247: Call Park

    Call Park Description Allows the extension user to place a call on hold into a system parking area so that any extension user can retrieve the call. This releases the user from the parked call to perform other operations. Conditions •…

  • Page 248: Call Splitting

    General Features Call Splitting Description When there are two active calls on an extension, an extension user can talk either one of them alternately. Conditions • This feature does not work for the following calls: – Doorphone call – Paging Programming Guide References System Programming is not required.

  • Page 249: Consultation Hold

    Consultation Hold Description Allows an extension user to place a call on hold temporarily on purpose to transfer it, to make a Conference call, or to perform Call Splitting. A PT user can place a call on Consultation Hold by pressing TRANSFER or CONF button. An SLT user can place a call on Consultation Hold by pressing the switchhook lightly only to transfer it.

  • Page 250
    General Features 1.12 Conversation Features • Conference, 3-Party • Conference, 5-Party • Conference, Unattended User Manual References Not applicable. Features Guide…
  • Page 251: Transferring Features

    1.11 Transferring Features Call Forwarding Description Allows you to have incoming calls to your extension forwarded to a specified destination. You may specify the circumstances under which your calls are forwarded. The following Call Forwarding features are available: Type All Calls Busy No Answer Busy / No Answer…

  • Page 252
    General Features Intercom calls Extension; Transfer* — Items marked with «*» are not available with «Call Forwarding — No Answer to CO / TIE Line» feature. • Floating Station A Floating Station cannot be programmed as the call forwarding destination. •…
  • Page 253
    Before utilizing this feature, «Trunk to Trunk Restriction» should be enabled by System Programming. • You can store the telephone number up to 24 digits. Valid digits are «0 through 9,» » » and PAUSE. PAUSE can also be stored by dialing «…
  • Page 254
    Before utilizing this feature, «Trunk to Trunk Restriction» should be enabled by System Programming. • You can store the telephone number up to 24 digits. Valid digits are «0 through 9,» » » and PAUSE. PAUSE button can also be stored by dialing «…
  • Page 255
    Features Guide References 1.3 System Features • Limited Call Duration 3.1 TIE Line Features • TIE Line and Outside (CO) Line Connection User Manual References • 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment • 3.2.5 [005] Flexible CO Button Assignment • 4.3.9 Call Forwarding •…
  • Page 256: Call Forwarding-All Calls To An Incoming Group

    General Features Call Forwarding—All Calls to an Incoming Group Description Allows you to have all calls to an Incoming Group forwarded to the pre-assigned Incoming Group or Extension Group. Conditions • Types of calls which are forwarded by this feature are: Outside calls Direct Inward Dialing (DID) (ISDN);…

  • Page 257
    • Assignable destination is FDN of Incoming Group or Extension Group. If «DIL 1:N» is specified in «Group Type» setting of Incoming Group, this feature does not work. • Regarding the PT with the Group FWD button, if Incoming Group FWD feature is assigned to the PT extension, the Group FWD indicator lights in red.
  • Page 258: Call Transfer

    <Section 2.8 System Option, «1. Sound source during transfer» in the Programming Guide>. [Screened, Unscreened — To Extension] • The DSS Console and the Proprietary Telephone user can hold an outside call and quickly transfer it to an extension by pressing the corresponding DSS button directly (One-Touch Transfer by DSS Button).

  • Page 259
    Hold Recall tone: Hold Recall tone is generated to the extension who transferred the call 50 seconds before the time-out. Hold Alarm tone: Hold Alarm tone is generated to both outside parties 15 seconds before the time-out. The call is disconnected at the time-out unless the extension user (who transferred the call) joins the CO-to-CO call to establish a conference call.
  • Page 260
    General Features Programming Guide References • 2.4 Class of Service (COS) – Trunk Group Setting – Transfer to CO – Transfer to TIE – Automatic Hold • 2.5 System Timer – Transfer Recall Time – CO-to-CO Line Call Duration Time •…
  • Page 261: Intercept Routing

    Intercept Routing Description Provides automatic redirection of incoming CO calls. There are the following two types of Intercept Routing: Rerouting Activated when an incoming CO call cannot be placed on the destination extension. Intercept Routing-No Answer (IRNA) Activated when an incoming CO call is not answered within a specified period of time (Intercept time).

  • Page 262
    General Features Programming Guide References • 2.5 System Timer – Intercept Time – DISA IRNA Time • 3.2 Trunk Group – Intercept Destination – Day / Night – IRNA for TIE Line • 4.3 Extension Line – Intercept Destination — Day / Night Features Guide References None User Manual References…
  • Page 263: One-Touch Transfer

    One-Touch Transfer Description Allows the PT user to transfer the call to the destination extension simply by pressing the DSS (or Phantom) button. This eliminates the needs for pressing the TRANSFER button and dialing the destination extension number. If this feature is enabled, the current call is placed on hold (Consultation Hold) automatically when the PT user presses an idle DSS (or Phantom) button for transferring purpose.

  • Page 264
    General Features Features Guide References 1.10 Holding Features • Automatic Hold—For Hold User Manual References • 4.3.16 Call Transfer • 5.2.25 Call Transfer Features Guide…
  • Page 265: Ringing Transfer

    Ringing Transfer Description If the Extension 1001 has an SDN button which corresponds with the PDN button of the Extension 2001 (PDN owner), the Extension 1001 can transfer the call on the SDN button to the Extension 2001 with a simple operation. This is called «Ringing Transfer.» Conditions •…

  • Page 266: Conversation Features

    General Features 1.12 Conversation Features Conference, 3-Party Description The system supports 3-party conference calls which include outside or inside parties or both. During a 2-party conversation, the extension user can add a third party to their conversation, thereby establishing a conference. Conditions •…

  • Page 267
    Programming Guide References • 2.4 Class of Service (COS) – Released Link Operation • 2.8 System Option – Confirmation tone for Override, Barge-in, Conference and Privacy Release • 4.3 Extension Line – CO Key – PF Key • 4.4 DSS Console –…
  • Page 268: Conference, 5-Party

    General Features Conference, 5-Party Description A PT user can originate a 5-party conference call which includes outside or inside parties or both. Conditions • Up to two 5-party conference calls can be held at a time in the system, even if TSW Conference Expansion card is installed on the TSW card.

  • Page 269
    User Manual References • 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment • 3.2.5 [005] Flexible CO Button Assignment • 4.3.21 Conference, 3-Party • 4.3.22 Conference, 5-Party Features Guide General Features…
  • Page 270: Conference, Unattended

    General Features Conference, Unattended Description A PT user who originated a conference call with two outside parties can leave the conference for a while to allow the other two parties to continue conversation. This is called an Unattended Conference. The conference originator may return to the conference, if desired. Conditions •…

  • Page 271
    1.13 Audible Tone Features • Hold Recall User Manual References • 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment • 3.2.5 [005] Flexible CO Button Assignment • 4.3.21 Conference, 3-Party • 4.3.23 Conference, Unattended Features Guide General Features…
  • Page 272: Data Line Security

    General Features Data Line Security Description Once Data Line Security is set on the extension, communication between the extension and the other end is protected from any signal such as Call Waiting, Hold Recall and Executive Busy Override. Data equipment or a facsimile may be connected to an extension port so that the extension user can perform data communications.

  • Page 273: Doorphone Call

    Doorphone Call Description Doorphone provides a conversation between an extension user and a visitor at a door. When a visitor presses the doorphone button, pre-assigned destination extensions ring. The extension who answered the call can talk to the visitor. It is possible for any extension user to call a doorphone.

  • Page 274: End-To-End Dtmf Signaling (Tone Through)

    General Features End-to-End DTMF Signaling (Tone Through) Description DTMF signaling is required for access to special network services offered by some telephone companies. This system allows the extension user to signal the other end using DTMF tones during an established call.

  • Page 275: External Feature Access

    External Feature Access Description Allows the extension user to have access to the features of a host PBX, Centrex or Central Office, such as Call Waiting, etc. This is performed by putting the current party on hold and sending a flash signal to the other end during an outside call. Conditions •…

  • Page 276
    General Features User Manual References • 4.3.18 Call Waiting from Central Office • 4.3.35 External Feature Access • 4.3.51 Off-Hook Monitor Features Guide…
  • Page 277: Flash

    Flash Description The FLASH button is used to allow a PT user to disconnect the current call and originate another call without hanging up. Conditions • Flash or External Feature Access Pressing the FLASH button on a PT results in either sending Flash signal (External Feature Access) or disconnecting the current call (Flash).

  • Page 278: Hands-Free Operation

    General Features Hands-free Operation Description Allows the PT user to dial and to talk to the other party without lifting the handset. Pressing an appropriate button provides hands-free mode. Conditions • This function can be utilized by pressing a button listed below when the SP-PHONE / MONITOR button indicator is off: –…

  • Page 279: Off-Hook Monitor

    Off-Hook Monitor Description Allows a PT user on a handset call to let other people around him monitor the call by pressing the SP-PHONE button. Conditions • This feature is available for the following PT extensions only: KX-T7431, KX-T7433, KX-T7436 •…

  • Page 280: Privacy Release

    General Features Privacy Release Description Allows the PT user to release Automatic Privacy for an existing call in order to establish a 3- party call. During a conversation with an outside party on a CO button, the extension user can allow another extension user to join in the existing call by pressing the CO button.

  • Page 281: Privacy, Automatic

    Privacy, Automatic Description By default all conversations established on CO lines, extension lines and doorphone lines have privacy activated, that is, an existing call is not interrupted by anyone. Conditions • Privacy Release Automatic privacy may be temporarily released to establish a 3-party conference call, either by «Executive Busy Override»…

  • Page 282: Pulse To Tone Conversion

    General Features Pulse to Tone Conversion Description Allows the extension user to change the dialing mode from pulse dial to tone dial (DTMF) temporarily during a call so that they can access special services which require tone dialing such as a computer-accessed long distance call. Conditions •…

  • Page 283: Two-Way Recording Into The Voice Mail

    • 5.2.19 Two-Way Record Button (Assignment) • 5.2.20 Two-Way Transfer Button (Assignment) Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone [DPT] integration; e.g., KX-TVS100).

  • Page 284: Audible Tone Features

    General Features 1.13 Audible Tone Features Confirmation Tones Description A confirmation tone indicates that an action was accepted by the system, and the extension user can proceed to the next operation. At the end of various operations, the extension user can confirm the success of the operation by hearing a confirmation tone.

  • Page 285
    Confirmation tone 4: Sent when a 2-party call is changing to a 3-party call and vice versa. (These are caused by Executive Busy Override, Barge-in, 3-party conference call or Privacy Release.) It is possible to eliminate this tone by System Programming. Conditions •…
  • Page 286: Dial Tones, Distinctive

    General Features Dial Tones, Distinctive Description The following four types of dial tone patterns are provided to give information about features activated on the extension. Dial tone 1: Normal dial tone. None of the features listed below are activated. Dial tone 2: Emitted when any one or more of the features below are set. Absent Message Capability Background Music (BGM) Call Forwarding…

  • Page 287
    Conditions None Programming Guide References • 2.8 System Option – Special dial tone after setting feature Features Guide References None User Manual References Not applicable. Features Guide General Features…
  • Page 288: Hold Recall

    General Features Hold Recall Description Prevents a call on hold from being kept waiting longer than a pre-determined time. If the timer expires, ringing or an alarm tone is sent to the extension user who held the call as a reminder. If the extension is on-hook and its speakerphone (PT only) is off, the phone will ring (Hold Recall Tone).

  • Page 289
    The display PT flashes the indication of the held party for five seconds at 15-second intervals synchronizing with the tone. Programming Guide References • 2.3 Numbering Plan – Call Waiting Set / Cancel • 2.5 System Timer – Hold Recall Time Features Guide References 1.10 Holding Features •…
  • Page 290: Ringing Tone Selection

    General Features Ringing Tone Selection Description Allows the DPT user to select one of eight ringer frequencies for each line access button (ICM, CO, DN). This is useful to distinguish the type of incoming calls by ringing. Conditions None Programming Guide References •…

  • Page 291: Ringing, Delayed

    Ringing, Delayed Description The extension can be set to ring immediately, delayed ringing, or no ringing. Conditions • DIL 1:N Call When a DIL 1:N call (an outside call directed to multiple extensions) comes in, all destination extensions ring immediately by default. This setting can be changed to delayed ringing or no ringing on each member of the DIL 1:N Group basis.

  • Page 292: Ringing, Discriminating

    General Features Ringing, Discriminating Description Allows the extension user to identify the incoming call by the ringing pattern (Please refer to Section «4 Tones / Ring Tones»). Conditions • Call Ringing Priority When there are multiple incoming calls and the extension goes from off-hook to on-hook, the calls ring according to the following priority: Consultation Hold Recall An incoming call from a line in which the Prime Line Preference –…

  • Page 293: Paging Features

    [All], [External] • An external pager (user-supplied) must be connected to the System beforehand. Up to two external pagers can be connected to the KX-TD500 System. • External Paging Tone External paging tone is emitted from external pagers, before the voice announcement.

  • Page 294
    General Features — External in this order. For example, if Paging — External is overridden by TAFAS, a reorder tone is returned to the performer of the Paging — External. If BGM is overridden by another higher priority, it is interrupted and starts again when the higher priority is finished.
  • Page 295
    User Manual References • 4.3.55 Paging • 4.3.56 Paging — Answer • 4.3.57 Paging Deny • 4.3.58 Paging and Transfer Features Guide General Features…
  • Page 296: Proprietary Telephone Features

    General Features 1.15 Proprietary Telephone Features Background Music (BGM) Description Allows the PT user in on-hook status to listen to Background Music (BGM) from the built-in speaker of his PT. Conditions • Hardware Requirements A user-supplied external music source, such as a radio, is required to utilize this feature. Up to two music sources can be connected to the system.

  • Page 297
    General Features User Manual References • 4.3.7 Background Music (BGM) Features Guide…
  • Page 298: Dss Console

    General Features DSS Console Description The DSS (Direct Station Selection) Console (KX-T7040, KX-T7240, KX-T7440, KX-T7441) provides DSS buttons for direct access to stations and busy lamp display, and PF (Programmable Feature) buttons. The DSS Console must be programmed to work with a PT in pairs. System Programming assigns the extension port numbers of the DSS Console and its associated PT.

  • Page 299
    DSS (Direct Station Selection) buttons: Used to call a corresponding extensions with One- Touch. Every button is provided with an indicator (Busy Lamp Field), which shows the current status of the corresponding extension as shown in the following table: Busy Lamp Field Table Light Flash If the DSS button is corresponded with a…
  • Page 300
    General Features Features Guide References 1.1 System Expansion • EXtra Device Port (XDP) 1.11 Transferring Features • One-Touch Transfer 1.16 Button Features • Button, Direct Station Selection (DSS) • Button, Flexible User Manual References • 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment • 3.2.5 [005] Flexible CO Button Assignment •…
  • Page 301: Handset Microphone Mute

    • If AUTO ANSWER / MUTE button is pressed in Hands-free mode, Microphone Mute mode will be turned on. Programming Guide References System Programming is not required. Features Guide References 1.15 Proprietary Telephone Features • Microphone Mute User Manual References • 4.3.39 Handset Microphone Mute • 4.3.47 Microphone Mute…

  • Page 302: Handset/Headset Selection

    General Features Handset/Headset Selection Description The system supports the use of optional headset on PTs. Conditions • Headset mode can be set by: [DPT] Station Programming [APT] HANDSET/HEADSET selector on the APT or on the handset or both • «OHCA» is available on an extension in Headset mode. •…

  • Page 303: Microphone Mute

    • This feature is available for the PT with AUTO ANSWER / MUTE button only. Programming Guide References System Programming is not required. Features Guide References 1.15 Proprietary Telephone Features • Handset Microphone Mute User Manual References • 4.3.39 Handset Microphone Mute •…

  • Page 304: Station Program Clear

    Log-out (k) Message Waiting (All the messages that have been left by other extension users) Paging Deny (m) Paralleled Telephone enabled (n) Pickup Dialing (The stored telephone number will be removed.) (o) Timed Reminder (p) Walking Station Conditions None Programming Guide References •…

  • Page 305
    General Features User Manual References • 4.3.71 Station Program Clear Features Guide…
  • Page 306: Station Programming

    General Features Station Programming Description Allows the PT user to customize the extension to his needs. The following are the programming items available: For both APT and DPT: • Call Waiting Tone Type Assignment • Flexible Button Assignment • Full One-Touch Dialing Assignment •…

  • Page 307
    User Manual References • 2 Station Programming • 4.4.3 Call Log Incoming, Log Lock • 4.4.4 Live Call Screening (LCS) Password Clear • 4.4.9 Remote Station Lock Control Features Guide General Features…
  • Page 308: Station Programming Data Default Set

    General Features Station Programming Data Default Set Description Allows the PT user to return all the following items programmed on the telephone to default setting. Programming Items Bilingual Display Selection Call Waiting Tone Type Assignment Full One-Touch Dialing Assignment Handset / Headset Selection…

  • Page 309: Volume Control-Speaker/Handset Receiver/Headset/Ringer

    – Press the volume control button (UP /DOWN ) to select a desired volume level. However, the ringer volume of KX-T7220 and KX-T7250 is selected with Ringer Volume Selector (OFF/LOW/HIGH). [APTs] – Slide the following levers located on the left side of the telephone. Volume Control (MIN — MAX) Handset Headset Volume Selector (NORMAL/MID/HIGH)

  • Page 310: Button Features

    – CO Key • 4.4 DSS Console – DSS Key Features Guide References 1.11 Transferring Features • One-Touch Transfer 1.15 Proprietary Telephone Features • DSS Console 1.17 Display Features • Busy Lamp Field User Manual References • 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment •…

  • Page 311: Button, Flexible

    Button, Flexible Description The use of Flexible Buttons on PT is determined by Station, User or System Programming. The following three types of Flexible Buttons are provided on PT or DSS Consoles or both: • Flexible CO buttons (provided on all PTs) •…

  • Page 312
    Can only be assigned by User or System Programming. Can only be assigned by System Programming. Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone [DPT] integration; e.g., KX-TVS100). Conditions •…
  • Page 313
    – PF Key • 4.4 DSS Console – DSS Key – PF Key Features Guide References 1.15 Proprietary Telephone Features • DSS Console 1.16 Button Features • Buttons on Proprietary Telephones and DSS Consoles User Manual References • 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment •…
  • Page 314: Button, Line Access

    General Features Button, Line Access Description Used to get a line for making / answering a call. Line Access Buttons are provided on PTs only. They are categorized as follows: Button Type Intercom (ICM) Used to make or receive intercom calls, and to set or cancel various features. Available for an ICM type PT only.

  • Page 315
    Conditions [General] • Ringing Tone Selection (DPT only) A ringing tone type for CO (S-CO, G-CO, L-CO) and DN (PDN, SDN) buttons can be selected either by Station or System Programming. [CO General] • CO Button Assignment (flexible CO) A CO button (S-CO, G-CO, L-CO) can be assigned to a flexible CO button on a PT by Station, User or System Programming.
  • Page 316
    General Features [DN General] • DN Button Assignment (flexible CO) A DN button (PDN, SDN) can be assigned to a flexible CO button on a PT by Station, User or System Programming. PDN: Up to three PDN buttons can be assigned per PT and at least one PDN button should always be assigned to the CO 01 button.
  • Page 317
    Programming Guide References • 2.2 Tenant – Automatic Route Selection • 2.4 Class of Service (COS) – Trunk Group Setting – SDN COS • 2.6 Local Hunt Sequence • 3.2 Trunk Group • 4.3 Extension Line – CO Key • 4.4 DSS Console –…
  • Page 318: Buttons On Proprietary Telephones And Dss Consoles

    General Features Buttons on Proprietary Telephones and DSS Consoles Description Proprietary Telephones and DSS Consoles are provided with the feature / line access buttons listed below. The functions of the listed buttons are also described. Buttons on KX-T Proprietary Telephones: 7020 / 7030 / 7050 7055 7130 7220 7230 7235 7250 7420 7425 7431 7433 7436 7450…

  • Page 319
    Buttons 7020 / 7030 / 7050 7055 7130 7220 7230 7235 7250 7420 7425 7431 7433 7436 7450 7320 7330 / 7335 SHIFT Soft SP-PHONE TRANSFER VOICE CALL / MUTE VOLUME Buttons on KX-T DSS Consoles: Buttons 7040 Answer* DSS* (32) (16) (Programmable…
  • Page 320
    PAUSE button. REDIAL: Used for Last Number Redial. SAVE: Used to store a dialed telephone number for Saved Number Redial. SELECT: Used to select the displayed function or to call the displayed phone number. SHIFT: Used to access the next level of Soft button function.
  • Page 321
    VOLUME: Used to adjust the volume of the telephone speaker, handset receiver, headset or ringer. This button can also be used to adjust the display contrast. During Special Display Features operation, this button can also be used to change the display.
  • Page 322
    General Features Features Guide References 1.16 Button Features • Button, Flexible User Manual References • 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment • 3.2.5 [005] Flexible CO Button Assignment Features Guide…
  • Page 323: Led Indication

    LED Indication Description The LED (Light Emitting Diode) indicators of the Line Access Buttons display the line conditions with the following lighting patterns: Off, Steady On, Slow flash, Moderate flash, Rapid flash. This allows the extension user to see the current status of the line. Flashing light (winks) patterns Slow flash Moderate flash…

  • Page 324
    General Features LED Indication and the line status — S-CO button LED Indication Green On Green slow flash Green moderate flash Green rapid flash Red On Red slow flash Red moderate flash Red rapid flash LED Indication and the line status — G-CO button LED Indication Green On Green slow flash…
  • Page 325
    LED Indication and the line status — L-CO button LED Indication Green On Green slow flash Green moderate flash Green rapid flash Red On Red slow flash Red moderate flash Red rapid flash LED Indication and the line status — PDN button LED Indication Green On Green slow flash…
  • Page 326
    General Features LED Indication and the line status — SDN button LED Indication Green On Green slow flash Green moderate flash Green rapid flash Red On Red slow flash Red moderate flash Red rapid flash • Items marked with » » are only available on the Single-CO button. Conditions None Programming Guide References…
  • Page 327: Display Features

    1.17 Display Features Absent Message Capability Description Once set, this option provides a message on the display of the calling extension, to show the reason for the called extension’s absence. Up to nine absent messages, common to all extension users, can be programmed as desired. There are six pre-programmed default absent messages.

  • Page 328
    General Features tone (dial tone 2) after going off-hook depending on System Programming <Section 2.8 System Option, «15. Special dial tone after setting feature» in the Programming Guide>. Programming Guide References • 2.3 Numbering Plan – Absent Message Set / Cancel •…
  • Page 329: Bilingual Display

    Bilingual Display Description Provides the display PT user with either an English or French display. Either display can be selected by Station or System Programming. Conditions None Programming Guide References • 4.3 Extension Line – Language Features Guide References None User Manual References •…

  • Page 330: Busy Lamp Field

    • 4.3 Extension Line – CO Key • 4.4 DSS Console – DSS Key Features Guide References 1.15 Proprietary Telephone Features • DSS Console 1.16 Button Features • Button, Direct Station Selection (DSS) User Manual References • 2.2.3 Flexible Button Assignment •…

  • Page 331: Call Directory

    The extension user can another extension simply by pressing the Function button associated with the name. Station Speed A list of the names and telephone numbers stored in Station Speed Dialing is Dialing Directory displayed. This allows the extension user to make a Station Speed Dialing call by knowing just the name.

  • Page 332
    General Features • Both «Name» and «Number» should be stored in pairs for each System Speed Dialing No. Otherwise «Name» is not shown on a large display PT. • Tenant Service If Tenant Service is employed, System Speed Dialing numbers and names being displayed is limited within the same tenant.
  • Page 333: Call Forwarding / Do Not Disturb

    Call Forwarding / Do Not Disturb Description Allows the KX-T7436 and KX-T7235 users to set or cancel the Call Forwarding and Do Not Disturb (DND) features using the display messages after pressing the FWD / DND button. Conditions None Programming Guide References System Programming is not required.

  • Page 334: Call Log, Incoming

    General Features Call Log, Incoming Description This is one of the Caller ID service features available for the following DPT extensions only: KX-T7230, KX-T7235, KX-T7433, KX-T7436. When an incoming CO call with Caller ID information directed to an extension is not answered, Caller ID information is automatically recorded in the Call Log of the called extension.

  • Page 335
    • Call Log Incoming, Overwrite Mode If the Call Log is full (30 call records are already logged) when a new Caller ID call comes in, the extension user can choose one of the following two options. a new call record overwrites the oldest one in the Call Log a new call record is not logged •…
  • Page 336
    General Features Programming Guide References • 1.2 Slot Assignment • 2.3 Numbering Plan – Call Log Incoming, Overwrite Mode – Call Log Incoming, Log Lock • 2.8 System Option – Automatic adjustment of the clock using Caller ID information • 4.2 Trunk Line –…
  • Page 337: Call Log, Outgoing

    Function button associated with the telephone number. This is an extended version of «Last Number Redial.» Conditions • If the Call Log is full when a new outside call is made, the oldest telephone number is overwritten by a new one. Programming Guide References System Programming is not required.

  • Page 338: Display Contrast Adjustment

    The adjusting method differs depending on the type of PT. Soft buttons and Volume button are used to adjust the contrast to one of three levels. A sliding lever (CONTRAST selector) on the telephone is used to select one of three levels. Conditions…

  • Page 339: Display, Call Information

    These are shown when calling or called by an extension user and during an established intercom call. A display example: 123: Tony Viola Dialed telephone number This is shown when dialing the telephone number. A display example: 1234567890 Number or name of the caller These are shown if the Caller ID feature is available.

  • Page 340
    General Features T1 CO line — Caller ID Service Programming Guide References • 2.5 System Timer – Call Duration Count Start Time • 4.2 Trunk Line – Name • 4.3 Extension Line – DN – Name – Initial Display Selection •…
  • Page 341: Display, Date And Time

    Display, Date and Time Description Allows the display PT users to display the following «Date and Time Notation» while on-hook. Display example: Day of the week, Month, Day, Time (AM / PM) Conditions • The display PT users can alternate between «Date and Time» display and » Self-extension number»…

  • Page 342: Display, Self-Extension Number

    General Features Display, Self-Extension Number Description Allows the display PT user to display their own extension port physical number and extension number in Station Programming mode. Display example: extension port physical number 1 0 1 0 1 Conditions None Programming Guide References System Programming is not required.

  • Page 343: Message Waiting

    Message Waiting Description The system supports the ability to inform the called party of a message waiting. The called party, with a MESSAGE button, Another Extension Message Waiting button or Phantom Extension Message Waiting button knows there is a message if the MESSAGE button, Another Extension Message Waiting button or Phantom Extension Message Waiting button LED (Light Emitting Diode) lights red.

  • Page 344
    General Features Programming Guide References • 2.3 Numbering Plan – Message Waiting Set / Cancel / Call Back • 2.8 System Option – Message Waiting lamp pattern • 4.3 Extension Line – Message Lamp – CO Key • 4.4 DSS Console –…
  • Page 345: Special Display Features

    Special Display Features Description With the display telephone, KX-T7431, KX-T7433, KX-T7436 or KX-T7235, the extension user can easily access several features. The display telephones have the ability to perform the following features. Feature Call Directory Extension Dialing Station Speed Dialing…

  • Page 346: System Feature Access Menu

    Group Log-In / Log-Out Live Call Screening (LCS) Password Clear Log-In / Log-Out Message Waiting Paging, access / answer / deny Paralleled Telephone (set / cancel) Pickup Dialing (Hot Line) Station Program Clear Timed Reminder (Wake-Up Call) Walking COS Timed Reminder, Remote (Wake-Up Call)

  • Page 347
    Programming Guide References System Programming is not required. Features Guide References None User Manual References • 4.5.9 KX-T7235 Display Features — System Feature Access Menu • 4.5.12 KX-T7431 / KX-T7433 / KX-T7436 Display Features — System Feature Access Menu Features Guide General Features…
  • Page 348
    General Features Features Guide…
  • Page 349: Isdn Features

    ISDN Features Section 2 ISDN Features Features Guide…

  • Page 350: Isdn Features

    PRI provides 23 B channels (64 kbps for each) for data transmission and 1 D channel (64 kbps) for signaling (23B + D). [System Hardware Requirements] To interface the KX-TD500 System with ISDN, one of the following two trunk cards is required depending on the ISDN interface type. •KX-TD50288 (BRI Card) for Basic Rate Interface •KX-TD50290 (PRI23 Card) for Primary Rate Interface…

  • Page 351
    extension (with DN) or virtual extension (with FDN) directly after translation of the MDN number. MDN (Multiple Directory Number) Configuration ISDN Features Guide TD500 MDN line 1000 1001 ISDN Features 1002 (Ext.2000) 1003 (Ext.2001) 1004 (Ext.2002) 1005 (Ext.2003)
  • Page 352
    ISDN Features Flow chart of required programs for ISDN Select «P-P» or «P-MP» as Access Mode in program 1.2 Slot Assignment (BRI Card Properties). Select «MDN» as Incoming Type in program 4.2 Trunk Line. Assign («Digit to receive DID,» «[DID / TIE] Digits to delete» and «[DID / TIE] Number to be added») according to the contract with the Central Office in program…
  • Page 353
    Installation Manual References • 2.5.6 BRI Card (KX-TD50288) • 2.5.7 PRI23 Card (KX-TD50290) Programming Guide References • 1.2 Slot Assignment • 1.8 BRI Port Assignment • 1.9 PRI Port Assignment • 4.2 Trunk Line – Incoming Type – Destination—Day/Night/Lunch/Break – [DID/TIE] Digits to delete –…
  • Page 354: Integrated Services Digital Network (Isdn) Extension

    Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Extension Description The KX-TD500 System supports the connection of Terminal Equipment with separate power supplies. For example, ISDN telephones, G4 Facsimiles and Personal Computers which are connected to an ISDN S0 bus on a BRI (Basic Rate Interface) card (KX-TD50288)/a PRI23 (Primary Rate Interface) card (KX-TD50290).

  • Page 355
    • Doorphone • Executive Busy Override Conditions • COS (Class of Service) for ISDN extension port applies to all Terminal Equipment on the same S0 bus (BRI card). Installation Manual References • 2.5.6 BRI Card (KX-TD50288) • 2.5.7 PRI23 Card (KX-TD50290) Programming Guide References •…
  • Page 356: Isdn Originating Features

    • CLIP Numbers for ISDN PRI Lines When an extension user makes an outside call using an ISDN PRI line, one of the following numbers (depending on the extension user’s choice) is displayed on the telephone of the other party as the CLIP number.

  • Page 357
    Programming Guide References • 1.2 Slot Assignment • 1.8 BRI Port Assignment • 1.9 PRI Port Assignment • 2.3 Numbering Plan – CLIP • 4.2 Trunk Line – Subscriber • 4.3 Extension Line – [CLIP Number] Public • 4.7 ISDN Extension Line –…
  • Page 358: Calling Line Identification Restriction (Clir)

    If CLIP service is enabled, the called party can find out who is calling before deciding to answer the call. • ISDN Public Switched Telephone Network This feature applies to the calls over the ISDN Public Switched Telephone Network. • Hardware Requirements To utilize this feature, a BRI card (KX-TD50288) or a PRI23 card (KX-TD50290) is required.

  • Page 359
    ISDN Features User Manual References • 4.3.20 Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR) / Calling Name Identification Restriction (CNIR) Features Guide…
  • Page 360: Calling Name Identification Presentation (Cnip)

    • It is programmable whether or not to use the CNIP (ISDN) service when an outside call is made using an ISDN PRI line by System Programming <Section 2.8 System Option, «CNIP Service» in the Programming Guide>. • The name for CNIP Service cannot be programmed. It is informed from ISDN telephone company. Installation Manual References •…

  • Page 361: Calling Name Identification Restriction (Cnir)

    (Calling Name Identification Presentation, CNIP). • ISDN Public Switched Telephone Network This feature applies to the calls over the ISDN Public Switched Telephone Network. • Hardware Requirements To utilize this feature, a PRI23 card (KX-TD50290) is required.

  • Page 362: Isdn Attended Features

    Provides automatic direction of an incoming call from ISDN to a specific extension. To realize this service, the DID number informed from ISDN telephone company is required. The DID number is converted to a DN or FDN of the destination using a pre-programmed conversion table.

  • Page 363
    • The tenant number and VPS trunk group number can be assigned in the DID table so that the system is shared with tenants on a DID No. basis. It is programmable whether to enable Features Guide Destination Destination (Day) (Night) 2000 3000 ISDN Features Name (Max. 10 characters) PANASONIC…
  • Page 364
    ISDN Features or disable the tenant assigned on a DID No. basis by System Programming <Section 2.8 System Option, «VM Trunk Service for DID » in the Programming Guide>. • Tenant number is used to determine the time mode (day/night) for the corresponding DID number.
  • Page 365: Multiple Directory Number (Mdn) Ringing Service

    Provides automatic direction of an incoming call from ISDN to a specific extension. To realize this service, the MDN number informed from ISDN telephone company is required. The MDN number is converted to a DN or FDN of the destination by using a pre-programmed conversion table.

  • Page 366
    IRNA destination or the call waits until the destination becomes idle. This is determined by System Programming. Installation Manual References • 2.5.6 BRI Card (KX-TD50288) 2311 Destination Destination (Day) (Night) 2000 3000 Name (Max. 10 characters) PANASONIC Features Guide…
  • Page 367
    Programming Guide References • 1.8 BRI Port Assignment • 2.8 System Option – Destination Busy — DID – Illegal Number — DID • 3.2 Trunk Group – Intercept Destination – Day / Night • 4.2 Trunk Line – Incoming Type –…
  • Page 368
    ISDN Features Features Guide…
  • Page 369: Tie Line Features

    TIE Line Features Section 3 TIE Line Features Features Guide…

  • Page 370: Tie Line Features

    TIE Line Features 3.1 TIE Line Features Outside (CO) Line and TIE Line Connection Description TIE lines are usually used to link two or more distant locations where high volume calling traffic exists. However, a person at a location outside of the TIE Line Network can also use it by first making a CO call via public network to the nearest point of TIE Line Network for the purpose of saving the toll call charge.

  • Page 371
    No. Leading Digits to Digit delete PBX-2 • 2.7 Trunk to Trunk Restriction • 8.2 TIE Routing Table – PBX Code: 951 No. Leading Digits to Digit delete 2. When a caller makes a CO call according to «DID Dial Registration» DID (ISDN)/ DID Line Local…
  • Page 372
    TIE Line Features Programming example: To make up the TIE Line Network above, the following System Programming is required at PBX-1 and -2 respectively. PBX-1 • 2.3 Numbering Plan – (01) 1st Hundred Block Extension: 10 – (77) Other PBX 01: 2 •…
  • Page 373
    Programming Guide References • 2.3 Numbering Plan • 2.7 Trunk to Trunk Restriction • 4.2 Trunk Line – [DID/TIE] Digits to delete – [DID/TIE] Number to be added • 8.2 TIE Routing Table – PBX Code • 9.2 DID Dial Registration Features Guide References 1.11 Transferring Features •…
  • Page 374: Tie Line And Outside (Co) Line Connection

    TIE Line Features TIE Line and Outside (CO) Line Connection Description TIE Lines can be used to minimize the cost of calls to a distant location outside of the TIE Line Network. A long distance call from one location may be a local call from another location. This fact should be considered before making a long distance call.

  • Page 375: No. Leading Digits To Number To Trunk Group No

    PBX-2 • 2.7 Trunk to Trunk Restriction • 4.2 Trunk Line – [TIE Line] TIE-to-CO Security Mode • 8.2 TIE Routing Table – PBX Code: 951 No. Leading Digits to Digit delete Conditions • Trunk to Trunk Restriction Used to allow or restrict trunk-to-trunk path connection. To permit the TIE caller to make a CO call via TD500 System, the Trunk Group used for this purpose should be allowed to relay the call by System Programming.

  • Page 376: Tie Line And Tie Line Connection

    TIE Line Features TIE Line and TIE Line Connection Description TIE calls among several different company locations can be done by dialing a 3 or 4-digit extension number only, or by dialing a location number (PBX Code) and an extension number. 1.

  • Page 377: 1Xx

    PBX–2 • 2.3 Numbering Plan – (01) 1st Hundred Block Extension: 20 – (77) Other PBX 01: 1 • 8.2 TIE Routing Table No. Leading Digits to Digit delete 2. Location Number (PBX code) and Extension Number Extension users can make a call to other extension users in other PBXs within a TIE Line Network by dialing a location number (PBX Code) and an extension number.

  • Page 378
    TIE Line Features No. Leading Digits to Digit delete PBX-2 • 2.3 Numbering Plan – (76) TIE Line Access: 77 • 8.2 TIE Routing Table – PBX Code: 951 No. Leading Digits to Digit delete Conditions None Programming Guide References •…
  • Page 379: Tie Line Network — Alternate Routing

    When more than two PBXs at different locations are interconnected with a network of TIE Lines, your KX-TD500 works as an intermediate switching office to other PBXs in the network by relaying TIE calls from one PBX to another. A problem of telephone switching is that blocking sometimes occurs on the network, and a call cannot be switched as required because all the lines on a given route are occupied or unavailable.

  • Page 380
    TIE Line Features Programming example: To realize the call flow mentioned above, the following System Programming is required at PBX-1, -3, and -4 respectively. PBX-1 • 8.2 TIE Routing Table – PBX Code: 951 No. Leading Digits to Digit delete •…
  • Page 381
    Note • If you want to restrict «call relay from PBX-1 to PBX-2 via PBX-3,» set TG11 to «Yes» at PBX-3 using Trunk to Trunk Restriction Programming. Conditions None Programming Guide References • 2.7 Trunk to Trunk Restriction • 4.2 Trunk Line –…
  • Page 382: Tie Line Service

    TIE lines can be used to call through KX-TD500 to reach another switching system (PBX or CO). By utilizing the TIE lines, the KX-TD500 can support not only communications with the public network but with other locations of the company in the private network of which your KX-TD500 can be a part.

  • Page 383
    Location Number (PBX Code) + Extension Number TIE Line Access Code CO (TIE) button Routing Procedure 1: TIE Routing Table Provides for the routing of calls over the TIE Line Network. Up to 36 routing patterns can be programmed in this table. This table is referenced by the system to identify the trunk route, when an extension user made a TIE call by dialing the feature number for «TIE Line Access»…
  • Page 384
    TIE Line Features Routing Procedure 2: Routing Flow Chart (1) When a call is made by an extension user in your PBX Extension Own Ext. No? Calling to Extension Analyzing extension dialed number TIE trunk Is the leading 3 digits registered in the table? Calling to TIE Reorder Tone…
  • Page 385
    Routing Procedure 3: Routing Flow Chart (2) Is there your PBX’s extension number in the received digits? Does that extension actually exist? Sends busy Is it idle? tone. Calling to the specified extension. Features Guide Analyzing digits sent from the other PBX.
  • Page 386
    TIE Line Features Conditions • Basic Programming The Programming items listed in the following «Programming Guide References» are always required to make use of TIE lines. • Application Programming Programming items required vary depending on a type of applications. Please refer to the following features in this section for further information about each application programming.
  • Page 387
    Features Guide References 1.11 Transferring Features • Call Transfer User Manual References Not applicable. Features Guide TIE Line Features…
  • Page 388
    TIE Line Features Features Guide…
  • Page 389: Tones/Ring Tones

    Section 4 Tones/Ring Tones Features Guide…

  • Page 390
    Tone / Ring Tone Tone Patterns Confirmation Tone 1 Confirmation Tone 2 Confirmation Tone 3 Confirmation Tone 4 Dial Tone 1 Dial Tone 2 Dial Tone 3 Dial Tone 4 Busy Tone Reorder Tone Ringback Tone 1 Ringback Tone 2 Do Not Disturb (DND) Tone CO-to-CO Line Call…
  • Page 391
    Tone Patterns 15 s Hold Alarm Tone Call Waiting Tone 1 (outside/intercom) Call Waiting Tone 2 (outside) Call Waiting Tone 2 (intercom) Outside Calls / Outside Call Hold Recall Intercom Calls / Intercom Hold Recall Doorphone Calls / Timed Reminder Callback Ringing (Camp-on Recall) Features Guide…
  • Page 392
    Tone / Ring Tone Features Guide…
  • Page 393: Index

    Index Section 5 Index Features Guide…

  • Page 394
    Absent Message Capability 327 Account Code Entry 16 Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice 153 ANSWER and RELEASE buttons Operation 227 Answering Features 227 Answering, Direct Trunk 229 Attended Features 117 Audible Tone Features 284 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-On) 155 Automatic Calling Cancel 18 Automatic Configuration 19 Automatic Hold—For Hold 243 Automatic Hold—For Transfer 244…
  • Page 395
    Pickup Dialing (Hot Line) 208 Power Failure Re-Start 115 Power Failure Transfer 116 Privacy Release 280 Privacy, Automatic 281 Proprietary Telephone Features 296 Pulse to Tone Conversion 282 Quick Dialing 210 Redial 211 Released Link Operation 86 Remote Station Feature Control 87…
  • Page 396
    Trunk Connection Assignment—Outgoing 199 Trunk Group 108 Trunk Route Control 110 Two-Way Recording into the Voice Mail 283 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) 138 User Programming with Proprietary Telephone 15 Volume Control—Speaker/Handset Receiver/ Headset/Ringer 309 Walking COS 200 Walking Station 111…
  • Page 397
    Index Features Guide…
  • Page 398
    Copyright: This manual is copyrighted by Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. (PCC). You may print out this manual solely for internal use with this model. Except above, you may not reproduce this manual in any form, in whole or part, without the prior written consent of PCC and its licensee.

  • Инструкции по эксплуатации

    1

Preview

Panasonic KX-TD500 инструкция по эксплуатации
(394 страницы)

  • Языки:Русский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    4.54 MB
  • Описание:
    Атс

Просмотр

На NoDevice можно скачать инструкцию по эксплуатации для Panasonic KX-TD500. Руководство пользователя необходимо для ознакомления с правилами установки и эксплуатации Panasonic KX-TD500. Инструкции по использованию помогут правильно настроить Panasonic KX-TD500, исправить ошибки и выявить неполадки.

Понравилась статья? Поделить с друзьями:
  • Апистим для пчел инструкция по применению
  • Временно нет доступа см руководство mercedes w204
  • Эльмуцин капсулы инструкция по применению цена
  • Может ли руководитель менять должностную инструкцию
  • Инструкция по охране труда при производстве ремонтных работ